Total Access 3000 System Manual

Total Access 3000/3010
System Manual
Manual Part Number - 61181001L1-1E
CD Part Number - 3253056@B
6TAINT001-1E
Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual
Trademarks
Any brand names and product names included in this manual are
trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective
holders.
To the Holder of this manual

The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication.
ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice.
In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental or
consequential damages or commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been
advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication.
901 Explorer Boulevard

P.O. Box 140000
Huntsville, AL 35814-4000
(256) 963-8000
2003 ADTRAN, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
6TAINT001-1E
About this Manual

ADTRANs Total Access 3000/3010 is used to deliver a variety of
digital services, including HDSL, T1, and ISDN, over copper loops,
and four T1s over optical fiber.
This manual provides a complete description of the system and
system software. The purpose of this manual is to provide the
technician, system administrator, and manager with general and
specific information related to the planning, installation, operation,
and maintenance of the Total Access 3000/3010 system. The manual
is arranged so that needed information can be quickly and easily
found. The following is an overview of the contents:
Section 1.0
System Description
Provides users with an overview of the Total Access 3000/3010 system.

Section 2.0
Engineering Guidelines
Provides information to assist network designers incorporating a Total

Access 3000/3010 system into their networks.
Section 3.0
Application Guides (APP)
Provides information on specific Total Access 3000/3010 wiring and

applications.
Section 4.0
Site Preparation (PREP)
Provides information for site engineers who will prepare the site for a
Total Access 3000/3010 installation.
Section 5.0
Installation and Turn-up Pocedures (NTP)
Provides step-by-step instructions for installers on how to install a

Total Access 3000/3010 System and perform system upgrades.
Section 6.0
Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP)
This section is also intended for installers. It outlines steps to test and
verify that the system has been properly installed.
Section 7.0
Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
Provides the detailed level procedures called out in top-level

procedures.
Section 8.0
Troubleshooting Guide (TSG)
Provides alarm codes, determinations, and LED status information.

Section 9.0
Appendixes
Provides warranty and ADTRAN contact information.
6TAINT001-1E
Revision History
This is the fifth issue of this manual. Changes are as follows:
Section 1.0 Removed information regarding the DSLAM Cell
Switch Modules and DSLAM Access Modules.
Section 2.0 Removed physical dimensions and power and heat
dissipation data for the DSLAM Cell Switch Modules
and DSLAM Access Modules.
Section 3.0 Removed DSLAM System Applications.
Section 5.0 Removed DSLAM Installation and Turnup Procedures.
Section 7.0 Removed DSLAM Detail Level Procedures.
Certification
Total Access 3000/3010 is compliant with all NEBS Level 3
requirements and is listed to UL 60950.
Federal Communications Commission Statement

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, this equipment may cause interference to radio
communications. Total Access 3000/3010 has been tested and found
to comply with limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment does not exceed Class A limits for radio emission for
digital apparatus, set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
6TAINT001-1E
6TASYS000-1E
TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

SECTION 1
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 System Description

Find a Topic in the List Below
Then Turn To:
System Overview
Page 3
System Components
Page 5
System Connectivity
Page 9
System Modules
Page 13
System Solutions
Page 33
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS000-1E

SECTION 1
Page 2 of 2
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 1 of 46
Total Access 3000/3010 System Description

This section of ADTRANs Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual is designed
for use by network engineers, planners, and designers who are upgrading or
intensifying a communications network.
It contains general information and describes physical and operational concepts,
card functions, network relationship, provisioning, testing, alarm status, and
system monitoring. This section should be used in conjunction with the
Engineering Guidelines section of this manual.
NOTE
References to common, but differing, parameters between the Total Access
3000 and the Total Access 3010, such as number of slots, will be conveyed by
the convention a/b. The a represents the Total Access 3000 parameter and the
b represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For example, the differing
number of access slots in the two platforms, 28 for the Total Access 3000 and
22 for the Total Access 3010, would be displayed 28/22.
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
System Overview .................................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 General Overview .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Features and Benefits ...................................................................................................................... 3
System Components ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Shelf ................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Heat Baffle and Fiber Routing ........................................................................................................ 7
2.3 Bay Configurations ......................................................................................................................... 8
System Connectivity ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 System and Power Ground ............................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Timing ............................................................................................................................................. 9
3.3 Network Interfaces .......................................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Loop Interfaces ............................................................................................................................. 11
3.5 Test Access ................................................................................................................................... 11
3.6 Management Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 11
3.7 Alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 11
System Modules .................................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Common Modules ......................................................................................................................... 13
4.1.1 System Controller Unit ..................................................................................................... 13
4.2 Multiplexer Modules ..................................................................................................................... 15
4.2.1 DS3 Multiplexer Module ................................................................................................. 15
4.2.2 STS-1 Multiplexer Module .............................................................................................. 16
4.2.3 OC-3 Multiplexer Module ................................................................................................ 18
4.3 Access Modules ............................................................................................................................ 19
4.3.1 HTU-C .............................................................................................................................. 20
4.3.2 HD-10 ............................................................................................................................... 23
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 2 of 46
5.
4.3.3 T1-OR ............................................................................................................................... 24

4.3.4 QFO-C .............................................................................................................................. 26
4.3.5 H2TU-C ............................................................................................................................ 28
4.3.6 DSX-1 Module ................................................................................................................. 30
4.3.7 H4TU-C ............................................................................................................................ 32
System Solutions ................................................................................................................................... 35
5.1 TDM Network Access Solutions .................................................................................................. 35
5.1.1 DSX-1 ............................................................................................................................... 35
5.1.2 DS3/STS-1 ........................................................................................................................ 36
5.1.3 OC-3 ................................................................................................................................. 36
5.2 Loop Access Solutions .................................................................................................................. 37
5.2.1 HDSL/HDSL2 .................................................................................................................. 37
5.2.1.1 Range Extension (HDSL/HDSL2) .................................................................... 38
5.2.2 ISDN ................................................................................................................................. 39
5.2.3 T1 ...................................................................................................................................... 42
5.2.4 Optical Delivery of Four T1s ........................................................................................... 43
5.2.4.1 Optical Characteristics ....................................................................................... 44
5.2.5 Automatic Protection Switching ...................................................................................... 44
FIGURES
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Front View of Shelf ..................................................................................................................... 5

Total Access 3000/3010 .............................................................................................................. 6
Seven-Foot Bay for Rack with One-Inch Mounting Spaces ...................................................... 8
Total Access 3000/3010 Backplane .......................................................................................... 10
Management Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 13
SCU Faceplate ........................................................................................................................... 14
DS3 MUX Faceplate ................................................................................................................. 15
STS-1 MUX Faceplate .............................................................................................................. 17
OC-3 MUX Faceplate ............................................................................................................... 18
HTU-C Faceplates ..................................................................................................................... 21
HD-10 Faceplate (double wide) ................................................................................................ 23
T1-OR Faceplate ....................................................................................................................... 24
QFO-C Faceplate ....................................................................................................................... 26
H2TU-C Faceplates ................................................................................................................... 28
DSX-1 Faceplate ....................................................................................................................... 30
H4TU-C Faceplates ................................................................................................................... 32
TDM Network Interfaces .......................................................................................................... 35
TDM Loop Devices ................................................................................................................... 37
HDSL/HDSL2 System Arrangement ........................................................................................ 38
ISDN Practical Arrangement .................................................................................................... 40
Total Access 3000 HD-10/ISDN Versatility ............................................................................ 41
T1 System Arrangement ............................................................................................................ 42
QFO-C System Arrangement .................................................................................................... 43
Loop Support System Arrangement .......................................................................................... 44
TABLES
Table 1.
Access Module Installation and Maintenance Practices ........................................................... 20
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 3 of 46
1.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 General Overview

ADTRANs Total Access 3000/3010 is an intelligent access platform that integrates
ADTRANs industry leading loop technologies into a single platform. Total Access
3000/3010 has unparalleled reliability, flexibility, provisioning, protection, and
management capabilities. It is designed to deploy todays advanced loop technologies
and those of the foreseeable future, as well as support all existing technologies.
Current offerings for the Total Access 3000/3010 include STS-1, OC-3, DS3, HDSL,
HDSL2, T1, ISDN, Optical Delivery of four T1s, and a System Controller Unit. The
entire system is designed for simplicity, service, compatibility, and functionality.
The Total Access 3000/3010 open-architecture backplane delivers highly reliable
services across a large number of interfaces. It is also well suited for Remote
Terminal (RT) and Multi Tenant Unit (MTU) deployment because it is temperature
hardened and requires only 6 inches of rack space. In addition, ADTRANs Total
Access EMS (Element Management System) provides a full range of network
management features and a CORBA interface for OS integration.
1.2 Features and Benefits
Total Access 3000/3010 will easily integrate future technologies

Compact size allows for reduced space requirements
Fully hardened for RT Deployment
Full NEBS Level 3 and UL Certifications
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 4 of 46
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 5 of 46
2.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.1 Shelf
Total Access 3000/3010 is composed of four main elements:
Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf and Backplane

System Controller Unit Module
Multiplexers
Access Modules
The system houses the management, multiplexer modules, and access modules. The
compact shelf includes all the features necessary for total system functioning including
provisioning, protection, monitoring, alarm status, and optical fiber routing. The single
multifunction backplane provides for a variety of system arrangements.
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is compliant with all applicable NEBS Level 3
requirements and listed to UL 60950.
All modules are inserted and removed from the front of the shelf. The far-left slot is
designated for the System Controller Unit (SCU), the next two slots are designated for
Multiplexer Modules, and the remaining 28/22 slots are reserved for access modules.
Slot openings are labeled for easy identification and the access module slots are
numerically linked for optional protection pairing.
The 6-inch high, 12-inch deep, 23-inch/19-inch wide shelf is constructed of heavy
gauge sheet metal with vent perforations on the top and bottom planes. Construction
provides for all standard wire runs. Reversible mounting brackets allow for flush
mount or 5-inch overhang configurations. Mounting brackets meet either the 1-inch or
1 3/4-inch mounting hole pattern (see Figure 1).
SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
HST
6"
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
C
R
A
F
T
LOCKOUT
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C
QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR
POWER
POWER
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
1181200L1
1181200L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
TST
TST
TST
ALM
ALM
ALM
10
10
10
10
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
DSL
DSL
DSL
DSL
1181310L1
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
PWR
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
PWR
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
HTU-C
HTU-C
HTU-C
HTU-C
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
DSX
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
DSX
LBK
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
TST
DSX
TST
DSX
TST
DSX
TST
TST
LP
TST
LP
TST
LP
TST
TST
TST
TST
LP1
TST
LP1
TST
LP1
TST
LP1
LP1
ALM
LP1
ALM
LP1
ALM
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
+
6V
+
T
X
R
X
6V
+
T
X
R
X
6V
+
T
X
R
X
6V
TX
TX
M
O
N
TX
TST
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ALM
RX
RX
RX
RX
A
P
S
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LBK
LP
TX
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
PWR
DSX
LBK
PWR
A
P
S
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
ALM
PWR
1181310L1
PWR
A ACT
P
S GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
A ACT
P
S GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
A ACT
P
S GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
T
X
R
X
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
RX
E
Q
A ACT
P
S GRN = NORM
1181101L1
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
23" or 19"
12"
Figure 1. Front View of Shelf

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 6 of 46
Total Access 3000/3010 is the foundation for an intelligent and versatile digital
services system. It is the basic building block for both metallic and optical
transmission service between the customer and the CO. The Total Access 3000/3010
can be configured to meet the growing needs of both TDM and DSLAM applications.
Figure 2 shows the Total Access 3000/3010 configured for a TDM network with
management, network, and loop interfaces.
NETWORK
Basic Rate ISDN
MANAGEMENT
ISDN
Voice Switch
NMA
Mainframe
SNMP
Management
Station
DS3
Ethernet
LAN
X.25
Network
VT100
Terminal
Network
STS-1
OC-3
Network
Network
Built-in
PAD
RS-232
Up to 56/44 DSX-1
10BaseT
Modem
SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
RS-232
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
POWER
POWER
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
To Subtended
Shelves
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
TST
10
10
10
10
DSL
ENABLE
1181200L1
DSL
1181200L1
DSL
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
DSL
ACT
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TST
ALM
A
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
1181310L1
PWR
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
R
X
6V
R
X
6V
+
R
X
6V
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
RX
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
P
S
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
RX
HTU-C
DSX
LP1
ALM
T
X
TX
PWR
TST
LP
+
T
X
TX
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
ALM
+
T
X
TX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LP
ALM
PWR
DSX
TST
ALM
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RS-485
PWR
#1
TST
LBK
LP
ALM
DSX
DSX
LBK
LP
PWR
PWR
DSX
LBK
ACT
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
PWR
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
M
O
N
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
FT1 circuit
(SDSL)
T1
circuit
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
2 HDSL
circuits
TX
E
Q
HD-10
ALM
LBK
DSL
1
ACO
TEST
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
T
NT
TDM
8DSL
SF
AMI
DIS
2 Optical Fibers
10
U-interfaces
1181000L1
TST
LP1
TX
RX
E
Q
TX
E
Q
UNIT
M
O
N
1181000L1
RX
PWR
DSX
TX
ACT
M
O
N
RX
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
TST
Regenerator
HD-10
BRI MUX
PWR
LBK
ALM
DSL
ACO
E
Q
5
RD
B1
B2
TEST
PWR
6
7
LINE
RX
Express 3000
ACT
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
10
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
LBK
TEST
5
6
T
E
7
8
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
10
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
HDSL/
HDSL2
Remote
T1
circuit
TEST
3
4
NT
TDM
8DSL
SF
AMI
DIS
7
8
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
10
Express 3000
ISDN
Terminal
Adapter
AC
DSL
1
S
NT
TDM
8DSL
SF
AMI
DIS
4 T1 Ciruits
1250110L1
ALM
ACO
TD
M
O
N
DSL
1
TEST
TX
RX
TX
PWR
LBK
ALM
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
HD-10
BRI MUX
1250110L1
ALM
LP2
ACT
HD-10
BRI MUX
1250110L1
PWR
LP1
1 2 3 4 5 6
LP2
ALM
TX
RX
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
FNID
LP1
LP2
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
DSX
TST
ACT
UNIT
1181000L1
DSX
ALM
M
O
N
PWR
UNIT
PWR
TX
RX
1 2 3 4 5 6
HDSL/
HDSL2
circuit
RX
1250110L1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ADTRAN
Loop
Support
System
LP2
ALM
HD-10
BRI MUX
PWR
Optical DS2
Remote
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
NID
LOCAL LOOP
Figure 2. Total Access 3000/3010
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 7 of 46
2.2 Heat Baffle and Fiber Routing

An optional heat baffle mounts directly above the main shelf. The heat baffle is 4
inches high and 21.5/17.5 inches wide. It allows passage of cool air to convect heat
away from the shelf above the baffle. It also has a shallow trough in front to route fiber
optic cables from the shelf below the baffle. A separate fan module pulls air up and
across the shelf cards below the baffle. All elements fit in the standard 23-inch/19-inch
wide rack.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 8 of 46
2.3 Bay Configurations

Total Access 3000/3010 is available in a 7-foot bay configuration. The actual number
of services that can be provisioned from a particular bay depends on the type and
concentration of those services. Some arrangements draw more power than others and
may impact total power consumption to a higher degree. See Figure 3 for an example
of a six-shelf installation.
Fuse Panel
Fuse Panel(s) are

4 inches in height.
Heat Baffle #6
Total Access Shelf #6
Heat Baffle #5
Heat Baffle is 4 inches in height.
Total Access Shelf

is 6 inches in height.
Heat Baffle #4
Six Total Access

Shelves require 64 inches
in a 7-foot bay.

Heat Baffle #3
Heat Baffle #2
Heat Baffle #1
Heat Baffle #0
7-Foot Bay
Figure 3. Seven-Foot Bay for Rack with One-Inch Mounting Spaces

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 9 of 46
3.
SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY
The multifunction single backplane is the key element in system versatility. It contains
all I/O connectors, control and signal routing, power input and ground, plus the
interconnections between access modules, multiplexer cards, and the SCU. There are
also facilities for plug-in modules and wire-wrap pins for special purposes.
See Figure 4.
Refer to Figure 4, (page 9) the Total Access 3000/3010 Backplane, to identify the
locations of the following:
3.1 System and Power Ground

Flag A. Power Connections
The system is designed to accommodate redundant power configurations. Dual
Terminals for -48V and return are provided. The system will operate with either
individual supply or both supplies functioning.
Flag B. Frame Ground
Copper terminal block is provided for frame ground.
3.2 Timing
Flag C. Timing Input
Total Access 3000/3010 operates in local, loop, or external timing modes. For external
timing modes, the unit accepts an optional daughterboard to terminate a 64K
composite clock at C1 and routes the timing signal to all modules. For SONET
applications, the shelf terminates primary (C2) and secondary (C3) DS1 1.544M
clocks and delivers the signal to the MUX common cards.
Flag D. Output Clock
Two external DS1 clock outputs allow Total Access 3000/3010 to source time other
communication devices. The shelf provides two output clock sources when a
multiplexer that supports this feature is installed.
3.3 Network Interfaces

NOTE
Total Access 3000/3010 can accept DSX and MUX signals simultaneously.
Flag E. Multiplexed Network Access
The high-speed multiplexed interface (DS3 or STS-1) is available through standard
coax cable connections. A BNC adapter, P/N 1181004L1, is required. All fiber
contectivity is accessed through the faceplate.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
32
20
64
C B A
C2
P6
32
64
10
C6
R1
R15
R19
R18
R17
R16
32
R2
R14
R13
R12
C B A
20
25
13
P16
10
J28
J33
32
20
10
C B A
PAIR 5
J27
32
20
10
32
20
10
C B A
NTWK MGMT
25
P4
25
P5
50
J27
14
C6
32
P4
EXTCLK
A - IN
J25
F or G
C B A
P17
J26
P13
32
J30
C B A
J21
20
10
33
50
32
LOOP
TEST
ACCESS
R1
T1
C1
J24
24
32
20
10
C B A
32
J21
-48VDC
RET
-48VDC
PRI
TS2
26
P10
J23
-48VDC
RET
C B A
J22
C1
-48 VDC RET
32
32
-48 VDC SEC
20
PAIR 3
20
J20
10
C B A
10
-48VDC
SEC
F or G
P18
J24
J25
PAIR 4
F or G
-48 VDC RET
TS1
-48 VDC PRI
J22
TS1
32
64
C B A
P7
32
20
10
P12
P19
J26
24
C B A
J23
S1
R1
T1
A - IN
32
PAIR 5
26
32
J18
20
10
C B A
AUX2
24
P17
24
J14
AUX1
32
NO
P3
AUX2
C B A
NC
32
64
J15
32
64
NO
PAIR 6
J12
P9
J14
32
32
P16
NO
50
26
26
C B A
J12
NC
PAIR 7
MAJ-A
P8
NO
32
10
NO
C B A
20
J11
C B A
50
CRI-A
25
NO
NC
24
NO
NC
PAIR 2
MIN-A
NC
J7
C B A
P20
20
J6
PAIR 7
26
26
26
J5
ENET
B - OUT
32
64
C B A
P10
32
F or G
F or G
MAJ-A
32
32
33
20
20
C B A
J8
P8
10
J9
10
F or G
PAIR 8
J8
24
NO
J10
P7
NC
P1
32
20
10
32
64
33
24
50
J9
25
P2
MIN-A
NC
F or G
F or G
ALARM OUTPUTS
32
10
J10
CRI-A
J13
P21
C B A
P24
32
10
J11
NC
F or G
PAIR 4
J13
C B A
AUXI
32
20
10
F or G
32
20
20
J15
RMT
EXT INPUTS
J16
10
33
C B A
10
25
P6
50
25
P3
50
ACO
PAIR 6
32
J17
P20
P22
J16
TS2
C B A
F or G
20
10
J19
20
32
20
PAIR 2
32
20
P18
32
C B A
32
J28
J4
A - OUT
P19
EXTCLK
J7
10
P11
B IN
R22
J6
10
32
C3
R2
R1 R14 R13
J3
IN
P9
R21
R11
P12
OUT
NTWK MGMT
J2
25
50
P1
C2
PAIR 8
RS485
J32
33
EXTCLK
C-IN
P24
20
P15
33
F3
I
30
P13
R1
T1
C3
C2
J1
PAIR 1
EXTCLK
C - IN
1181004L1
F1
CUSTOM
TELECOM
E190349
P21
RS - 485
R1
T1
SW1
P23
J34
R9
R4
R8
R7
R6
R5
C4
C6
R3
C1
F4
F2
R10
R9
R3
C8
R7
R6
R5
C5
R4
C1
10
J19
48
40
C3
R20
PC2A
J1
TX
14
94V-0
J31
32
20
10
K
D C B A
RX 2298
E D C B A
ADMIN
ADTRAN 1998
5181 . 001-1F
C COPYRIGHT
48
R1
S
P14
DSX1
TEST 30
ACCESS
T1
SW1
25
13
10
E D C B A
P15
F or G
E - NET
R22
24
DSX - 1
TEST
ACCESS
P2
32
C B A
C3
32
10
32
J2
32
J3
F or G
C B A
20
20
J4
20
C B A
PAIR 1
1
20
10
J5
10
C B A
10
F or G
20
33
P14
J29
134
227
6K
813
33
64
50
R15
EXTCLK
40
33
25
50
C2 R20 R18 R17 R16 R12
EXTCLK
A - OUT
B - IN
B - OUT
26
F or G
50
50
25
64
25
25
50
64
33
F or G
50
25
33
64
PAIR 4
25
50
64
33
P5
P22
25
33
64
LOOP
TEST
ACCESS
R11
50
R22
R10
R19
25
64
33
25
134
33
64
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

R11
O
N
227
6K
813
33
64
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 10 of 46
19-inch Shelf
23-inch Shelf
Figure 4. Total Access 3000/3010 Backplane
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 11 of 46
Flag F. DSX Network Access

DSX-1 level I/O network side access is achieved through the 64-pin/50-pin amphenol
connectors for the access modules.
3.4 Loop Interfaces

Flag G. Loop Access
Loop side access is achieved via 64-pin/50-pin amphenol connectors for HDSL,
HDSL2, ISDN, T1, and DS1.
3.5 Test Access

Flag H. Loop Test Access
Six wire-wrap connections provide metallic loop testing access to the customer loops.
Flag I. DSX-1 Test Access
Six wire-wrap connections provide digital loop testing access to the customer loops.
3.6 Management Interfaces

Flag J. Network Management Port
DB-25 female connector allows port access for an X.25 connection.
Flag K. Administrative Port
Female DB-25 local access port to VT100 terminal, modem, or other serial device for
permanent provisioning and troubleshooting.
Flag L. RJ-45 for 10BaseT
RJ-45 jack provides for TCP/IP (Telnet, SNMP, TFTP) communication over 10BaseT.
Flag M. RS-485
Set of wire-wrap pins provides a bus for TL1 intershelf management. Up to 32
additional devices can be daisy-chained to the first shelf at a total distance of 4000
feet.
3.7 Alarms
Flag N. Audiovisual Alarms
The shelf provides for eight alarm outputs:
Critical Visual
Critical Audible
Major Visual
Major Audible
Minor Visual
Minor Audible
AUX 1
AUX 2
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 12 of 46
Each alarm can be individually wired for normally open or normally closed
configuration.
Flag O. External Alarm Inputs
The shelf contains four external alarm inputs: ACO, Remote, AUX 1, and AUX 2.
All alarms are -48V active.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 13 of 46
4.
SYSTEM MODULES
4.1 Common Modules

4.1.1 System Controller Unit (P/N 1181018L1)
The System Controller Unit (SCU) serves as the user interface into the system. The
operator provisions and monitors other modules in the system, either locally or
remotely, via the SCU. See Figure 5 for typical management interfaces to Total
Access 3000/3010.
SNMP
Management
Station
NMA
Mainframe
Ethernet
LAN
X.25
Network
VT100
Terminal
RS-232
10BaseT
Modem
Built-in
PAD

SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
POWER
RS-232
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
To Subtended
Shelves
RS-485
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
POWER
POWER
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
TST
TST
TST
TST
M
O
N
ALM
M
O
N
ALM
M
O
N
ALM
M
O
N
ALM
RX
RX
RX
RX
1181200L1
1181200L1
10
10
10
10
DSL
DSL
DSL
DSL
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
ACT
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
+
T
A ACT
6V
R
X
A ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
6V
R
X
A ACT
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
6V
DSX
LP1
+
T
X
TX
PWR
TST
ALM
+
T
X
TX
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
LP
ALM
PWR
TX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LP
ALM
1181310L1
PWR
LBK
LP
ALM
1181310L1
DSX
LBK
LP
PWR
PWR
DSX
LBK
PWR
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
PWR
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
A ACT
M
O
N
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
RX
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
Figure 5. Management Interfaces
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 14 of 46
The SCU incorporates these features:
DB-9 connector on the faceplate provides provisioning with a VT100

terminal (see Figure 6)
The faceplate includes a four-character alphanumeric display and toggle
switch for local module status and monitoring
Daisy-chained system communication link via the RS-485 connection
Automatically recognizes all access module technologies
Critical, major, and minor alarm hierarchy with user definable alarm levels
Multiple provisioning capability for all access, management, and multiplexer
modules
Hot swappable changeout
TL1 via X.25 or TCP/IP
Ethernet interfaces via an RJ-45 port for SNMP and/or Telnet access
DB-25 Administration connection on the backplane provides for either direct
or dial-up management
8 Alarm outputs
4 External Alarm inputs
SCU
1181018L1
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
ACO
ACO
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 6. SCU Faceplate

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 15 of 46
If Total Access 3000/3010 shelves are daisy chained together on the RS-485 bus, the
alarm status of each shelf in the daisy chain can be seen from the auxiliary shelf access
menu on the host SCU.
4.2 Multiplexer Modules

The Total Access 3000/3010 can receive its network source either directly from the
DSX cross connect panel, or from a high-speed network feed such as a DS3, STS-1 or
OC-3 connection. Two multiplexer slots, labeled A and B, allow installation of highspeed multiplexers. Utilizing one multiplexer provides a reliable, high-speed network
connection. Two multiplexers provide automatic protection switching capability; one
MUX is online, the other is in standby. The DS3 and STS-1 multiplexers get their feed
from an optional BNC connector on the backplane (labeled E in Figure 4). The OC-3
multiplexers have two fiber optic cables that connect behind the faceplate.
4.2.1
DS3 Multiplexer Module (P/N 1181020L2)

The Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 Multiplexer serves as a DS3 interface into the
system via the optional RX/TX BNC module on the backplane. The DS3 multiplexer
terminates a standard DS3 signal (45 Mbps) from the network and converts the signal
into 28 DS1s (1.544 Mbps/ea) or seven DS2s (6.3 Mbps/ea) or any combination of the
two. See Figure 7.
DS3MX
1181020L2
POWER
STATUS
TEST
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
Figure 7. DS3 MUX Faceplate

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 16 of 46
The DS3 multiplexer module provides full grooming of payload DS1s. Any payload
DS1 can be routed to any access slot in the shelf.
The DS3 incorporates these features:
Screen provisioning and troubleshooting via menus or TL1 through the SCU
Performance history
Supports M13 or C-bit parity DS3 framing
Compatible with B3ZS line code
Detects and indicates DS3 alarm and loopback conditions
Supports local and loop timing
Provides 1:1 equipment protection switching
Faceplate LED indicators include:
Power
Status
Test
Lockout
On Line
Other faceplate features include:
4.2.2
Automatic Protection Switch (APS) push-button

Test/Enable
STS-1 Multiplexer Module (P/N 1181030L2)

The Total Access 3000/3010 STS-1 SONET Multiplexer provides a full STS-1
SONET multiplexer in a single slot of a Total Access 3000/3010 chassis. This single
1-inch wide card provides a SONET terminal multiplexer in an extremely small space
and includes time slot assignment for all VT1.5s delivered through the STS-1 network
interface. Redundancy is supported but not required, so the system can have either one
or two STS-1 multiplexers installed. If two are installed, they share the same network
interface, with one of the units active and the other in hot-standby mode. See Figure 8.
Up to 28/22 VT1.5s can be delivered through the STS-1 multiplexer. However,
installing the multiplexer does not eliminate the office repeater capability of the
system, so a single system can have an STS-1 and several DSX-1 network interfaces
simultaneously. Full DS1 time slot assignment capability allows any DS1 delivered
from a VT1.5 in the STS-1 signal to be delivered to any slot in the system. The DS1
can be delivered out of the system in many different forms, including repeatered T1,
HDSL and DSX-1 for local delivery of the DS1.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 17 of 46
STS-1 MX
1181030L2
POWER
STATUS
TEST
CLOCK
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
Figure 8. STS-1 MUX Faceplate

The STS-1 incorporates these features:
Screen provisioning and troubleshooting via menus through the SCU

TL1 and SNMP support via SLV
Performance history
Provides a full SONET STS-1 terminal multiplexer in a single plug-in
module
Full grooming of VT1.5s within the STS-1
Software-controlled STS-1 LBO and automatic received equalization
Supports local, loop and external DS1 timing modes
Provides 1:1 equipment protection switching
Power
Status
Test
Clock
Lockout
On Line
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 18 of 46
4.2.3

Test/Enable
OC-3 Multiplexer Module (P/N 1181031L1)

The Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 Multiplexer transforms the Total Access 3000/3010
system into a SONET network element able to interface with industry standard
SONET equipment. The OC-3 module is a terminal mode SONET interface and
therefore deploys as a termination device subtending from a SONET ring. The first
STS-1 within the OC-3 is terminated on the shelf. The unit multiplexes and
demultiplexes the signal into 28 VT 1.5s. It provides full time slot assignment
capabilities, allowing any payload DS1 to be routed to any slot in the system. See
Figure 9.
The OC-3 module is capable of operating in a single or fully redundant configuration.
Full redundancy is achieved by configuring the modules in a protection-switching
mode in which the online MUX would transfer the payload to the off-line, or hotstandby, MUX upon the detection of a fault condition. In normal operation, both
modules receive concurrent payloads from the network, while only the online module
transmits to the network. The linked provisioning option of the OC-3 module
ensures that both modules constantly have identical provisioning settings in the event
of a protection switch to the off-line module.
OC-3MX
1181031L1
POWER
STATUS
OPTICS
TEST
CLOCK
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
Figure 9. OC-3 MUX Faceplate

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 19 of 46
The OC-3 incorporates these features:
Supports DCC management channel

Provides 1:1 OC-3 equipment and facility protection switching
Detects and indicates standard optical and SONET alarm and loopback
conditions
External, line, loop or local timing modes
Linked Provisioning option
Power
Status
Optics
Test
Clock
Lockout
On Line

Test/Enable
4.3 Access Modules

Total Access 3000/3010 incorporates a complete array of local loop access
technologies into an integrated intelligent system. Access modules include those
servicing both optical and metallic local loops. Most access modules occupy one slot
in the Total Access shelf. Those devices that occupy more than one slot will be
specifically identified.
A 1:1 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) option will place two identical modules
in adjacent slots into an online/standby status. The main unit occupies any
odd-numbered slot and its auxiliary unit occupies the next higher even-numbered slot.
Failure events with the online loop or device will enable a protection switch.
Protection is not available on the double-wide HD-10 for ISDN.
To facilitate full integration, Total Access 3000/3010 technology is compatible or
identical in function with existing ADTRAN products. Screen displays and menus are
consistent with the look and feel of other ADTRAN displays to ensure operator
familiarity.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 20 of 46
The access technologies and devices supported by Total Access 3000/3010 are listed
in Table 1. Refer to individual Installation and Maintenance Practices for detailed
information on installation, testing, operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
4.3.1
HTU-C
The Total Access 3000/3010 HDSL Transceiver Unit - Central Office (HTU-C) is a
central office transceiver unit that works with an HDSL Transceiver Unit-Remote
(HTU-R) and up to two HDSL Range Extenders (HREs) to establish T1 data rates over
the local loop. The unit is designed to operate in the shelf, which can accommodate up
to 28 HDSL circuits. See Figure 10.
The HTU-C functions as the host in a host/client arrangement, with the HTU-R and the
HRE as the clients. All of the HTU-C HDSL circuit parameters are configured in the
software. These parameters are then automatically communicated to the HTU-R upon
synchronization. The HTU-C can operate in MUX configuration (e.g. DS3-fed shelf)
or with direct DSX-1 input from the network.
Table 1. TDM Access Module Installation and Maintenance Practices

Carrier
Technology
Access Module
Device
Part
Number
Document
Number
HDSL
HTU-C
1181106L4
61181106L4-5
1181106L5
61181106L5-5
ISDN
HD-10
1181200L1
61181200L1-5
Standard T1
T1-OR
1181310L1
61181310L1-5
Optical Delivery
of four T1s
QFO-C
1181300L1
61181300L1-5
HDSL2
H2TU-C
1181112L4
61181112L4-5
1181112L5
61181112L5-5
DSX
DSX-1
1181050L1
61181050L1-5
ALE
ALE-C
1181600L1
61181600L1-5
HDSL4
H4TU-C
1181411L4
61181411L4-5
1181411L5
61181411L5-5
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 21 of 46
The HTU-C has two span powering modes, and provides less than -140V for span
powering both a low voltage HTU-R and a low voltage HRE. For span powering two
low-voltage HREs and a low-voltage HTU-R, the HTU-C provides -190 Vdc.
The Total Access HTU-C provides comprehensive user-friendly Operation,
Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) circuit information for the
entire HDSL loop.
Built-in protection switching in the 1181106L5 HTU-C allows a service provider to
provision an HDSL circuit with a second HDSL circuit in hot-standby for redundancy
of both of the HDSL CO and remote line cards and copper facilities. The 1181106L4
does not contain built-in protection switching.
STAT HLOS
STAT HLOS
DLOS RLOS
DLOS RLOS
ARM
(YEL)
LBK
(GRN)
HCRC 1
B8ZS
LBK
LINE
LP1
HCRC 2
HTU-C 1181106L5
HCRC 2
HTU-C 1181106L4
LP1
LP2
ARM
(YEL)
LBK
(GRN)
LP2
HCRC 1
B8ZS
LBK
LINE
CODE
CODE
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
PROT
GRN = ACTV L
YEL = STBY S
RED = UNAV S
OFF = DIS
Figure 10. HTU-C Faceplates
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 22 of 46
The HTU-C module incorporates these features:
Screen provisioning and troubleshooting via menus of the SCU

TL1 support for selected TDM linecards via the SCU
Performance history
Operates with two ADTRAN HREs and one HTU-R for T1 service up
to 36 kft
STAT
HLOS
DLOS
RLOS
LP1 / LP2
HCRC1 / HCRC2
ARM / LBK
B8ZS
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
Bantam jacks for multiple network and signal monitoring testing

Automatic Protection Switching (HLSS) pushbutton (1181106L5 only)
Separate PROTection LED for HLSS
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 23 of 46
4.3.2
HD-10
The Total Access 3000/3010 High Density-10 U Interface (HD-10) is a high density
circuit card that provides the functionality of an entire ISDN channel bank deployed
across a T1 carrier facility. The HD-10 is designed to provide the maximum
concentration for 2B+D Basic Rate interface (BRI) ISDN in a compact configuration.
See Figure 11.
The HD-10 accepts up to ten U interfaces and multiplexes them for T1 transport.
Conversely, the HD-10 can also accept a T1 line carrying ten multiplexed U
interfaces and demultiplexes them for individual deployments. The Total Access 3000/
3010 HD-10 operates in the industry standard 3xDS0 mode and is compatible with any
compliant ISDN channel unit such as the ADTRAN D4 U-BR1TE. The HD-10 also
supports the ADTRAN proprietary 4:1 Time Division Multiplex (TDM) format. When
deployed in the 4:1 TDM mode, up to ten 2B+D BRI circuits can be delivered,
providing optimized utilization of the T1 carrier facilities.
HD-10 BRI Mux

1181200L1
POWER
DSX
LBK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DSL
Figure 11. HD-10 Faceplate (double-wide)
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 24 of 46
The HD-10 responds to a remote payload or line loopback commands from a remote
T1 network device or test equipment in Extended Superframe (ESF) mode.
HD-10 faceplate LED indicators include:
Power
DSX Alarms
Loopback status
DSL U-interface status for all ten interfaces
The HD-10 is compatible with any compliant ISDN channel unit.
4.3.3
T1-OR
The Total Access 3000/3010 T1 Office Repeater (T1-OR) access module provides a
T1 office repeater function in a single-slot interface module. Built-in circuitry provides
support for 1:1 protection. See Figure 12.
T1-OR
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP
ALM
+
T
6V X
R
X
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
Figure 12. T1-OR Faceplate
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 25 of 46
The receive transmission path of the T1-OR provides a long-haul regenerator followed
by a provisionable DSX pre-equalizer, and its transmit path provides a short-haul
regenerator followed by a provisionable transmit line buildout. It is capable of
Superframe (SF) to Extended Superframe (ESF) framing format conversion and
provides both DSX-1 and multiplexer position connections with appropriate switching
logic.
The T1-OR can read and store Network Performance and Report Messages (NPRM)
from span equipment and generate network performance and report messages toward
the network in the receive channel. The unit can gain read/write access to the ESF
facility data link to and from the span without affecting the payload.
The T1 Office Repeater incorporates these features:

Performance history
1:1 protection circuitry
SF to ESF conversion
PWR
DSX
TST
LP
ALM
Signal jacks
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) push-button
Separate ACTive LED for APS
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 26 of 46
4.3.4
QFO-C
The Total Access 3000/3010 Quad Fiber Optic - Central Office (QFO-C) is designed
to carry up to four asynchronous DS1 circuits over single mode fiber at distances
beyond 24 km. Two units, one at the central office and the other at the customers
premises, make up a complete system. The QFO-C occupies a single slot in the shelf,
but requires an odd/even pair of slots. The even slot must either be empty or filled
with a protect module. Its remote counterpart, the Quad Fiber Optic - Remote
(QFO-R), resides in its own remote two-slot shelf. The system can be provisioned for
single unit operation or take advantage of the Automatic Protection Switching (APS)
where one unit is online and a second is in hot-standby mode capable of carrying the
data load in the event of a line failure. See Figure 13.
QF0-C
1181300L1
PWR
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
TST
ALM
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
Figure 13. QFO-C Faceplate
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 27 of 46
The DS1 interface can be equalized for 0 to 655 feet of ABAM cable (22 gauge, 110
ohm, insulated twisted pair). Performance monitoring and manual loopback of each
DS1 can be performed at the customers premises.
The QFO-C incorporates these features:

Performance history
End-to-end transmission of up to four asynchronous DS1 circuits over
single-mode fiber
Optical laser transmitter
1:1 protection circuitry
Far-end discretionary alarm input
Compatible with both AMI and B8ZS line encoding
PWR
DSX #1
DSX #2
DSX #3
DSX #4
TST
ALM
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) push-button

Separate ACTive LED for APS
The ADTRAN Remote shelf houses one or two QFO-R modules plus an alarm and
telemetry module. A single QFO-R provides simplex operation. Two QFO-Rs provide
automatic protection switching, with one unit online and a second in hot-standby
mode. The remote shelf incorporates type 400 mechanics and a 56-pin edge connector.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 28 of 46
4.3.5
H2TU-C
The Total Access 3000/3010 H2TU-C is a high-density Central Office transceiver unit
that works with a remote unit (H2TU-R) and an optional H2R to establish T1 (1.544
Mbps) data rates over a single pair copper loop. The unit is designed to operate in the
Total Access 3000/3010 chassis, which accommodates 28/22 HDSL2 circuits in a 6inch tall space. See Figure 14.
STAT
STAT
DLOS
DLOS
RLOS
RLOS
HLOS
HLOS
B8ZS
LBK
HCRC
LBK
(GRN)
ARM
(YEL)
LINE
B8ZS
LBK
CODE
1181112L5
ARM
(YEL)
DSL
1181112L4
DSL
HCRC
LBK
(GRN)
LINE
CODE
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
PROT
GRN = ACTV L
YEL = STBY S
RED = UNAV S
OFF = DIS
Figure 14. H2TU-C Faceplates

The H2TU-C functions as the master in a master/slave relationship with the H2TU-R
and H2R. The user configures the Total Access 3000/3010 H2TU-C HDSL2 circuit
parameters in software. These parameters are then automatically communicated to the
H2TU-R. The Total Access 3000/3010 H2TU-C provides comprehensive user-friendly
Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) circuit
information for the entire HDSL2 circuit.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 29 of 46
Built-in protection switching in the 118112L5 H2TU-C allows a service provider to

provision an HDSL2 circuit with a hot-standby for redundancy in both of the HDSL2
line cards and loops. The 1181112L4 H2TU-C does not contain built-in protection
switching.
The H2TU-C incorporates these features:
Converts standard bipolar DSX-1 signals to/from HDSL2 signals

Operates in Total Access 3000/3010 multiplexer applications
Offers built-in automatic protection switching for redundancy (1181112L5
only)
Span powers H2TU-R and H2R repeater for T1 service out to 24kft
Provides comprehensive circuit maintenance information
Supports multiple loopbacks for circuit diagnostics
The faceplate LED indicators include:
STAT
DLOS
RLOS
HLOS
DSL
HCRC
ARM / LBK
B8ZS
DSX-1 bantam jacks

Automatic Protection Switching (HLSS) pushbutton
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 30 of 46
4.3.6
DSX-1 Module
The Total Access 3000/3010 DSX-1 Module provides an inter-office DSX-1 interface
and is used to drop T1 bandwidth to local central office network elements. The DSX-1
Module will only operate in conjunction with a MUX module
See Figure 15.
The DSX-1 Module is capable of operating in any access slot (1-28) of the Total
Access 3000/3010 system. Faceplate EQ and MON jacks allow for complete testing
and monitoring of the DSX-1 signal. Faceplate LED indicators display important
signal and circuit status information.
The DSX-1 module supports Module Auto-Provisioning from the System Controller
Unit (SCU). This feature allows for a replacement DSX-1 module to be provisioned
with the identical settings as the previous DSX-1 module. This ensures that a
replacement module is ready for operation upon installation without delays for manual
provisioning. Provisioning errors are also minimized.
DSX-1
1181050L1
PWR
NTWK
TST
DSX
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
Figure 15. DSX-1 Faceplate
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 31 of 46
The DSX-1 module also supports a full range of diagnostic alarms and loopbacks to
aid in troubleshooting. Payloads can be looped back toward the network or customer.
Loopbacks toward the customer have an optional framing regeneration feature, which
allows the payload to have the embedded framing regenerated or not.
The DSX-1 module incorporates these features:
Supports standard T1 MIB 1406 for alarm states

AMI or B8ZS line coding
SF, ESF and Unframed framing formats
Automatically switches to online MUX module upon MUX failure or
removal
Automatically switches to local timing if LOS is detected from customer
PWR
NTWK
TST
DSX
ALM
DSX-1 bantam jacks.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 32 of 46
4.3.7
H4TU-C
The Total Access 3000/3010 H4TU-C is a high-density Central Office transceiver unit
that works with a remote unit (H4TU-R) and an optional H4R to establish T1 (1.544
Mbps) data rates over two copper loops. The unit is designed to operate in the Total
Access 3000/3010 chassis, which accommodates 28/22 HDSL4 circuits in a 6-inch tall
space. See Figure 16.
DLOS RLOS
DSL 1
DLOS RLOS
DSL 1
DSL 2
DSL 2
ARM
(YEL)
B8ZS
LBK
LBK
(GRN)
LINE
1181411L5
HCRC 2
1181411L4
HCRC 1
H TUC
STAT HLOS
H TUC
STAT HLOS
HCRC 1
HCRC 2
ARM
(YEL)
B8ZS
LBK
CODE
LBK
(GRN)
LINE
CODE
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
EQ
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
TX
DSX
MON
RX
PROT
GRN
YEL
RED
OFF
ACTV
STBY
UNAV
DIS
Figure 16. H4TU-C Faceplates

The H4TU-C functions as the master in a master/slave relationship with the H4TU-R
and H4R. The user configures the Total Access 3000/3010 H4TU-C HDSL4 circuit
parameters in software. These parameters are then automatically communicated to the
H4TU-R. The Total Access 3000/3010 H4TU-C provides comprehensive user-friendly
Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) circuit
information for the entire HDSL4 circuit.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 33 of 46
Built-in protection switching in the 1181411L5 H4TU-C allows a service provider to

provision an HDSL4 circuit with a hot-standby for redundancy in both of the HDSL4
line cards and loops. The 1181411L4 H4TU-C does not contain built-in protection
switching.
The H4TU-C incorporates these features:
Converts standard bipolar DSX-1 signals to/from HDSL4 signals

Operates in Total Access 3000/3010 multiplexer applications
Offers built-in automatic protection switching for redundancy (1181411L5
only)
Span powers H4TU-R and up to two H4R repeaters for T1 service
Provides comprehensive circuit maintenance information
Supports multiple loopbacks for circuit diagnostics
STAT
DLOS
RLOS
HLOS
DSL 1/DSL 2
HCRC 1/HCRC 2
ARM / LBK
B8ZS
DSX-1 bantam jacks

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 34 of 46
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 35 of 46
5.
SYSTEM SOLUTIONS
5.1 TDM Network Access Solutions

Total Access 3000/3010 has the ability to accept DSX-1 and multiplexed signals
simultaneously, making Total Access 3000/3010 an exceptionally flexible system
platform. See Figure 17 for network interfaces to the Total Access 3000/3010.
ISDN
Voice Switch
Basic Rate ISDN
DS3
Network
STS-1
OC-3
Network
Network
Up to 56/44 DSX-1

SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
POWER
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
5
6
LOCKOUT
F
T
POWER
DSX
LBK
ALM
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
1181200L1
DSX
FSE
ACO
C
1181200L1
SELECT
HST
ACO
POWER
POWER
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1181200L1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1181200L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
3
4
5
6
10
PWR
#2
DSX
#2
#3
DSX
#3
#4
DSX
#4
TST
PWR
#1
DSX
DSX
DSL
ACT
DSX
ACT
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
#4
DSX
#4
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TST
ALM
A
ACT
P
S
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
PWR
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
R
X
6V
6V
R
X
6V
TX
TX
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
RX
A ACT
A ACT
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
TST
LP1
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
TST
TX
LP1
LP2
LP2
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LP1
LP2
E
Q
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
ALM
TX
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
1181101L1
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
RX
HTU-C
PWR
TST
LP2
E
Q
RX
HTU-C
DSX
LP1
ALM
TX
E
Q
PWR
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
RX
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
A ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
DSX
ALM
E
Q
RX
TX
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A ACT
P
HTU-C
PWR
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
RX
TX
HTU-C
TST
LP2
ALM
+
T
X
DSX
LP1
ALM
+
R
PWR
TST
LP
ALM
T
X
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
LP
+
T
X
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LBK
ALM
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
LP
PWR
DSX
DSX
TST
ALM
A
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
#1
TST
ALM
1181310L1
LBK
ALM
PWR
DSX
DSX
10
DSL
DSX
LP
10
DSL
PWR
DSX
LBK
10
DSL
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
RX
TX
TX
RX
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
Figure 17. TDM Network Interfaces
5.1.1
DSX-1
All access slots in Total Access 3000/3010 have access to DSX-1 network interfaces.
These make the system function much like a managed Office Repeater Bay (ORB).
The advantage of having DSX-1 network interfaces available to the access module
slots is in delivering services local to the system. A local T1 need not be multiplexed
to be delivered out of the system. Conversely, delivering a local T1 in a DS3-fed
system does not require using an extra slot.
Each slot has access to as many as four DSX-1 network interfaces. This allows for 1:1
protection and optical delivery of four T1s in an access module slot. If a QFO-C card
is installed in an odd slot, the next higher numbered even slot can only be used for 1:1
protection of this module.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 36 of 46
5.1.2
DS3/STS-1
Multiplexers are optional components of Total Access 3000/3010. Multiplexers can be
installed in the shelf after the other modules are installed and the system is up and
running. Multiplexers can be added after initial installation and provisioning, and
existing or new circuits can be served through the multiplexers.
The two slots designated for multiplexers are for redundancy. A single multiplexer can
support a fully loaded shelf with any technology combination. When two multiplexers
are installed, they function in a 1:1 protection arrangement. (This protection applies to
the multiplexer electronics but not to the coax cabling to the multiplexers.)
The DS3 or STS-1 multiplexer system requires the optional coax interface adapter
(BNC Module). This module makes the physical coax connection from the network to
the Total Access System. The field-installable BNC Module can be added at any time
after initial installation. Both multiplexers in a 1:1 protected system share this single
high-speed interface.
Installing a DS3 or STS-1 multiplexer does not preclude using DSX-1 network
interfaces. Access modules can derive their network interface from either the DS3 or
STS-1 multiplexer or from a built-in DSX-1 interface depending on how they are
provisioned. Total Access 3000/3010 can support a mix of these network interfaces
with some slots deriving their network interface from the multiplexers and other slots
from the DSX-1 interface.
The DS3 or STS-1 multiplexer incorporates full Time Slot Assignment (TSA)
capability for payload. Any DS1 or DS2 in the DS3 payload can be delivered to any
slot in the system. Therefore, if the first three slots use DSX-1 network interfaces, the
fourth slot can still deliver any DS1 in the DS3 or STS-1 payload.
5.1.3
OC-3
The Total Access 3000/3010 system incorporates the option to have a SONET OC-3
multiplexer as the network source. The OC-3 multiplexer is a terminal MUX and
subtends off a higher order SONET ring. Unlike the DS3/STS-1 multiplexers
discussed in Section 4.4.2, the OC-3 MUX, when used in the Automatic Protection
Switching configuration, protects both the electronics and the path back to the SONET
ring. In addition, a second transmit/receive pair is required to the Add-Drop MUX
from which it is subtending.
Like the DS3/STS-1 multiplexers, the OC-3 provides full TSA for the incoming
VT1.5s in the data stream. The L1 (List 1) OC-3 MUX uses only the first STS-1 in the
OC-3 transport to provide 28 VT1.5s to the shelf in which the MUX is operating. The
L2 (List 2) OC-3 MUX will receive the full OC-3 payload and convert 28 VT1.5s in a
single STS-1 to 28 DS1s for delivery to a local shelf and delivers two STS-1s to two
subtended shelves via a Quad BNC module.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 37 of 46
5.2
Loop Access Solutions

See Figure 18 for some of the loop side carrier devices and arrangements that
interface to the Total Access 3000/3010.
FT1 2-wire circuit

(SDSL)
T1
circuit
2 HDSL
4-wire
ADTRAN
Loop
Support
System
HDSL
4-wire
circuit
HRE
HD-10
T1
circuit
FNID
2 Optical Fibers
10
U-interfaces
4 T1 Circuits
ISDN
Terminal
Optical DS2
Remote
Chassis
NID
HTU-R
Local Loop
Figure 18. TDM Loop Devices
5.2.1
HDSL/HDSL2
The strategic importance of HDSL/HDSL2 is the speed and ease with which HDSL/
HDSL2-provisioned T1 circuits can be brought on line. HDSL is designed for a
nominal loop length of 12,000 feet over two pairs of 24 AWG cable. HDSL2 is
designed for a nominal loop length of 12,000 feet over a single pair of 24 AWG cable.
Because this falls within the majority of typical, traditional T1 local circuits, HDSL
was marketed as repeaterless T1 technology. Within the 12 kilo-foot basic span,
HDSL requires no additional electronic components in the loop itself.
With HDSL/HDSL2 there is also less need for circuit engineering. Additionally,
HDSL is highly noise resistant. Thus, circuit pairs in a cable sheath are simply chosen
from those that are available. No special separation or assignment criteria are required.
Existing line facilities can be more easily reused, reducing new investment in outside
cable plant.
Another useful characteristic of HDSL/HDSL2 is a tolerance for bridge taps. There
may be a total of 2,500 feet of bridge taps on a circuit. Any single tap may not be
greater than 2,000 feet.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 38 of 46
An HDSL Transceiver Unit-Central Office (HTU-C) can be installed in the COcontrolled environment. The HDSL Transceiver Unit-Remote (HTU-R) is installed at
or close to the customers premises. The HTU-R is span powered by the HTU-C. This
eliminates the need for remote power arrangements and provides for a more reliable
system (see Figure 19).
The HDSL2 configuration is identical to that of HDSL above, with the addition that
the HDSL Transceiver Unit-Remote (H2TU-R) can be locally powered as well as span
powered.
5.2.1.1
Range Extension (HDSL/HDSL2)

An HDSL Range Extender (HRE) and HDSL2 Range Extender (H2R) can extend the
range of the circuit from 12,000 feet to 24,000 feet (more than 4.5 miles) over 24
AWG wire. Like the HTU-R, the HRE is span powered by the HTU-C. The H2R is
also span powered by the H2TU-C, with the H2TU-R able to be locally powered.

SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
STATUS
TEST
POWER
STATUS
TEST
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
POWER
POWER
1181200L1
1181200L1
DSX
DSX
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
LBK
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
TST
10
10
10
10
DSL
DSL
DSL
DSL
DSX
ACT
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
1181310L1
PWR
R
X
6V
R
X
6V
+
X
6V
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
RX
RX
ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A
P
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
ALM
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
HTU-C
DSX
LP1
ALM
PWR
TST
LP
T
X
TX
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
+
T
X
TX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
ALM
+
T
X
TX
TST
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
LP
ALM
PWR
TST
ALM
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
PWR
#1
TST
LBK
LP
ALM
PWR
DSX
LBK
LP
ACT
PWR
DSX
LBK
PWR
ALM
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
LBK
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
M
O
N
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
HDSL/HDSL2
circuit
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
Regenerator
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
HDSL/HDSL2
Remote
Figure 19. HDSL / HDSL2 System Arrangement
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 39 of 46
Communication between the HTU-C, HRE, and HTU-R is maintained over two-pair
twisted cable in an existing CSA loop. In HDSL2, communication is maintained over a
single twisted pair in an existing CSA loop. The HRE and H2R can maintain all loop
monitoring and pass Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
information (OAM&P) through to the HTU-C and H2TU-C, respectively.
The elimination of unnecessary repeaters greatly reduces the problems associated with
repeater performance due to moisture and temperature extremes. With less equipment
involved, maintenance of a T1 circuit is limited to the equipment at the DSX-1 shelf
and the customers premises, which are easily tested. This aspect of provisioning
reduces the overhead costs required to manage the hardware deployed in a T1 link.
Because HDSL/HDSL2 requires less equipment, fewer cable intrusions, reduced
engineering, and will run on practically any available cable pairs, circuit turn-up time
can be reduced from weeks to a matter of a few hours, or at most a few days. Often the
only testing required is a simple loop qualification test that can be executed from the
Central Office.
Two HREs are the maximum that can be deployed in an HDSL circuit. This
configuration will extend the range of the circuit to 36,000 feet (6.82 miles). HDSL2
technology is limited to a single H2R, extending the HDSL2 range to 24 kft.
5.2.2
ISDN
Total Access 3000/3010 allows you to take maximum advantage of the carrying
capacity on copper pairs while minimizing the number of pairs required. 140/110
ISDN Basic Rate Interfaces (BRIs) can be deployed from a single shelf.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 40 of 46
The system has reduced the size of a complete ISDN T1 multiplexer to a single HD-10
card that fits into two slots of Total Access 3000/3010. This provides telcos with the
capability of deploying ten ISDN circuits from a double-wide card, or a total of 140/
110 circuits from a Total Access shelf fully populated with HD-10 ISDN access
modules. See Figure 20.
Remote Terminal (RT)

Total Access
with HD-10
ISDN
Switch
140/110 BRI to
the customer
DS3
Total Access
with HD-10
Central Office (CO)
10 BRI lines
from each
HD-10 card
Customer
Figure 20. ISDN Practical Arrangement

The HD-10 ISDN Access Module is a full-featured card that provides the most
economical way to deliver Basic Rate ISDN services over a T1 carrier system, while
making the most efficient use of space. The HD-10 supports the conventional threeDS0 deployment of eight BRI services over a T1, and then adds D channel
multiplexing to support ten 2B+D services over the same T1 (a 25 percent increase).
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 41 of 46
The HD-10 can tolerate a maximum of three bridge taps, up to a total of 6,000 feet on
each circuit, with no one bridge tap exceeding 2,000 feet. The HD-10 occupies two
slots in the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, allowing 14/11 cards per system, or 140/110
BRIs. See Figure 21.
BR1/8
RU
LIU
ACT ACU
1104003L1
1104003L1
M
O
D
E
AMI
B8ZS
SF
P
I
LOC
REM
P
I
LOC
REM
TU
PAU
1104003L1
ACT PCU
1104003L1
ACT OIU
1104003L1
U-BR1TE IV U-BR1TE IV
CAU
1104003L1
AR
AV
U-BR1TE IV
U-BR1TE IV
FAIL
ESF
TP
TP MEM
AAFDFDSDFFASDF
ACO

SCU
1181015L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
DS3MX
1181020L1
HD-10
BRI MuxHD-10 BRI MuxHD-10 BRI MuxHD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C
1181200L1
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
LOCKOUT
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
ON LINE
R
A
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
F
T
POWER
1181200L1
POWER
1181200L1
POWER
1181200L1
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
DSX
10
10
10
10
DSL
DSL
DSL
DSL
QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C

HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C
HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C
1181300L1 1181300L1 1181300L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1

1181310L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1
1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1 1181101L1
1181101L1 1181101L1
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
LP
TST
LP
LP
LP
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP1
ALM
LP1
ALM
ALM
ALM
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
PWR
LP2
PWR
LP2
PWR
LP2
PWR
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
+
ALM
+
ALM
+
ALM
+
ALM
ALM
ALM
DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
T R
ALM
T R
T R
ALM
T R
6V
6V
6V
6V
X X
X X
X X
X X
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
E
TX
E
TX
E
TX
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
RX
Q
RX
Q
RX
Q
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
M
M
M
TST
M
TST
TST
TST
TX
TX
O
TX
O
TX
O
TX
O
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
M
TX
M
TX
N
M
TX
ALM
N
M
ALM
N
M
ALM
N
M
ALM
M
M
RX
M
RX
M
RX
M
RX
O
M
O
M
O
M
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ACT
N
RX
N
RX
N
RX
N
RX
RX
RX
A ACT
A ACT
RX
A ACT
RX
A A ACT
RX
RX
A ACT
RX
A ACT
RX
A ACT
RX
RX
ACT
ACT
P
ACT
P
ACT
P
ACT
P P
ACT
ACT
P
P
ACT
P
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN = NORM
GRN
GRN
= NORMGRN = NORMGRN = NORMGRN = NORM
= NORM
S
SGRN = NORMGRN = NORM
YEL = MAN YEL = MAN YEL = MAN S YEL = MAN S SYEL = MAN SYEL = MAN SYEL = MAN SYEL = MANGRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM
GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
YEL=MAN
BR1/10
ACT 2300
HD-10
BRI MUX
1250110L1
HD-10
Standalone
Figure 21. Total Access 3000 HD-10/ISDN Versatility

Service deployment requires installation of only two components. An ISDN card (HD10) is installed in Total Access 3000/3010 at a CO, a controlled environmental vault,
or a fiber hut. The far end of the DLC is then terminated with another device with a
standard U-BR1TE, which could include another HD-10, an HD-10 standalone, a BR1/
10, BR1/8, or an ACT 2300 standard D4 channel bank.
Total Access 3000/3010 can provide ISDN service to a non-ISDN CO by backhauling
from the ISDN switch at the CO in an interoffice scenario. By minimizing the
bandwidth required on the backbone, a non-ISDN CO can provide Basic Rate ISDN
service for up to 140/110 customers.
The HD-10 ISDN Access Module is fully compatible with all current and previous
generations of ADTRAN D4 U-BR1TEs, including all OEM U-BR1TE products, in
the 8-DSL mode, D4 terminal mode with D4 counting. In 10-DSL mode, it will
interoperate with the ADTRAN BR1/10 4:1 TDM mode.
ADTRAN ISDN products comply with the applicable sections of ANSI T1.601, TRNWT-000397, and TR-TSY-000829 for ISDN range extension.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 42 of 46
5.2.3
T1
The Total Access 3000/3010 T1 solution can be multiplexed or DSX-1 fed.
ADTRANs T1 solution can be used for Cell Sites requiring DS1s with a 1:1
redundancy and NPRM improved service.
The Total Access 3000/3010 T1 solutions support office building applications utilizing
PBXs, ACDs, LAN, or WANs. T1 applications can be a DS1 feed to RTs, SLCs,
channel banks, etc. See Figure 22.

SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C
1181200L1
1181200L1
1181200L1
1181200L1
1181300L1
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
DSX
TST
10
10
10
10
DSL
DSL
DSL
1181300L1
1181300L1
T1-OR T1-OR
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSL
TST
ALM
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
#1
TST
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
T1-OR T1-OR
1181310L1
1181310L1
PWR
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
R
X
6V
R
X
+
R
X
HTU-C
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
6V
DSX
LP1
ALM
T
X
M
O
N
RX
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
6V
TX
M
O
N
PWR
TST
LP
+
T
X
TX
RX
ACT
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
ALM
+
T
X
RX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LP
ALM
+
6V
TX
M
O
N
TST
ALM
A
LBK
LP
ALM
PWR
DSX
#2
DSX
DSX
LBK
LP
PWR
#1
DSX
PWR
DSX
LBK
PWR
DSX
ACT
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
ALM
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
T1
circuit
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
E
Q
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
NID
Figure 22. T1 System Arrangement
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 43 of 46
5.2.4
Optical Delivery of Four T1s

The QFO-C provides economical transport for up to four optical DS1 signals and
offers a cost-effective alternative to costly, full-featured fiber multiplexers in many
applications. Applications for QFO-C include customer DS1 services, DS1 entrance
links to wireless/PCS cell sites, and feeder facilities for medium capacity DLC
systems. The system can be provisioned for unprotected or 1:1 protected operation that
includes the optical facility as well as the multiplexing electronics.
Features such as compact size, extended temperature operation, TL1 alarm OS
messaging, up to 22 dB optical power budgets, and wide dynamic range optical
receivers make the QFO-C the most versatile low-capacity fiber multiplexer system on
the market.
The QFO-R is designed with a built-in DS1 Network Interface Unit (NIU) for each
DS1 circuit, eliminating the need for separate NIUs at the remote end for maintenance
loopback testing. This provides substantial cost savings over other systems. The
QFO-C automatically accommodates all DS1 formats including SF, ESF or unframed,
plus B8ZS or AMI line coding. These formats are accommodated without special
provisioning or setup, vastly simplifying installation and turn-up. See Figure 23.

1181015L1
1181020L1
POWER
STATUS
TEST
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
STATUS
TEST
POWER
POWER
1181200L1
LBK
SELECT
FSE
ALM
ACO
6
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
DSX
1
MODE
HST
ACO
7
8
9
DSX
LBK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DSX
LBK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1181200L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
POWER
PWR
DSX
PWR
#1
DSX
PWR
#1
#1
DSX
#1
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
DSX
#4
TST
10
TST
ALM
ACT
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TST
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TST
ALM
A
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
1181310L1
PWR
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
R
X
6V
6V
R
X
6V
TX
TX
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
RX
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
P
S
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
E
Q
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
TX
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
E
Q
RX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
ALM
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
RX
1181101L1
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
RX
TX
HTU-C
TST
LP2
ALM
+
T
X
DSX
LP1
ALM
+
R
PWR
TST
LP
ALM
T
X
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
LP
+
T
X
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LBK
ALM
PWR
DSX
DSX
DSX
LP
ALM
PWR
DSX
DSL
LBK
LP
10
DSL
DSX
LBK
10
DSL
PWR
DSX
LBK
10
DSL
TX
TX
M
O
N
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
RX
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
HD-10
BRI MUX
HD-10
BRI MUX
1250110L1
PWR
PWR
LBK
ALM
DSL
ACO
ALM
DSL
LBK
TEST
ACO
4
T
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
1 2 3 4 5 6
TEST
5
6
T
E
7
8
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
10
AC
DSL
1
S
NT
TDM
8DSL
SF
AMI
DIS
Four T1 Circuits
1250110L1
PWR
LBK
10
HD-10
BRI MUX
1250110L1
ALM
1 2 3 4 5 6
DS3MX
TEST
3
4
NT
TDM
8DSL
SF
AMI
DIS
7
8
LT
ADJ
10DSL
ESF
B8ZS
ZBS EN
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
SCU
Optical
DS2
Figure 23. QFO-C System Arrangement
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 44 of 46
5.2.4.1
Optical Characteristics
The QFO-C offers high performance single-mode 1310 nm laser optics and pin-diode
receivers in either 12 or 22 dB optical power budget configurations. The wide range
receivers accommodate even 0 dB optical loops without the need for external optical
attenuators.
5.2.5
Automatic Protection Switching

The Loop Support System (HLSS) provides 1:1 protection for the circuits. A T1,
HDSL, or HDSL2 module is provisioned as either the main unit or the auxiliary unit.
The Total Access 3000/3010 backplane is pre-wired to support this arrangement with
the odd-numbered slots designated the main circuit and the next higher even-numbered
slot designated the auxiliary circuit. The numerically linked labels on the front panel
easily identify these HLSS pairs. At the customer premises, two HTU-Rs, H2TU-Rs,
or T1 NIUs terminate the two circuits in the Loop Support System (LSS) housing and
provide a single protected circuit to the customer. See Figure 24.

SCU
DS3MX
1181015L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
LOCKOUT
LOCKOUT
MODE
SELECT
HST
ACO
FSE
ALM
ACO
ON LINE
ON LINE
R
A
F
T
APS
APS
TEST/
TEST/
ENABLE
ENABLE
POWER
POWER
1181200L1
1181200L1
POWER
POWER
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
LBK
LBK
LBK
LBK
DSX
#4
TST
10
10
10
10
DSL
DSL
1181200L1
DSL
1181200L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181300L1
1181310L1
1181300L1
PWR
#3
DSL
DSX
#2
#3
#4
ACT
#1
DSX
#1
DSX
#2
DSX
#2
DSX
#3
DSX
#3
#4
DSX
#4
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TST
ALM
A
ALM
A
ACT
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181310L1
1181310L1
PWR
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
+
6V
R
X
6V
R
X
6V
R
X
6V
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
RX
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
A ACT
P
S
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
1181101L1
HTU-C
1181101L1
PWR
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
1181101L1
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
LP2
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
E
Q
E
Q
TX
TX
RX
RX
E
Q
RX
E
Q
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
TX
M
O
N
RX
HTU-C
DSX
LP1
+
T
X
TX
PWR
TST
ALM
+
T
X
TX
1181101L1
DSX
LBK
LP
ALM
+
T
X
TX
HTU-C
PWR
DSX
LP
ALM
PWR
DSX
DSX
TST
ALM
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
PWR
#1
DSX
DSX
DSX
TST
LBK
LP
ALM
#2
ACT
DSX
LBK
LP
#1
DSX
PWR
DSX
LBK
PWR
DSX
1181310L1
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
ALM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
M
O
N
M
O
N
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
M
O
N
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
P
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
2 HDSL/
HDSL2
circuits
ADTRAN
Loop
Support
System
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
UNIT
1181000L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
DSX
LP2
TST
ALM
LP1
TX
LP2
E
Q
RX
ALM
TX
TX
E
Q
M
O
N
RX
RX
TX
ACT
M
O
N
RX
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
ACT
GRN=NORM
YEL=MAN
Figure 24. Loop Support System Arrangement
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 45 of 46
The Total Access 3000/3010 has capacity for 28/22 modules. These are logically
arranged in pairs (1 and 2, 3 and 4, and so on) that are pre-wired in the backplane to
act as auxiliary/main protected pairs. With APS, you can select the option to use the
pairs together via a craft interface to the Total Access System Controller Unit (SCU).
Using APS, the even-numbered slot (2, 4, 6, ...) backs up its odd-numbered counterpart
(1, 3, 5, ...) in a main/auxiliary relationship. If the main circuit experiences any
interruption to service from a card failure to a severed line, the hot-standby auxiliary
will take over the circuit in milliseconds without interruption to customer service. By
default, when the main circuit has been restored, it will automatically take control and
again support customer traffic. Also available are several options that allow you to
lock in the auxiliary circuit, or only permit a certain number of switchovers before
the system prevents reversion to an unreliable main circuit. The APS is built into Total
Access 3000/3010 with no external equipment or software required.
In operation, if either the main unit or its loops fail, the auxiliary units pick up the
load. The system automatically reverts to the main units when the failure is corrected.
A provisionable time delay limits switchback for at least one minute to prevent rapid
switch oscillations due to momentary failures. If the main units have repeated failures,
the auxiliary units will remain online continuously instead of reverting to an unreliable
link.
A Total Access 3000/3010 APS circuit can provide another HDSL, HDSL2, or T1 line
in just minutes by disabling the backup circuit and turning it into an independent
carrier. Selected individually, each circuit acts independently of the other; the failure
of one does not affect the operation of the other.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TASYS101-1E

SYS-101
Page 46 of 46
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG000-1E

SECTION 2
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Engineering Guidelines

Find a Topic in the List Below
Then Turn To:
Dimensions of Equipment
Page 3
System Power Requirements
Page 5
Power Dissipation Considerations
Page 8
Management Interfaces
Page 16
Network Timing
Page 20
Network Connections
Page 22
Local Loop Connections
Page 29
Test Access 3000/3010 Support
Page 31
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG000-1E

SECTION 2
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 1 of 32

This section of ADTRANs Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual is designed for use by
network engineers, planners, and designers who are upgrading or intensifying a communications
network. It contains general information and describes physical and operational concepts, card
functions, network relationship, provisioning, testing, alarm status, and system monitoring.
CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
Dimensions of Equipment .................................................................................................................. 3

System Power Requirements ............................................................................................................. 5
Power Dissipation Considerations ..................................................................................................... 8
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
Management Interfaces .................................................................................................................... 16

1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5
Cable Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 22

DSX-1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 23
DS3 / STS-1 .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Fiber Applications .................................................................................................................................... 27
Local Loop Connections for TDM Applications ............................................................................ 29

1.7.1
1.7.2
1.8
64 KHz Composite Clock ......................................................................................................................... 20

DS1 Clock ................................................................................................................................................ 20
External Clock .......................................................................................................................................... 20
Network Connections ....................................................................................................................... 22

1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.7
Intershelf Management ............................................................................................................................. 16

Alarm Input and Outputs .......................................................................................................................... 17
TL1 Over X.25 ......................................................................................................................................... 18
SNMP and TELNET over 10BaseT ......................................................................................................... 20
Network Timing ................................................................................................................................ 20

1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.6
Power Dissipation for a Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf ............................................................................. 8

Total Access 3000/3010 Heat Dissipation and GR-63-CORE ................................................................. 11
1.3.2.1
Shelf Level .............................................................................................................................. 11
1.3.2.2
Frame Level ............................................................................................................................. 11
Copper Loop Support ............................................................................................................................... 29

Fiber Loop Support .................................................................................................................................. 30
Test Access 3000/3010 Support ........................................................................................................ 31

1.8.1
1.8.2
Metallic Loop Test Access ........................................................................................................................ 31

Digital Loop Test Access .......................................................................................................................... 32
FIGURES
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Low Power Configuration (DSX-1, HD10) ............................................................................... 13

Medium Power Configuration (mix of T1 and HDSL/HDSL2 with repeaters) ........................ 14
Daisy-Chained Total Access 3000/3010 Shelves ....................................................................... 17
X.25 Connections ...................................................................................................................... 19
SNMP, TELNET and TL1 over 10BaseT .................................................................................. 21
Clocking Functions .................................................................................................................... 21
Backplane and AMP Champ Connectors for Total Access 3000 ............................................... 23
Backplane and AMP Champ Connectors for Total Access 3010 ............................................... 23
The Pinout for a Single Connector ............................................................................................ 24
The Coaxial Adaptor (P/N 1181004L1) ..................................................................................... 26
Heat Baffle And Fiber Routed Out the Side .............................................................................. 27
Heat Baffle And Fiber Routed Out the Back ............................................................................. 28
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 2 of 32
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Eight AMP Champ Connectors with Associated Labels for the Total Access 3000 .................. 29
Eight AMP Champ Connectors with Associated Labels for the Total Access 3010 .................. 29
Wire-wrap Pins for Metallic Test Access ................................................................................... 31
Wire-wrap Pins for Digital Test Access ..................................................................................... 32
TABLES
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Total Access 3000/3010 Equipment Dimensions and Weights .................................................... 4

Current Draw of Each Module At -48 V ..................................................................................... 5
Configuration 1 with a Current Draw of Each Module At -48 V ................................................ 6
Configuration 2 Current Draw At -48 V ...................................................................................... 6
Configuration 3 Current Draw At -48 V ...................................................................................... 6
Determining Wire Gauge and Fuse Size* .................................................................................... 7
Current Draw Worksheet ............................................................................................................. 7
Heat Dissipation........................................................................................................................... 8
Configuration 1 Heat Dissipation ................................................................................................ 9
Configuration 2 Heat Dissipation ................................................................................................ 9
Configuration 3 Heat Dissipation .............................................................................................. 10
Heat Dissipation Worksheet ....................................................................................................... 10
Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf .................................................................. 11
Heat Dissipation for Individual Frame ...................................................................................... 11
Configuration Guildlines for Heat Dissipation .......................................................................... 15
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 3 of 32

1.1
Dimensions of Equipment
Table 1 lists the dimensions of the Total Access 3000/3010, heat baffle, fan, and
several access modules.
NOTE
3000 and the Total Access 3010, such as number of slots, will be conveyed
by the convention a/b. The a represents the Total Access 3000 parameter
and the b represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For example, the
differing number of access slots in the two platforms, 28 for the Total Access
3000 and 22 for the Total Access 3010, would be displayed 28/22.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 4 of 32
Table 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Equipment Dimensions and Weights

Part Number
Equipment
(H x W x D)
Weight
23" Chassis
1181001L1
Total Access 3000 Main Chassis
5.97" x 23" x 11.12"
14.35 lb.
1181003L1
Total Access 3000 Heat Baffle
3.97" x 23" x 10.25"
6.69 lb.
1181006L1
Total Access 3000 Fan Module
3.47" x 21.21" x 3.24"
2.44 lb.
1181970L1
Total Access 3000 Fan Filter
2.68" x 20.42" x 0.50"
0.02 lb
1181971L1
Total Access 3000 Fan Filter Housing
2.94" x 21.42" x 0.48"
1.56 lb
19" Chassis
1182003L1
Total Access 3010 Main Chassis
5.97" x 19" x 11.12"
11.58 lb.
1182005L1
Total Access 3010 Heat Baffle
3.97" x 19" x 10.25"
6.75 lb.
1182006L1
Total Access 3010 Fan Module
3.47" x 17.31" x 3.24"
1.85 lb.
1182970L1
Total Access 3010 Fan Filter
2.68" x 16.44" x 0.50"
0.02 lb.
1182971L1
Total Access 3010 Fan Filter Housing
2.94" x 17.44" x 0.48"
1.05 lb.
5.35" x 0.79" x 10.2"
0.53 lb.
Common Modules
1181018L1
SCU
1181020L1
DS3 Multiplexer
5.35" x 1.0" x 10.2"
0.57 lb.
1181030L1
STS-1 Multiplexer
5.35" x 1.0" x 10.2"
0.57 lb.
1181031L1
OC-3 Multiplexer
5.35" x 1.0" x 10.2"
0.81 lb.
TDM Access Modules

1181050L1
DSX-1
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.35 lb.
1181106L1
HTU-C
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.56 lb.
1181102L1
E1 LTU
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.56 lb.
1181111L1
H2TU-C
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.52 lb.
1181111L2
H2TU-C List 2
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.52 lb.
1181200L1
HD-10
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.83 lb.
1181300L1
QFO-C
5.35" x 1.32" x 10.2"
0.66lb.
1181310L1
T1-OR
5.35" x 0.66" x 10.2"
0.58 lb.
Accessories
1181004L1
Dual BNC I/O Module
1.40" x 2.87" x 1.00"
0.17 lb.
1181007L1
Quad BNC I/O Module
1.40" x 2.87" x 1.87"
0.33 lb.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 5 of 32
1.2
System Power Requirements

Table 2 illustrates the current draw of each module at -48 V. Table 3 through Table 5
illustrate three different Total Access 3000/3010 arrangements with a current draw
of -48 V. Use Table 6 to determine wire gauge and fuse size. Use Table 8 to
calculate current draw for a single shelf deployment.
Table 2. Current Draw of Each Module At -48 V
Part Number
Equipment
Maximum Current Draw at -48 V
Common Modules
1181018L1
SCU
150 mA
1181020L1
DS3 Multiplexer
198 mA
1181030L1
STS-1 Multiplexer
167 mA
1181031L1
OC-3 Multiplexer
208 mA
TDM Access Modules

1181050L1
DSX-1
45 mA
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/0 HRE
162 mA
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/1 HRE
262 mA
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/2 HREs
382 mA
1181111L1
H2TU-C
260 mA
1181111L2
H2TU-C List 2
210 mA
1181112Lx**
H2TU-C
144 mA
1181200L1
HD-10
150 mA
1181300L1
QFO-C
167 mA
1181310L1
T1-OR
455 mA*
Note: * The following equations are used for calculating T1-OR current draw and depend on span powering for
loop equipment and voltage input:
Nominal:
(48 V/input voltage * (14.8 + span ohms / 10.16) + 45) mA
Maximum:
(48 V/input voltage * (15 + span ohms / 10) + 50) mA
** x Indicates feature list of card
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 6 of 32
The following are examples of typical shelf arrangements and the tables used to
calculate the power draw for each configuration.
Table 3. Configuration 1 with a Current Draw of Each Module At -48 V
Current Draw
Amps
Quantity
* Amps
Total Draw
in Amps
Part Number
Description
Quantity
1181018L1
SCU
0.150 A
1 * .150 A
0.150 A
1181200L1
HD-10
14
0.150 A
14 * .150 A
2.100 A
Total
2.250 A
NOTE
Current data is listed as per unit. This data is multiplied by the total number
of corresponding units and added together to get the noted totals.
Table 4. Configuration 2 Current Draw At -48 V

Part Number
Description
Quantity
Current Draw
Amps
Quantity
* Amps
Total Draw in
Amps
1181018L1
SCU
0.150 A
1 * .150 A
0.150 A
1181106L1
HTU-C / 2 HRE
0.382 A
6 * .382 A
2.292 A
1181106L1
HTU-C / 1 HRE
0.262 A
6 * .262 A
1.572 A
1181106L1
HTU-C / 0 HRE
0.162 A
6 * .162 A
0.972 A
1181300L1
QFO-C
0.167 A
6 * .167 A
1.002 A
1181200L1
HD-10
0.150 A
2 * .150 A
0.300 A
Total
6.288 A
Table 5. Configuration 3 Current Draw At -48 V

Part Number
Description
Quantity
Current Draw
Amps
Quantity
* Amps
Total Draw
in Amps
1181018L1
SCU
0.150 A
1 * .150 A
0.150 A
1181020L1
DS3 Mux
0.198 A
2 * .198 A
0.396 A
1181106L1
HTU-C / 0 HREs
28
0.162 A
28 * .162 A
4.536 A
Total
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
5.082 A
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 7 of 32
NOTE
ADTRAN recommends a 20 A fuse as this will ensure fusing for all scenarios,
including worst case power draw and a 50 percent margin.
Table 6. Determining Wire Gauge and Fuse Size*
Current Draw at -48 V
Recommended Wire Gauge
Recommend Fuse Size
2.6 to 5.8 Amps
12 AWG
10 Amps
5.8 to 8 Amps
12 AWG
15 Amps
8 to 15 Amps
10 AWG
20 Amps
* Recommendations apply to wiring from Total Access 3000/3010 shelf to fuse panel in same bay.
For single shelf deployment, use Table 7 to calculate current draw.

Table 7. Current Draw Worksheet
_______ # SCUs (1181018L1) x 0.15 A
_______ # DS3 CSM (1181041L1) x 0.416 A
_______ # DS3 MUX (1181020L1) x 0.198 A
_______ # STS-1 MUX (1181030L1) x 0.167 A
_______ # OC-3 MUX (1181031L1) x 0.208 A
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (no HREs) x 0.162 A
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (one HRE) x 0.262 A
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (two HREs) x 0.382 A
_______ # H2TU-C (1181111L1) (no H2Rs) x 0.260 A
_______ # H2TU-C (1181111L1) (one H2R) x 0.310 A
_______ # QFO-C (1181300L1) x 0.167 A
_______ # HD-10 (1181200L1) x 0.150 A
_______ # T1-OR (1181310L1) x _____A*
_______ # DSX-1 (1181050L1) x 0.045 A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
_______ A
*Note: Same as in Table 2 for T1-OR
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 8 of 32
1.3
Power Dissipation Considerations
1.3.1
Power Dissipation for a Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf

Table 8 illustrates the heat dissipation of each module. Table 9 through Table 11
illustrate three different Total Access 3000/3010 arrangements and their heat
dissipation.
Table 8. Heat Dissipation at -48V
ADTRAN P/N
Description
Heat Dissipation
Common Modules
1181018L1
SCU
7.2 W
1181020L1
DS3 Multiplexer
6.7 W
1181030L1
STS-1 Multiplexer
8.0 W
1181031L1
OC-3 Multiplexer
10.0 W
TDM Access Modules

1181050L1
DSX-1
2.2 W
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/0 HRE
4.9 W
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/1 HRE
5.2 W
1181106Lx**
HTU-C/2 HREs
6.0 W
1181111L1
H2TU-C
5.2 W
1181111L2
H2TU-C List 2
6.6 W
1181112Lx**
H2TU-C
4.0 W
1181200L1
HD-10
7.2 W
1181300L1
QFO-C
8.0 W
1181310L1
T1-OR
6.0 W
Accessories
1181006L1
Fan
9.6 W
t* x indicates feature list of card

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 9 of 32
Use the worksheet in Table 12 to calculate total heat dissipation from Total Access
3000/3010 modules. Add the heat dissipation data from the individual units to get the
total dissipation for a complete system.
The following are examples of typical shelf arrangements and the tables used to
calculate the heat dissipation for each configuration.
NOTE
Heat data is listed as per unit. This data is multiplied by the total number of
corresponding units and then added to get the noted totals.
Table 9. Configuration 1 Heat Dissipation

Heat Dissipation
Watts
Quantity
* Watts
Part Number
Description
Quantity
1181018L1
SCU
7.2 W
1 * 7.2 W
7.2 W
1181200L1
HD-10
14
7.2 W
14 * 7.2 W
100.8 W
Total
Total Watts
108.0W

Heat Dissipation
Watts
Quantity
* Watts
Total
Watts
Part Number
Description
Quantity
1181018L1
SCU
7.2 W
1 * 7.2 W
7.2 W
1181106Lx*
HTU-C / 2 HRE
6.0 W
6 * 6.0 W
36.0 W
1181106Lx*
HTU-C / 1 HRE
5.2 W
6 * 5.2 W
31.2 W
1181106Lx*
HTU-C / 0 HRE
4.9 W
6 * 4.9 W
29.4 W
1181300L1
QFO-C
8.0 W
6 * 8.0 W
48.0 W
1181200L1
HD-10
7.2 W
2 * 7.2 W
14.4 W
Total
166.2 W
* x indicates feature list of card
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 10 of 32

Part Number
Description
Quantity
Heat Dissipation
Watts
Quantity
* Watts
Total Watts
1181018L1
SCU
7.2 W
1 * 7.2 W
7.2 W
1181020L1
DS3 Mux
9.5 W
2 * 9.5 W
19.0 W
1181106Lx*
HTU-C / 0 HREs
28
4.5 W
28 * 4.9 W
137.2 W
Total
163.4 W
* x indicates feature list of card

For single shelf deployment, use the following table to calculate heat dissipation.
Table 12. Heat Dissipation Worksheet
_______ # SCUs (1181018L1) x 7.2 W
_______ # DS3 MUX (1181020L1) x 9.5 W
_______ # STS-1 MUX (1181030L1) x 8.0 W
_______ # OC-3 MUX (1181031L1) x 10.0 W
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (no HREs) x 4.9 W
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (one HRE) x 5.2 W
_______ # HTU-C (1181106Lx) (two HREs) x 6.0 W
_______ # H2TU-C (1181111L1) (no H2Rs) x 5.2 W
_______ # QFO-C (1181300L1) x 8.0 W
_______ # HD-10 (1181200L1) x 7.2 W
_______ # T1-OR (1181310L1) x 6.0 W
_______ # DSX-1 (1181050L1) x 2.2 W
_______ 1 x 9.6 W (If fan module is used)
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______ Watts
_______Watts
* Note: Same as in Table 2 for T1-OR
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 11 of 32
1.3.2
Total Access 3000/3010 Heat Dissipation and GR-63-CORE

Telcordia GR-63-CORE specifies the physical protection requirements and objectives
for telecommunications equipment. Often referred to as NEBS (Network
Equipment-Building System), these guidelines have become the de facto standard for
U.S. telecommunications equipment and include both requirements and objectives for
heat dissipation.
The NEBS requirement is that the heat release of telecommunications equipment be
documented. For the Total Access 3000/3010 system, this is done in the previous
section, Power Dissipation Considerations (Section 1.3).
1.3.2.1 Shelf Level

NEBS further provides specific objectives for heat dissipation within a shelf in
paragraph O4-12. For an equipment shelf such as Total Access 3000/3010, the relevant
values are as follows in Table 13, from GR-63-CORE Tables 4 through 6:
Table 13. Heat Dissipation for Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf
Natural convection
225 W/m2 per meter (20.9 W/ft2/ft) of vertical frame space the equipment uses
Forced-air fans
300 W/m2 per meter (27.9 W/ft2/ft) of vertical frame space the equipment uses
1.3.2.2 Frame Level

NEBS provides specific objectives for heat dissipation in a frame in paragraph O4-12
for a frame such as intended for the Total Access 3000/3010. The relevant values are
as follows in Table 14, from GR-63-CORE table 4-6:
Table 14. Heat Dissipation for Individual Frame
Natural convection
1450 W/m2 (134.7 W/ft2)
Forced-air fans
1950 W/m2 (181.2 W/ft2)
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 12 of 32
The following guideline is intended to aid the designer and planner for installations of
Total Access 3000/3010 shelves and meeting NEBS heat release objectives. Since the
Total Access platform supports multiple technologies that produce a wide range of
heat, much forethought should be given to the installation and possible future
expansion. Depending on the technology employed, various scenarios and shelf
densities can be achieved. Reference Figure 1 and Figure 2 for examples of frame
installations.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 13 of 32
Fuse/Alarm #1
Fuse/Alarm #2
Chassis #10 - Limit DSX-1

Example:
All HD-10
9 @ 108 W = 972 W
-or-
Chassis #9 - Limit HD10
All DSX-1
10 @ 78.3 W = 705 W
Chassis #8
Chassis #7
Chassis #6
Chassis #5
Note: Higher Density

May Be Achieved with
Extenders
Chassis #4
Chassis #3
Chassis #2
Chassis #1
Kick Panel
Figure 1. Low Power Configuration (DSX-1, HD10)

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 14 of 32
Fuse/Alarm #1
Fuse/Alarm #2
Baffle #4
(Fan Only)
SCU
DS3MX
1181017L1
6 Shelves
3 Fans
3 Filters
4 Baffles
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
ACO
Chassis #6
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
DS3MX
DS3MX
SCU
1181017L1
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
1181020L1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
Chassis #5
ACO
ACO
LOCKOUT
NEBs Limit
Standard Layout = 1276 W
(w/Fans)
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Baffle #3
(Fan & Filter)
SCU
DS3MX
1181017L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
ACO
Chassis #4
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
DS3MX
DS3MX
SCU
1181017L1
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
1181020L1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
ACO
Chassis #3
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Baffle #2
(Fan & Filter)
SCU
DS3MX
1181017L1
1181020L1
DS3MX
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
HST
ALM
ACO
Chassis #2
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
DS3MX
DS3MX
SCU
1181017L1
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
1181020L1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1181020L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
MODE
SELECT
FSE
ALM
HST
ACO
Chassis #1
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
R
A
F
T
SCU
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
ON LINE
APS
APS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Baffle #1
(Filter Only)
Figure 2. Medium Power Configuration

(mix of T1 and HDSL/HDSL2 with repeaters)
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 15 of 32
Table 15 is a guideline intended to aid the designer in determining at what practical

point heat baffles should be used in a single shelf application and also when a fan
module should be added to the configuration. It should be noted that the table is
intended to mimic a shelf loaded with similar heat dissipating cards (e.g. 28 HTU-Cs)
Table 15. Configuration Guildline for Heat Dissipation
Heat Dissipation Inside Shelf
Recpmmended Configuration
0-130 W
No heat baffles
130-200 W
Heat baffles above and unobstructed intake
200+ W
Heat baffle above with fan module and heat baffle

below with fan filter
NOTE
Fans are optional based on heat load. ADTRAN recommends the use of fans
if the heat dissipation is greater than 255 W/m2 per meter (20.9 W/ft2/ft) of
vertical frame space the equipment uses.
Some of the high power configurations listed have 7.5-inch spacer between racks.
Only one spacer is required per seven foot rack; Figure 1 shows two, assuming that
this rack is one in a bay full of Total Access 3000/3010 racks, each engineered for the
worst case heat dissipation scenario. If only one rack is being engineered for the worst
case scenario, the spacer should be used on the right side of the rack (as viewed from
the front). Not only does the inclusion of the 7.5-inch spacer provide more area
covered by the shelf, it also allows for the neat dressing of the data cables used by the
Total Access 3000/3010.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 16 of 32
1.4
Management Interfaces
1.4.1
Intershelf Management
NOTE
ADTRAN recommends that the Total Access 3000/3010 shelves not be
daisy-chained when using SNMP. In this configuration, each shelf should be
equipped with a SCU and connected to an Ethernet hub.
When multiple Total Access 3000/3010 shelves are to be used in the same central
office, they can be daisy-chained together to allow monitoring and provisioning for up
to 16 shelves from a single interface. When connecting these shelves, communication
to the entire cluster can be made via the Host SCU.
The SCU provides a craft interface device connection to the DB-9 port in the front of
the SCU or is connected to the DB-25 port on the backplane (J31/J18 and labeled
ADMIN).
When connecting to the rear Admin port as the craft interface, a null modem cable
must be used. When a SCU is used as the host, monitoring and provisioning can occur
via the DB-9 or DB-25 pin connectors. In addition, the SCU has the capability to
interface to an X.25 network via a second DB-25 port (J30/J17 and labeled NTWK
MGMT) and to an IP/Lan via an RJ45 jack (J32 and labeled E-NET), both located on
the backplane. All shelves in the daisy chain that are served by a SCU host can
interface to the X.25 network.
It is important to note that when daisy chaining sheves, only one SCU is provisioned
as the host.
To daisy chain up to 16 Total Access 3000/3010 shelves, use a 22 to 24 gauge wire
(two wire with drain). ADTRAN recommends the AT&T P7 gray sheathed wire.
Figure 3 is a logical diagram of the daisy-chained configuration between two Total
Access shelves. The A OUT is wired to the downstream A IN; the B OUT is
wired to the downstream B IN; and the shield OUT is wired to the shield IN. The
OUT of the first shelf will go into the IN of the subsequent downstream shelf, up to 16
shelves.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 17 of 32
RS485
A
Shelf 32
IN
OUT
RS485
A
Shelf 2
IN
22 or 24 guage
AT&T P7 Cable
OUT
RS485
A
Shelf 1
IN
OUT
Figure 3. Daisy-Chained Total Access 3000/3010 Shelves
1.4.2
Alarm Input and Outputs

For alarms, the physical wiring will depend on which alarming equipment is used.
ADTRAN recommends referring to the Alarm Equipment manufacturers instructions
for alarm wiring.
The shelf currently supports six dedicated alarm outputs and two spare alarm outputs.
The dedicated outputs are Critical Visual (CRI-V), Major Visual (MAJ-V), Minor
Visual (MIN-V), Critical Audible (CRI-A), Major Audible (MAJ-A), and Minor
Audible (MIN-A). Each alarm supports Normally Open or Normally Closed relay
contacts.
Four alarm inputs are supported. They are ACO, Remote, AUX 1, and AUX 2. The
active alarm state is -48 V or contact closure.
Alarm relays are supported by all versions of the SCU and no additional ADTRAN
equipment needs to be provided to utilize the alarming features.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 18 of 32
1.4.3
TL1 Over X.25

When the SCU is installed, the DB-25 connector (NTWK MGMT) is automatically
activated after power-up. TL1 commands can be sent and received only if a SCU is
installed in the Total Access 3000/3010. There are three ways that TL1 interfaces with
the SCU:
1. The DB-25 port (NTWK MGMT) on the backplane connected to an X.25 switch
either locally or remotely
2. A configuable TCP/IP port on the 10 Base T interface
3. The DB-25 port (ADMIN) on the backplane connected to a modem or a VT100
craft interface (A craft interface on the Admin port requires a null modem
adaptor)
The craft interface to the DB-9 will bring up the SCU menu that will have an option to
allow the user to enter TL1 commands. The craft interface (or modem, if remote
management is utilized) connected to the DB-25 connector (J31/J18 labeled ADMIN)
will also give access to the same SCU menu.
The DB-25 connection (NTWK MGMT) can interface with an X.25 switch. The
connection to the X.25 switch supports four simultaneous Switched Virtual Circuits
(SVCs). This allows for four parallel TL1 transactions simultaneously. The physical
connection between the switch and the shelf is a synchronous RS-232 interface that
transmits and receives data up to 64 Kbps.
If an X.25 connection is not available in the local Central Office, remote connections
can be made via a channel bank using a DSU-DP circuit. A T1 transports the signal to
a central office where an X.25 switch is physically located. The signal is de-muxed via
another channel bank and then sent to the X.25 switch via a second DSU-DP circuit.
Total Access 3000/3010 is supported by Telcordias NMA system. NMA can be
configured to connect to a Total Access 3000/3010 SCU over X.25 network in order to
receive TL1 autonomous messages. The SCU allows Total Access 3000/3010 to
operate as an Intelligent Network Element (INE) on the X.25 network. See Figure 4.
Menus can be accessed via the X.25 port by using the command entry:
menu;
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 19 of 32
TL1 Over X.25

(using another CO X.25 Connection)
Synchronous RS-232
S
C
U
S
C
U
HST
HST
DSU DP
L3
1104003
L
O
G
I
C
OUT
(Rx)
IN
(Tx)
X.25 Connection
LP
64K CLEAR
SW 56
SIBRATE EC
SLC II
ZCS
LLB
Synchronous
RS232 interface
up to 64 kps
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DSU DP
L3
1104003
L
O
G
I
C
OUT
(Rx)
IN
(Tx)
Supports four (4)

Switched Virtual
Circuits (SVCs)
LP
64K CLEAR
SW 56
SIBRATE EC
SLC II
ZCS
LLB
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Central Office
Central Office
NMA
X.25
Hekimian
TL1 Over X.25

(with X.25 Local Connection)
Synchronous RS-232
S
C
U
S
C
U
HST
HST
RS-485
Synchronous
RS232 interface
up to 64 kps
X.25 Connection
Supports four (4)

Switched Virtual
Circuits (SVCs)
Central Office
NMA
X.25
Hekimian
Figure 4. X.25 Connections
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 20 of 32
1.4.4
SNMP, TELNET and TL1 over 10BaseT

When the SCU is installed into Total Access 3000/3010, the 10BaseT connection is
enabled. An RJ45 port (J32 labeled E-NET) provided on the backplane connects the
system to an IP/Lan network. The SCU has a Standard TCP/IP stack and can operate
on a standard IP network.
NOTE
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelves should not be daisy-chained when using
SNMP. With SNMP, each shelf should be equipped with a SCU and
connected to an Ethernet hub.
The Network Administrator must assign an IP address, subnet mask, and a default
gateway to the SCU.
The TELNET feature of Total Access 3000/3010 supports standard TELNET client
software. In a TELNET session, the user gets the same VT-100 menu as would be seen
on the craft interface.
The SCU provides support for up to four SNMP hosts. Access security is provided via
standard community name strings. The SCU also provides a TL1 machine interface
that can be accessed using a configurable TCP/IP port number. See Figure 5.
1.5
Network Timing
Because of the versatility of the shelf, several clocking schemes are supported. Both 64
kbps composite clock and DS1 redundant clocks are accommodated. See Figure 6.
1.5.1
64 KHz Composite Clock

Composite clock termination is provided by connector P4/P10, labeled as EXTCLK
A-IN. The daughter module (P/N 1181940L1) located next to P4/P10 provides for
termination options. See Figure 4 in SYS-101, Flag C1.
1.5.2
DS1 Clock
For SONET or DS3 applications, the shelf provides for primary and secondary DS1
timing sources. The primary clock should be connected to P18/P11, labeled B-IN.
The secondary clock should be connected to P24/P13, labeled EXTCLK C-IN. The
multiplexer modules contain all necessary circuitry for proper operation. See Figure 4
in SYS-101, Flags C2 and C3.
1.5.3
External Clock
Because some applications may require the shelf to provide source timing, two
additional wire-wrap connections are provided: P19/P12 and P20/P9, A-OUT and
B-OUT, are connected to MUXes A and B respectively. See Figure 4 in SYS-101,
Flag D. See Figure 7 for clocking functions.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 21 of 32
SNMP over 10BaseT

One IP
Address
S
C
U
Network Administrator
Provides:
1) IP Address to
Host SCU
2) subnet mask
3) default gateway
HST
SCU Gateway
C
R
A
F
T
Connected to
RJ45 socket
on backplane of
host shelf
10BaseT
Router
Central Office
NMA
(TL1)
(MWR)
Up to four SNMP Trap Hosts are supported
IP/LAN
SNMP
Host
SNMP
Host
SNMP
Host
Figure 5. SNMP, TELNET and TL1 over 10BaseT

A - IN
Composite Clock
64 kHz
B - IN
Primary SONET
Optional
Composite
Clock Module
1
Access Module
in Slot 1
28
Access Module
in Slot 28
1.544 mHz
MUX
A
A - OUT
External Timing
MUX
B
B - OUT
External Timing
SCU
C - IN
Secondary SONET
Clock
1.544 mHz
Figure 6. Clocking Functions

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 22 of 32
1.6
Network Connections
Total Access 3000/3010 supports three different physical mediums for network
connections: copper pairs, coaxial cables, and fiber optic cables. Use of one type of
network connection does not necessarily preclude simultaneous use of another type of
network connection.
1.6.1
Cable Specifications
All coaxial cable for Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 and STS-1 signals shall meet the
following minimum specifications:
The coaxial cable shall have characteristic impedance of 75 Ohm.

Nominal mutual capacitance shall not exceed 20.4 pF/foot
The cable shall conform to ANSI standard T1-102 (1993) pulse mask definition.
The standard reference cable is WECO Type 728A at 450 feet.
Approved cable types include:
WECO 728A
Lucent 728B
Lucent 734A
Belden 9231
Belden 1809A
Lucent type 735A cable may be used up to a maximum length of 250 feet.
All connections to the Total Access 3000/3010 64-pin Amp connectors shall meet the
following minimum characteristics:
Solid copper tinned wire.

Shielded cable with drain wire. Drain wire should be connected to pin 64,
unless this arrangement is pre-empted by customer specification.
Color coding to conform to industry standard blue/white through slate-violet
coding for pairs 1 through 25 with separate binder groups for pairs 1-25 and 26
through 28 or 32.
24 AWG or 22 AWG; 24 AWG preferred
28 or 32 pair; 28 pair preferred
100 Ohm nominal characteristic impedance; 15%
Mutual capacitance of 15.72 pF/ft nominal; 17.3 pF/ft absolute maximum,
Attenuation for DS1 signal @ 0.772 MHz (1.544 Mb/s) nominally 12.3 dB/1000
ft.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 23 of 32
Worst pair PSNEXT 53 dB @ 150 kHz, 42 dB @ 772 kHz, 38 dB @ 1600 kHz,

or better, for test cable length of 1000 feet
Cables conform to:
GR-499-DSX-1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet
TIA/EIA 464B DSX-1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet
UL-c(UL) Type CMR/CMG
Jacket and insulation material to conform to existing industry standards, and to
any applicable customer specifications
1.6.2
DSX-1
Copper pair network interfaces are delivered through AMP Champ connectors on the
backplane of the system. The backplane incorporates eight 64-pin/50-pin AMP Champ
connectors, each of which delivers a single pair of copper wires to each access module
slot. The bottom four connectors (labeled pairs 5, 6, 7, and 8 and located at P6, P7, P9,
and P10, respectively) are intended primarily for DSX-1 network interfaces. See
Figure 7 and Figure 8.
Pair 3
Pair 4
Pair 2
MDF
MDF
MDF
Pair 1
MDF
O
N
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 6
Pair 5
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 7
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 8
2298
J34
Figure 7. Backplane and AMP Champ Connectors for Total Access 3000
Pair 3
Pair 4
Pair 2
MDF
MDF
MDF
Pair 1
MDF
134
134
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 5
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 6
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 7
DSX-1 "A"
2298
J34
Pair 8
Figure 8. Backplane and AMP Champ Connectors for Total Access 3010
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 24 of 32
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
R-1
R-2
R-3
R-4
R-5
R-6
R-7
R-8
R-9
R-10
R-11
R-12
R-13
R-14
R-15
R-16
R-17
R-18
R-19
R-20
R-21
R-22
R-23
R-24
R-25
R-26
R-27
R-28
X
X
32
64
64
GRND
64
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
33
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
T-5
T-6
T-7
T-8
T-9
T-10
T-11
T-12
T-13
T-14
T-15
T-16
T-17
T-18
T-19
T-20
T-21
T-22
T-23
T-24
T-25
T-26
T-27
T-28
X
X
32
32
33
See Figure 9 for the pinout of a local loop connector on the system backplane (all
eight share identical pinouts). Note that Pin 64 is provided for automatically grounding
the shield of an installed cable. Recommended part number for cables provided by
TS1 (see Application Guides in this manual) are designed so that pin 64 is connected
to the cable shield drain wire.
Figure 9. The Pinout for a Single Connector

Connectors 7 and 8 (labeled Pair 7 and 8 and located at P9 and P10, respectively)
deliver DSX-1 A to each access module slot in the system. Connectors 5 and 6
(labeled Pair 5 and 6 and located at P6 and P7, respectively) deliver DSX-1 B to
each access module slot in the system. Regardless of what is installed in the
multiplexer slots, the DSX-1 network interfaces are always available for use by an
access module installed in an access module slot.
Pairs 5 and 6 will be used for DSX-1 (DSX-B) if the user installs a dual DSX-1 card,
such as a QFO-C, in Total Access 3000/3010. If no dual DSX-1 cards are installed,
then pairs 5 and 6 can connect to the MDF.
Access modules are grouped into pairs consisting of an odd-numbered slot and an
even-numbered slot immediately to the right. For delivering DS2 services, a single slot
access module has access to both DSX-1 network interfaces dedicated to its slot, as
well as the two DSX-1 network interfaces dedicated to its paired slot.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 25 of 32
Thus, every access module slot in the system can access up to a maximum of four
DSX-1 network interfaces, but any access module that uses all four of its available
DSX-1 network interfaces (e.g., QFO-C) precludes active use of any DSX-1 network
interfaces in the paired slot. Thus, when an access module using all four available
DSX-1 network interfaces is installed, the paired slot is restricted to being a redundant
card backing up the active module in the other paired slot. Or it can be an access
module that derives its network interface from a multiplexer installed in one of the
multiplexer slots of this same system. The sum of active DSX-1 network interfaces
available in two paired slots is a maximum of four. The system supports a total of (4
DSX-1 network interfaces per pair of access module slots) x (14 slot pairs), or 56
DSX-1 network interfaces.
NOTE
To support pre-wiring, access modules using the B DSX-1 network interface
(e.g., QFO-C) should not be mixed in the same system with access modules
requiring the use of connectors 5 and/or 6 (e.g., HD10) for local loop
connections. This requires pre-wiring the same AMP Champ connector to two
different frames when a system is first installed. Nothing prevents the system
from operating with a mix of DSX-1 and local loop connections in connectors
5 and 6. The issue is solely one of pre-wiring. For further information on
wiring for different technologies, refer to the Application Guidelines section
of the manual.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 26 of 32
1.6.3
DS3 / STS-1
Coaxial network interfaces are used for supporting high-speed electrical interfaces
such as DS3 and STS-1. The following discussion is relevant to both of these types of
network interfaces and multiplexers.
Coaxial cable network interfaces are delivered through a coaxial cable adaptor
installed on the rear side of the backplane of the system (labeled Adapter Module and
located at J34). These backplane-mounted coaxial adaptors interface exclusively with
the two multiplexer slots in a single system. See Figure 10.
RX
TX
Figure 10. The Coaxial Adaptor (P/N 1181004L1)

A single-interface coaxial adapter (1181004L1) provides a connection shared by the
two multiplexers for supporting 1:1 protection of the network interface electronics.
The coaxial adaptor is situated to allow routing of coaxial cables in any direction
through use of a coaxial elbow connector. Once two elbow connectors are installed to
the jacks on the side of the coaxial adaptor, the coaxial cables can be routed to the side,
top, or bottom of the system merely by rotating the elbow connector.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 27 of 32
1.6.4
Fiber Applications
All fiber optic cable connections in Total Access 3000/3010 are made directly on fiber
optic access modules or multiplexer modules. Fibers are routed through the gap
between the top of the shelf and the top of the fiber card faceplate once a fiber optic
card is installed.
The Heat Baffle/Fiber Routing Tray (1181003L1) is recommended for all systems that
will incorporate any fiber optic multiplexers or access modules. This multifunction
unit, which also channels heat away from units above the system and provides for
mounting a Fan Unit, provides access and management for routing fiber optic cables
into/from a system installed immediately below it. Fiber can be routed either through
the sides or the back of the Heat Baffle/Fiber Routing Tray. The front cover, which
protects installed fiber, must be removed to install fiber optic cable or to change an
existing installation of fiber optic cable. Installation of the Fan Module to the rear of
the Heat Baffle/Fiber Routing Tray does not affect fiber optic cable routing in this unit.
See Figure 11 and Figure 12.
HST
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 11. Heat Baffle And Fiber Routed Out the Side
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 28 of 32
HST
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 12. Heat Baffle And Fiber Routed Out the Back
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 29 of 32
1.7
Local Loop Connections for TDM Applications

Total Access 3000/3010 supports two types of local loop connections: copper pair and
optical fiber. All local loop connections are serviced through access modules.
1.7.1
Copper Loop Support

Copper pairs in Total Access 3000/3010 are delivered through 64-pin/50-pin AMP
Champ connectors on the backplane. Each slot has access to a total of eight copper
pairs, two of which are generally reserved for a DSX-1 network interface. Each of the
eight 64-pin/50-pin AMP Champ connectors delivers a single copper pair to each of
the 28 access module slots in the system.
The AMP Champs on the backplane are designated as follows: Pairs 1 through 4 are
generally local loop copper pairs. Pairs 5 and 6 can be a single DSX-1 network
interface (DSX-1 B) or local loops. Pairs 7 and 8 are generally reserved for DSX-1
for each slot (DSX-1 A). See Figure 13 and Figure 14 for the layout of backplane
AMP Champ connectors for the Total Access 3000/3010.
This configuration supports the DSX-A as being dedicated, while Pairs 5 and 6 can be
routed to either the DSX or to the MDF.
Pair 3
Pair 4
Pair 2
MDF
MDF
MDF
Pair 1
MDF
O
N
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 6
Pair 5
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 7
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 8
2298
J34
Figure 13. Eight AMP Champ Connectors with Associated Labels for the
Total Access 3000
Pair 3
Pair 4
Pair 2
MDF
MDF
MDF
Pair 1
MDF
134
134
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 5
MDF or DSX-1 "B"
Pair 6
DSX-1 "A"
Pair 7
DSX-1 "A"
2298
J34
Pair 8
Figure 14. Eight AMP Champ Connectors with Associated Labels for the
Total Access 3010
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 30 of 32
DSX-1 A has transmit out of the system on connector eight, and receive into the
system on connector seven. DSX-1 B has transmit out of the system on connector
six, and receive into the system on connector five.
Cards using connectors 5 and 6 for local loops should not be mixed with cards using
these two connectors for their DSX-1 B interface. This is an issue solely with prewiring the system. The system will operate with a mixture of these cards, but
connections in these two connectors will need to be routed to both local loop (MDF)
and DSX-1 wiring frames.
1.7.2
Fiber Loop Support

The system can accommodate as many as 28 fiber optic access modules, as well as two
fiber optic multiplexers. All fiber optic cable in Total Access 3000/3010 is routed out
the top front of cards installed in the system. This includes fiber optic cable used for
network interfaces as well as for delivering services across the local loop.
The heat baffle/fiber routing tray is recommended for routing fiber optic cables into
the system. This unit is installed above the associated system, and it can handle fiber
optic cables for a single system. Fiber optic cable is routed out of the top of a card into
the fiber tray, where it can be then routed out the sides or the back of the unit.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 31 of 32
1.8
Test Access 3000/3010 Support

Total Access 3000/3010 supports a comprehensive array of test capabilities, including
metallic loop test access and digital test access. Both of these capabilities are fully
supported by the system. Use of them, however, requires access modules and
multiplexers with built-in support for these test capabilities.
1.8.1
Metallic Loop Test Access

Metallic loop test access is provided through six wire-wrap pins (labeled Loop Test
Access and located at P13/P23) on the backplane. See Figure 15. Metallic loop test
access is available in any access module installed in the system that supports metallic
loop test access.
For testing four-wire and two-wire local loop services, these wire-wrap pins must be
wired to an external test head. For testing two-wire local loop services, only two wirewrap pins (T and R) need be wired.
For a circuit to provide metallic loop testing, the access module servicing that circuit
must incorporate metallic loop test capabilities. Not all access modules will
incorporate this feature. Cards without this feature may be mixed in the same system
with those that do support this feature. Configuring a circuit for metallic loop test
mode is performed through commands issued through the SCU.
P13
T
R
S
T1
R1
S
LOOP
TEST
ACCESS
Figure 15. Wire-wrap Pins for Metallic Test Access
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAENG201-1E

ENG-201
Page 32 of 32
1.8.2
Digital Loop Test Access

Digital test access is provided through six wire-wrap pins (labeled DSX -1Test Access
and located at P23/P22) on the backplane of the system. See Figure 16.
Digital test access in a system is provided through multiplexers incorporating this
feature. A multiplexer supporting digital test access provides a DSX-1 network
interface derived from an access modules interface delivered to the digital test access
wire-wrap pins. Digital test access is engaged with commands issued through the
systems SCU.
P23/P22
DSX1
TEST
ACCESS
DSX-1 Input
To Shelf
Shield
DSX-1 Output
From Shelf
Shield
T1
R1
S
Figure 16. Wire-wrap Pins for Digital Test Access
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP000-1E

SECTION 3
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Application Guides

Find Your Task in the List Below
Then Go To:
Standard DSX-1-Fed System Application
APP-301
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only DSX-1-Fed System Application
APP-302
Standard MUX-Fed System Application
APP-303
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only MUX-Fed System Application
APP-304
DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed System Application
APP-305
QFO-Only System Application
APP-306
Standard Combo-Fed System Application
APP-307
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only Combo-Fed System Application
APP-308
DSL Mode Combo-Fed System Application
APP-309
HDSL Loop Applications
APP-331
T1 Loop Applications
APP-332
Optical DS2 (ODS-2) Loop Applications
APP-333
ISDN Loop Applications
APP-334
DSX-1 Central Office Applications
APP-335
HDSL2 Loop Applications
APP-336
DS3 Multiplexer Applications
APP-340
STS-1 Multiplexer Applications
APP-341
OC-3 Multiplexer Applications
APP-342
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP000-1E

SECTION 3
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 1 of 6
1.1
Standard DSX-1-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The standard DSX-1-Fed configuration will be used when several technologies are to
be used inside one Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and it is to be DSX-1-Fed.
Currently, the technologies that can be mixed together into one standard DSX-1-Fed
shelf are as follows:
T1 (T1-OR)
HDSL (HTU-C, H2TU-C)
ISDN (HD-10 in 8 DSL mode)
ODS-2 (QFO-C)
When mixing technologies in Total Access 3000/3010, it is important to note that the
Total Access shelf can accomodate 28 modules of T1-ORs, HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, and
QFO-Cs, all of which have the option of being in a 1:1 protected or non-protected
mode. If the QFO-C modules are non-protected, then the limit is 14 QFO-Cs per
FO-Cs will occupy the odd-numbered slots. The capacity for the HD-10 is 14 because
the module is a double-wide unit. The HD-10 module does not have 1:1 protection
capabilities.
When different technologies are used in the same shelf, the wiring should follow the
Standard DSX-1-Fed table (see Table 1). This assures the user that all technologies
reach network via DSX-1 A and B connectors (pairs 5 through 8, see Table 2 and
Table 3 for pinouts), and the loop via the MDF (pairs 1 through 4, see Table 4 for
pinouts and Figure 1 for MDF mapping), or the FDF for fiber applications.
NOTE
The H2TU-C delivers its HDSL2 signal to the loop on Pair 2 only.
As long as these guidelines are followed, there is no specific ordering of technologies
or modules within the Total Access shelf.
Total Access3000/3010 System Manual
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 2 of 6
Table 1. Standard DSX-1-Fed

From Total Access 3000
To MDF*
To DSX-1
AMP Connector Pair 1
Connector A
Connector B
Connector C
Connector D
DSX-1 IN B**
DSX-1 OUT B
DSX-1 IN A
DSX-1 OUT A
Recommended Parts
For Connection To MDF
For Connection To DSX-1
Cabling
D/E Female 64 Pos.,

TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1
or
S/E Female 64 Pos.,
TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1***
xxxx = length in feet
S/E Female 64 Pos.,

SI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
Terminal Block
4 Connector Standard Block,

Telzon P/N 482-1064-301
or
4 Connector Compact Block,
Telzon P/N 482-1064-341
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A, B, C, and D refer
to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for
detailed explanation of the DSX-1 IN B, DSX-1 OUT B, DSX-1 IN A, and DSX-1 OUT A.
*** For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block (see Table 4 for
Table pinouts).
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 3 of 6
Table 2. Pinout For Pairs 5 and 7

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
33
1
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT

Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
34
2
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Shield Ground
Shield Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 4 of 6
Table 4. Pinout For Pairs 1 Through 4

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Shield Ground
Pair 1

To MDF
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
Frame Ground
(all pins are connected
on the same bus.
Column 32 needs only to be
wired to Frame Ground)
2
3
4
5
6
7
HDSL
1
0
Loop 2
Loop 1
1
1
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
1
2
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
2
6
DS-1 IN
2
5
R1
DS-1 OUT
T1
2
4
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 5 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP301-1E

APP-301
Page 6 of 6
1.1.2
QFO-C Considerations
When installing QFO-Cs into the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, the odd-numbered
slots of the shelf serve as the main slot and the even-numbered slots serve as the
auxiliary. If operating in a 1:1 protective mode, the slot that is adjacent and to right of
the main slot will then serve as the auxiliary slot. When operating in a non-protective
mode, the slot that is adjacent and to the right of the main slot must either remain
empty, or use an access module blank, P/N 1181953L1.
1.1.3
T1-OR, HTU-C, and H2TU-C Considerations

When installing either a T1-OR, HTU-C, or H2TU-C into the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf, the odd-numbered slots serve as the main slot and the even-numbered slots serve
as the auxiliary. If operating in a 1:1 protective mode, the slot that is adjacent and to
the right of the main slot will then serve as the auxiliary slot. When operating in a
non-protective mode, all 28/22 slots of Total Access 3000/3010 shelf can be used as
independent circuits.
NOTE
If 1:1 protection for the T1-OR, HTU-C, or H2TU-C is not desired, you can
use all 28/22 slots as independent circuits in the shelf. However, when a
QFO-C is used in a non-protection mode, then the slot adjacent and to the right
of the main slot is required to remain empty.
1.1.4
HD-10 (8 DSL mode) Considerations

Because the HD-10 is a double-wide module, it occupies the physical space of two
slots. There is no 1:1 protection feature available for this technology. The HD-10 is
capable of supporting ten U-interfaces. In this configuration, however, all four of the
bottom AMP connectors, labeled Pair 5-8, go to the DSX-1 cross connect, and Pair 5
in particular is unavailable to the HD-10 for DSL numbers 9 and 10, thus limiting the
HD-10 to 8 DSL mode.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 1 of 6
1.1
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only DSX-1-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The HDSL//HDSL2/T1-only DSX-1-Fed configuration will be used when the
technologies are to be only HDSL, HDSL2 and T1, the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf
is to be DSX-1-Fed.
For wiring DSX-1-Fed applications, refer to Table 1.
For wiring to the DSX-1, pairs 7 and 8 will be used. Table 2 is the pinout for pair 7
and Table 3 is the pinout for pair 8.
In HDSL/HDSL2/T1 only applications, only pairs 1 and 2 of the shelf are used for
wiring to the MDF. Therefore, only two connections on the MDF terminal block are
used leaving two unused connections. The two unused connections on the MDF
terminal block can be used for connecting another Total Access 3000/3010 shelf using
HDSL/HDSL2/T1 only. See Table 4 for the cable pinouts for pairs 1 and 2 and see
Figure 1 for terminal block mapping.
NOTE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 2 of 6
Table 1. HDSL/HDSL2/T1 Only DSX-1-Fed

To MDF*
To DSX-1
Connector A
Connector B
DSX-1 IN A**
DSX-1 OUT A
Recommended Parts
Cabling
D/E Female 64 Pos.,

or
S/E Female 64 Pos.,
TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1***
S/E Female 64 Pos.,

Terminal Block

Telzon P/N 482-1064-301
or
Telzon P/N 482-1064-341
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended MDF terminal blocks. Connectors A
and B refer to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this
manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN A and DSX-1 OUT A.
*** For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal blocks (see
Table 4 for cable pin-outs).
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 3 of 6
Table 2. Pinout For Pair 7

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
ShiGround
eld
Shield
Ground
Shield
ShiGround
eld
Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 4 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Shield
ShiGround
eld
Ground
Pair 1

To MDF
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
2
3
4
5
6
7
HDSL
1
0
Loop 2
Loop 1
1
1
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
1
2
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
R1
T1
2
4
2
6
DS-1 OUT
DS-1 IN
2
5
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 5 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP302-1E

APP-302
Page 6 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 1 of 6
1.1
Standard MUX-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The standard MUX-Fed configuration will be used when several technologies are to be
used with Total Access 3000/3010 and the shelf is to be MUX-Fed.
Currently, the technologies that can be mixed together into one MUX-Fed shelf are:
T1 (T1-OR)
ISDN (HD-10 in 8 or 10 DSL mode)
DSX-1
NOTE
If the total Access system is being used as an M13 MUX, that is dropping off
up to 28 DSX signals from a MUX network feed, then connect pair 7 and 8
to the DSX cross connect as indicated in Table 1. Do not connect any of the
other pairs to the MDF. If the total Access system will employ both DSX-1
and access modules and other loop technologies such as T1 or HDSL, then
connect all the connections indicated in Table 1. If the Total Access system
will not employ any DSX-1 or access modules, do not connect pairs 7 and 8
to the DSX cross connect.
The QFO-C does not currently have MUX-Fed capability.

When mixing technologies in Total Access 3000/3010, it is important to note the shelf
can facilitate up to 28 modules of T1-ORs, HTU-Cs, H2TU-C, and DSX-1. The
capacity for the HD-10 in 8 or 10 DSL mode is 14/11 because the module is a doublewide unit.
Standard MUX-Fed table (see Table 1). This assures the user that all technologies
reach the network via MUX connectors (RX and TX), and the loop via the MDF (pairs
1 through 5). See Table 2 for cable pinouts for pairs 1 through 5 and Figure 1 for
MDF mapping. As long as these guidelines are followed, there is no specific ordering
of technologies or modules within Total Access 3000/3010.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.

Connector E

Telzon P/N 422-1066-301
Cabling
Terminal Block
S/E Female 64 Pos.,

xxxx = lenght in feet

734 Coax Cable w/ BNC connectors on both ends,
TSI P/N CA1-xxxx-X44-734-1
or
734 Coax Cable w/ BNC connector on one end only,
or
or
"xxxx" = length in feet
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A, B, C, D, and E refer to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal
block.
** For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal blocks (see Table 2 for cable pinouts).
*** For MUX cards that require connections to the DSX-3/STS-1 cross connect only.
**** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN A
and DSX-1 OUT A.
D/E Female 64 Pos.,

or
S/E Female 64 Pos.,
TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1**
Network Transmit (TX)
BNC (TX)
Recommended Parts
Network Receive (RX)
BNC (RX)
Connector D
DSX-1 OUT A
Connector C
Connector B
To DSX-1
DSX-1 IN A****
Connector A
To DSX-3/STS-1***
To MDF*
Table 1. Standard MUX-Fed
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 2 of 6
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 3 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
ShGround
ield
Shield
Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.

1
0
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
6
ISDN
8 DSL
1
5
1
7
Pair 1
Loop 2
1
8
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
DSL 2
1
1
DSL 1
Loop 1
DSL 4
HDSL
DSL 3
DSL 6
DSL 5
Pair 3

To MDF
Pair 2
DSL 8
DSL 7
Pair 4
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
2
6
DS-1 IN
2
5
R1
DS-1 OUT
T1
2
4
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 4 of 6
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 5 of 6
NOTE
1.1.2
HTU-C and T1-OR Considerations

When installing protected HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, or T1-ORs into Total Access 3000/
3010, the odd-numbered slots of the shelf serve as the main slot and the evennumbered slots serve as auxiliary. Therefore, the main module is always placed in the
odd-numbered slots and the auxiliary module should be placed to the immediate right.
NOTE
28/22 T1-ORs, 28/22 HTU-Cs, and 28/22 H2TU-Cs can be used as
independent circuits if 1:1 protection feature is not desired.
1.1.3
HD-10 (8 or 10 DSL mode) Considerations

slots. There is no 1:1 protection feature available for this technology.
1.1.4
DSX-1 Considerations
The DSX-1 access module is used to drop a single DSX-1 channel out of an STS-1 or
DS-3 data stream for use locally in the CO or for further transport. Consequently, the
DSX-1 access module is used only for MUX-fed applications, and sends its 4-wire
DSX-1 signal out to pairs 7 and 8, where DSX-1 signals are normally found on the
Total Access 3000/3010. There is no 1:1 protection capability in the DSX-1 access
module.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP303-1E

APP-303
Page 6 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP304-1E

APP-304
Page 1 of 4
1.1
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only MUX-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only MUX-Fed configuration will be used when HDSL,
HDSL2, or T1 technologies are to be used in Total Access 3000/3010 and the shelf is
to be fed from a DS3 or STS-1 multiplexer.
For wiring HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only MUX-Fed applications, refer to Table 1.
Note for HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only applications, only pairs 1 and 2 are used for wiring to
the MDF. Therefore, the terminal block for this application uses only two pairs which
translate to two 64-pin/50-pin Amphenol connectors. See Table 2 for cable pinouts
for pairs 1 and 2 and see Figure 1 for MDF mapping.
NOTE
For wiring to the DSX-3/STS-1 cross connect if a DS3 or STS-1 MUX is to be used,
connections will be made via the BNC connectors (TX and RX) located on the rear of
the shelf.
1.1.2
HTU-C and T1-OR Considerations

When installing protected HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs or T1-ORs into Total Access 3000/
3010, the odd-numbered slots of the shelf serve as the main slot and the
even-numbered slots serve as auxiliary. Therefore, the main module is always placed
in the odd-numbered slots and the auxiliary module should be placed to the immediate
right.
NOTE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Recommended Parts

or
or
or
D/E Female 64 Pos.,

or
S/E Female 64 Pos.,
TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1**

Telzon P/N 482-1064-301
or
Telzon P/N 482-1064-341
Cabling
Terminal Block
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A and B refer to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon
terminal block.
** For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block (see Table 2 for cable pinouts).
*** For MUX cards that require connection to a DSX-3/STS-1 cross connect only.
BNC (TX)
Connector B

Connector A
To DSX-3/STS-1***
BNC (RX)
To MDF*
Table 1. HDSL/HDSL2/T1 Only MUX-Fed
6TAAPP304-1E

APP-304
Page 2 of 4
6TAAPP304-1E

APP-304
Page 3 of 4

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Shield
Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Pair 1

To MDF
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
Column 32 need only to be
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
Pair 2 contains Loop 1 for HDSL, DS1 T/R for T1, or the single HDSL2 loop
Pair 1 contains Loop 2 for HDSL or DS1 T1/R1 for T1
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
0
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP304-1E

APP-304
Page 4 of 4
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 1 of 10
1.1
DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed configuration will be used when several technologies are
to be used with Total Access 3000/3010 and the shelf is to be DSX-1-Fed.
Currently, the technologies that can be mixed together into one DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed
shelf are:
T1 (T1-OR)
The exception to the mixing of technologies is the ODS-2 (QFO-C). Due to the
configuration of the HD-10 in 10 DSL mode, the QFO-C cannot be accommodated in
this configuration.
can facilitate a combination of up to 28/22 modules of T1-ORs, HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, or
up to 14/11 modules of HD-10s (8 or 10 DSL mode).
DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed table (see Table 1). This assures the user that all technologies
reach the network via the DSX-1 connectors, pairs 7 and 8; and the loop via the MDF
connectors pairs 1 through 5. Table 2 is the pinout for pairs 7 and 8 for Total Access
3000, and Table 3 is the pinout for pairs 7 and 8 for Total Access 3010. See Table 4
and Table 5 for cable pinout details, for pairs 1 through 5 of the Total Access 3000
and Total Access 3010, respectively. See Figure 1 and Figure 2 for MDF terminal
block mapping. As long as these guidelines are followed, there is no specific ordering
of technologies or modules within Total Access 3000/3010.
NOTE
The H2TU-C delivers its HDSL2 signal to the loop on pair 2 only.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 2 of 10
1.1.2
HTU-C, H2TU-C, and T1-OR Considerations

When installing either HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, or T1-ORs into Total Access 3000/3010,
the odd-numbered slots of the shelf serve as the main slot and the even-numbered slots
serve as auxiliary. Therefore, the main module is always placed in the odd-numbered
slots and the auxiliary module should be placed to the immediate right.
NOTE
1.1.3

slots. There is no protection feature available for this technology.
NOTE
1. When wiring for HDSL, pairs 1 and 2 wire out to Loop 2 and Loop 1,
respectively.
2. When wiring for HDSL2, its signal is delivered to the loop on pair 2.
3. When wiring for ISDN, see Table 6 and Table 7 for more details.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Connector E
Recommended Parts
Total Access 3000

S/E Female 64 Pos., TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
6 Connector Standard Block,Telzon P/N 448-1066-301
Total Access 3010

Total Access 3010
D/E Female 50 Pos., CA4-xxxx-C11-000-1 (shielded),
or
D/E Female 50 Pos., CA4-xxxx-104-T00-2 (unshielded)
or
S/E Female 50 Pos.,CA4-xxxx-102-T00-2
Total Access 3000

D/E Female 64 Pos., TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1
or
S/E Female 64 Pos., TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1**
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A and B refer to 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
*** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN A and DSX-1 OUT A.
Terminal Block
Cabling
Connector D
DSX-1 OUT A
Connector C
Connector B
DSX-1 IN A***
Connector A
To DSX-1
To MDF*
From Total Access
Table 1. DSL Mode DSX-1-Fed
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 3 of 10
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 4 of 10
Table 2. Total Access 3000 Pinout For
Pair 7 and Pair 8
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
64-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3000 Slot
Pair 7
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 IN)
Pair 8
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 OUT)
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
34
2
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
35
3
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT

Pair 7 and Pair 8
Wire Color
50-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3010 Slot
Pair 7
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 IN)
Pair 8
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 OUT)
T
R
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
26
1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
27
2
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
28
3
T
R
T
R
36
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
29
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
37
5
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
30
5
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
38
6
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
31
6
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
39
7
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
32
7
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
40
8
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
33
8
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
41
9
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
34
9
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
42
10
10
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
35
10
10
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
43
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
36
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
44
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
37
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
45
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
38
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
46
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
39
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
47
15
15
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
40
15
15
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
48
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
41
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
49
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
42
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
50
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
43
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
51
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
44
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
52
20
20
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
45
20
20
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
53
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
46
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
54
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
47
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
55
23
23
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
48
23
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
56
24
24
T
R
T
R
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
49
24
Test-R
Test-T
Test-R
Test-T
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
57
25
25
T
R
T
R
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
50
25
GND
GND
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
58
26
26
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
59
27
27
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
60
28
28
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
61
29
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
62
30
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
63
31
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
64
32
Shield
Shield
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 5 of 10
Pair 1 Through Pair 5
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
BLUE
Table 5. Total Access 3010 Pi-out For

Pair 1 Through Pair 5
Wire Color
50-Pin
AMP Pin
T
R
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
26
1
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
27
2
T
R
35
3
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
28
3
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
29
4
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
30
5
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
38
6
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
31
6
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
39
7
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
32
7
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
40
8
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
33
8
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
41
9
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
34
9
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
35
10
10
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
36
11
11
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
37
12
12
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
38
13
13
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
39
14
14
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
40
15
15
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
41
16
16
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
42
17
17
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
43
18
18
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
44
19
19
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
45
20
20
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
46
21
21
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
47
22
22
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
48
23
Unassigned
Unassigned
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
49
24
Test-R
Test-T
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
50
25
GND
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
61
29
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
62
30
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
63
31
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
64
32
Wire Color
64-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3000 Slot
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
33
1
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
34
2
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
Pairs 1 Through 5
Tip / Ring
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
Total
Access
3010 Slot
Pair 1 Through 5
Tip / Ring
Shield
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 6 of 10
Table 6. HD-10 Loop Side Pin Assignments for Total Access 3000
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
Wire Pair Color
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
Wire Pair Color
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1, 33
2, 34
1, 33
2, 34
1, 33
2, 34
1, 33
2, 34
1, 33
2, 34
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
3, 35
4, 36
3, 35
4, 36
3, 35
4, 36
3, 35
4, 36
3, 35
4, 36
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
5, 37
6, 38
5, 37
6, 38
5, 37
6, 38
5, 37
6, 38
5, 37
6, 38
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
7, 39
8, 40
7, 39
8, 40
7, 39
8, 40
7, 39
8, 40
7, 39
8, 40
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
9
10
9
10
9
10
9
10
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
9, 41
10, 42
9, 41
10, 42
9, 41
10, 42
9, 41
10, 42
9, 41
10, 42
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
11
12
11
12
11
12
11
12
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
11, 43
12, 44
11, 43
12, 44
11, 43
12, 44
11, 43
12, 44
11, 43
12, 44
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
13, 45
14, 46
13, 45
14, 46
13, 45
14, 46
13, 45
14, 46
13, 45
14, 46
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
15, 47
16, 48
15, 47
16, 48
15, 47
16, 48
15, 47
16, 48
15, 47
16, 48
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 7 of 10
Table 6. HD-10 Loop Side Pin Assignments for Total Access 3000 (Continued)
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
17, 49
18, 50
17, 49
18, 50
17, 49
18, 50
17, 49
18, 50
17, 49
18, 50
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
Wire Pair Color
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
19, 51
20, 52
19, 51
20, 52
19, 51
20, 52
19, 51
20, 52
19, 51
20, 52
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
21, 53
22, 54
21, 53
22, 54
21, 53
22, 54
21, 53
22, 54
21, 53
22, 54
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
23, 55
24, 56
23, 55
24, 56
23, 55
24, 56
23, 55
24, 56
23, 55
24, 56
GRN/VOL, VOL/GRN
BRN/VOL, VOL/BRN
GRN/VOL, VOL/GRN
BRN/VOL, VOL/BRN
GRN/VOL, VOL/GRN
BRN/VOL, VOL/BRN
GRN/VOL, VOL/GRN
BRN/VOL, VOL/BRN
GRN/VOL, VOL/GRN
BRN/VOL, VOL/BRN
25, 57
26, 58
25, 57
26, 58
25, 57
26, 58
25, 57
26, 58
25, 57
26, 58
SLT/VOL, VOL/SLT
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
SLT/VOL, VOL/SLT
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
SLT/VOL, VOL/SLT
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
SLT/VOL, VOL/SLT
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
SLT/VOL, VOL/SLT
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
27
28
27
28
27
28
27
28
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
27, 59
28, 60
27, 59
28, 60
27, 59
28, 60
27, 59
28, 60
27, 59
28, 60
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN, GRN/WHT
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN, GRN/WHT
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN, GRN/WHT
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN, GRN/WHT
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
WHT/GRN, GRN/WHT
Wire Pair Color
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 8 of 10
Table 7. HD-10 Loop Side Pin Assignments for Total Access 3010
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
Wire Pair Color
Slot #
DSL
#
Pair
Pins
Wire Pair Color
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1, 26
2, 27
1, 26
2, 27
1, 26
2, 27
1, 26
2, 27
1, 26
2, 27
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
BLU/WHT, WHT/BLU
ORG/WHT, WHT/ORG
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
3, 28
4, 29
3, 28
4, 29
3, 28
4, 29
3, 28
4, 29
3, 28
4, 29
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
GRN/WHT, WHT/GRN
BRN/WHT, WHT/BRN
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
5, 30
6, 31
5, 30
6, 31
5, 30
6, 31
5, 30
6, 31
5, 30
6, 31
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
SLT/WHT, WHT/SLT
BLU/RED, RED/BLU
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
7, 32
8, 33
7, 32
8, 33
7, 32
8, 33
7, 32
8, 33
7, 32
8, 33
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
ORG/RED, RED/ORG
GRN/RED, RED/GRN
9
10
9
10
9
10
9
10
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
9, 34
10, 35
9, 34
10, 35
9, 34
10, 35
9, 34
10, 35
9, 34
10, 35
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
BRN/RED, RED/BRN
SLT/RED, RED/SLT
11
12
11
12
11
12
11
12
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
11, 36
12, 37
11, 36
12, 37
11, 36
12, 37
11, 36
12, 37
11, 36
12, 37
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
BLU/BLK, BLK/BLU
ORG/BLK, BLK/ORG
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 9 of 10
Table 7. HD-10 Loop Side Pin Assignments for Total Access 3010 (Continued)
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
13, 38
14, 39
13, 38
14, 39
13, 38
14, 39
13, 38
14, 39
13, 38
14, 39
17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
Wire Pair Color
Slot #
DSL #
Pair
Pins
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
GRN/BLK, BLK/GRN
BRN/BLK, BLK/BRN
15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
15, 40
16, 41
15, 40
16, 41
15, 40
16, 41
15, 40
16, 41
15, 40
16, 41
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
SLT/BLK, BLK/SLT
BLU/YEL, YEL/BLU
17, 42
18, 43
17, 42
18, 43
17, 42
18, 43
17, 42
18, 43
17, 42
18, 43
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
ORG/YEL, YEL/ORG
GRN/YEL. YEL/GRN
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
19, 44
20, 45
19, 44
20, 45
19, 44
20, 45
19, 44
20, 45
19, 44
20, 45
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
BRN/YEL, YEL/BRN
SLT/YEL, YEL/SLT
21, 46
22, 47
21, 46
22, 47
21, 46
22, 47
21, 46
22, 47
21, 46
22, 47
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
BLU/VOL, VOL/BLU
ORG/VOL, VOL/ORG
Wire Pair Color
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Pair 1
Pair 2
Loop 1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
6
ISDN
1
7
1
8
HDSL
1
3
1
4
1
6
ISDN
1
7
1
8
Pair 1
Pair 2
T1
R1
DS-1 OUT
2
2
DSL 1
8 DSL
DSL 2
DSL 4
1
0
2
1
T1
T1
R1
2
6
Loop
DS-1 OUT
DS-1 IN
HDSL2
HDSL2
Figure 2. Total Access 3010 MDF Map
Loop 2
DSL 3
DSL 6
DSL 5
1
1
Pair 3
T1
Loop 1
DSL 8
DS-1 IN
DSL 7
Pair 4
DSL10
8 DSL
DSL 2
DSL 1
Loop 2
DSL 4
DSL 3
DSL 6
DSL 9
Pair 5
Pair 6
To MDF
HDSL
DSL 5
Pair 3
DSL 8
DSL 7
Pair 4
DSL10
To MDF
DSL 9
Pair 5
Pair 6
on the same bus.
Frame Ground
1
7
2
9
2
0
Loop
HDSL2
HDSL2
2
1
3
2
to Frame Ground
Connect Column 32
6TAAPP305-1E

APP-305
Page 10 of 10
6TAAPP306-1E

APP-306
Page 1 of 4
1.1
QFO-Only System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The QFO-only configuration will be used when the QFO-C is the only card in the shelf
and the shelf is to be DSX-1-Fed.
For QFO-only applications, all four DSX-1 connections are used. The connections are
pairs 5 through 8 and are connected via four 64-pin/50-pin Amphenol connectors.
Table 1 is the pinout for pairs 5 and 7, and Table 2 is the pinout for pairs 6 and 8.
If 1:1 protection is desired, 2 QFO-C modules are required for each protected circuit,
with the odd-numbered slot serving as the working and the adjacent, even-numbered
slot (to the immediate right) serving as auxiliary. If 1:1 protection is not desired, then
only 1 QFO-C is required with the even-numbered slot vacant to the right. A Total
Access 3000/3010 access module blank (P/N 1181953L1) can be used for the vacant
slot.
For each QFO-C, there will be two fibers going to the FDF (see Table 3 for shelf
wiring). Each fiber is unidirectional. Therefore, the non-protected mode will have 28/
22 fiber optic cables going to the FDF and the protected mode will have 56/44 fiber
optic cables.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP306-1E

APP-306
Page 2 of 4

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
33
1
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT

Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
34
2
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Shield
ShiGround
eld
Ground
Shield
ShiGround
eld
Ground
6TAAPP306-1E

APP-306
Page 3 of 4
Table 3. QFO-Only
To FDF
To DSX-1
DSX-1 IN B*
DSX-1 OUT B
DSX-1 IN A
DSX-1 OUT A
RX**
RX (IN)
TX**
TX (OUT)
Recommended Parts
Cabling
S/E Female 64 Pos.,

* Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for
detailed explanation of the DSX-1 IN B, DSX-1 OUT B, DSX-1 IN A, and DSX-1 OUT A.
** Fiber connections are made to the QFO-C via the connector on its PCB.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP306-1E

APP-306
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 1 of 6
1.1
Standard Combo-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The Standard Combo-Fed configuration will be used when several technologies are to
be used inside one Total Access 3000/3010 and it is to be DSX-1 and MUX-Fed.
Currently, the technologies that can be mixed together into one Standard Combo-Fed
shelf are:
T1 (T1-OR)
ISDN (HD-10 in 8 DSL mode)
ODS-2 (QFO-C)
DSX-1
When mixing technologies in Total Access 3000/3010, it is important to note that the
shelf can accomodate up to 28/22 modules of T1-ORs, HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, and QFOCs all of which have the option of being in a 1:1 protected or non-protected mode. If
the QFO-C modules are non-protected, then the limit is 14/11 QFO-Cs per shelf. The
capacity for the HD-10 is 14/11 because the module is a double-wide unit, and the
module does not have 1:1 protection capabilities.
Standard Combo-Fed table (see Table 1). This assures the user that all technologies
reach the network via DSX-1 A and B connectors (pairs 5 through 8, see Table 2 and
Table 3 for pinouts) the BNC RX and TX connectors, and the loop via the MDF (pairs
1 through 4, see Table 4 for cable pinouts and Figure 1 for MDF mapping), or the
FDF for fiber applications.
NOTE
As long as these guidelines are followed, there is no specific ordering of technologies
or modules within the Total Access shelf.
2002, ADTRAN,
Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.

S/E Female 64 Pos., TSI
P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
D/E Female 64 Pos., TSI

P/N CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1
or
S/E Female 64 Pos., TSI
P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1***
4 Connector Standard Block, Telzon

P/N 482-1064-301
or
4 Connector Compact Block, Telzon
P/N 482-1064-341
Cabling
Terminal Block

or
734 Coax Cable w/ BNC connector on one end
only, TSI P/N CA1-xxxx-X41-734-1
or
or
Recommended Parts
* Fiber connections are made to the QFO-C via the connector on its PCB.
** Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A, B, C, and D refer to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
*** For use in applications where cabling is wire-wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block (see Table 4 for cable pinouts).
**** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidline tab of this manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN B, DSX-1 OUT B, DSX-1 IN A, and DSX-1 OUT A.
RX (IN)
TX (OUT)
TX*
To FDF (for MUXs requiring fiber feeds)
RX*

DSX-1 IN A
DSX-1 OUT A
TX
DSX-1 OUT B
To DSX-3 (for muxes requiring DSX-3

connection)
RX
DSX-1 IN B****
Connector D
To DSX-1
Connector B
Connector C
Connector A
To MDF**
Table 1. Standard Combo-Fed
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 2 of 6
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 3 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
33
1
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT

Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
34
2
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
ShiGround
eld
Shield
Ground
ShiGround
eld
Shield
Ground
2002, ADTRAN,
Inc.
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 4 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
ShiGround
eld
Shield
Ground

1
0
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
6
ISDN
8 DSL
1
5
1
7
Pair 1
Loop 2
1
8
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
DSL 2
1
1
DSL 1
Loop 1
DSL 4
HDSL
DSL 3
DSL 6
DSL 5
Pair 3

To MDF
Pair 2
DSL 8
DSL 7
Pair 4
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
2
6
DS-1 IN
2
5
R1
DS-1 OUT
T1
2
4
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 5 of 6
2002, ADTRAN,
Inc.
6TAAPP307-1E

APP-307
Page 6 of 6
1.1.2
QFO-C Considerations
NOTE
QFO-C is DSX-1-Fed only. Therefore, these modules should be provisioned
as DSX-1-Fed only.
When installing QFO-Cs into Total Access 3000/3010, the odd-numbered slots of the
shelf serve as the main slot and the even-numbered slots serve as the auxiliary. When
operating in a non-protective mode, the slot that is adjacent and to the right of the main
slot must either remain empty, or may use an access module blank, P/N 1181953L1. If
operating in a 1:1 protective mode, the slot that is adjacent and to the right of the
working slot will then serve as the auxiliary slot.
1.1.3
T1-OR, HTU-C, and H2TU-C Considerations

When installing either a protected T1-OR, HTU-C, or H2TU-C into Total Access
3000/3010 shelf, the odd-numbered slots serve as the main slot and the even-numbered
slots serve as the auxiliary. When operating in a non-protective mode, all 28/22 slots
of Total Access 3000/3010 shelf can be used as main slots. If operating in a 1:1
protective mode, the slot that is adjacent and to the right of the main slot will then
serve as the auxiliary slot.
NOTE
If 1:1 protection for the T1-OR, HTU-C, or H2TU-C is not desired, all 28/22
slots can be used as independent circuits in the shelf. When a QFO-C is used
in a non-protection mode, then the slot adjacent and to the right of the main
slot is required to remain empty, or have an access module blank, P/N
1181953L1.
1.1.4
HD-10 (8 DSL mode) Considerations

slots. There is no 1:1 protection feature available for this technology. In this
configuration, the HD-10 cannot be provisioned for 10 DSL mode because pairs 5 and
6 are required for DSX-1 cross-connecting.
1.1.5
Total Access 3000/3010. There is no 1:1 protection capability in the DSX-1 access
module.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 1 of 6
1.1
HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only Combo-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The HDSL/HDSL2/T1-only Combo-Fed configuration will be used when the
technologies are to be only DSX-1, HDSL, HDSL2, and T1, and Total Access 3000/
3010 is to be DSX-1 and MUX-Fed.
For wiring DSX-1 and MUX-Fed applications, refer to Table 1.
For wiring to the DSX-1, pairs 7 and 8 will be used. Table 2 is the pinout for pairs 7
and 8 of Total Access 3000 and Table 3 is the pinout for pairs 7 and 8 for Total
Access 3010. For wiring to the DSX-3/STS-1, the RX and TX connections of the
optional BNC connector will be used.
In DSX-1/HDSL/HDSL2/T1 only applications, only pairs 1 and 2 of the shelf are used
for wiring to the MDF. Therfore, only two connections on the MDF terminal block are
used leaving two unused connections. The two unused connections on the MDF
terminal block can be used for connecting another Total Access 3000/3010 shelf using
DSX-1/HDSL/HDSL2/T1 only. Table 4 is the cable pinout for pairs 1 and 2 of Total
Access 3000 and Table 5 is the cable pinout for pairs 1 and 2 of Total Access 3010.
Figure 1 is the MDF terminal block map for Total Access 3000 and Figure 2 is the
MDF terminal block map for Total Access 3010.
NOTE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.

Total Access 3000
S/E Female 64 Pos., TSI P/N CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
4 Connector Standard Block
Total Access 3010

Total Access 3010
or
D/E Female 50 Pos., CA4-xxxx-104-T00-2 (unshielded)
or
S/E Female 50 Pos.,CA4-xxxx-102-T00-2
Total Access 3000

or
* Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal blocks. Connectors A and B refer to 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
*** Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN A and DSX-1 OUT A.
Terminal Block
Cabling
Recommended Parts
DSX-1 OUT A
Connector B

DSX-1 IN A***
Connector A
To DSX-1
To MDF*
From Total Access
Table 1. HDSL/HDSL2/T1-Only Combo Fed
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 2 of 6
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 3 of 6
Pairs 7 and 8
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
BLUE

Pairs 7 and 8
Wire Color
50-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3010 Slot
Pair 7
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 IN)
Pair 8
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 OUT)
T
R
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
26
1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
27
2
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
28
3
T
R
T
R
36
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
29
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
37
5
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
30
5
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
38
6
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
31
6
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
39
7
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
32
7
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
40
8
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
33
8
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
41
9
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
34
9
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
42
10
10
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
35
10
10
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
43
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
36
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
44
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
37
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
45
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
38
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
46
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
39
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
47
15
15
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
40
15
15
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
48
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
41
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
49
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
42
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
50
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
43
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
51
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
44
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
52
20
20
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
45
20
20
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
53
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
46
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
54
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
47
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
55
23
23
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
48
23
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
56
24
24
T
R
T
R
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
49
24
Test-R
Test-T
Test-R
Test-T
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
57
25
25
T
R
T
R
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
50
25
GND
GND
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
58
26
26
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
59
27
27
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
60
28
28
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
61
29
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
62
30
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
63
31
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
64
32
Shield
Shield
Wire Color
64-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3000 Slot
Pair 7
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 IN)
Pair 8
Tip / Ring
(DSX-1 OUT)
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
34
2
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
35
3
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 4 of 6

Pairs 1 and 2
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
64-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3000 Slot
Pair 1
Tip / Ring
(Loop 2)
Pair 2
Tip / Ring
(Loop 1)
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
34
2
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
35
3
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT

Pairs 1 and 2
Wire Color
50-Pin
AMP Pin
Total
Access
3010 Slot
Pair 1
Tip / Ring
(Loop 2)
Pair 2
Tip / Ring
(Loop 1)
T
R
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
26
1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
27
2
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
28
3
T
R
T
R
36
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
29
4
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
37
5
T
R
T
R
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
30
5
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
38
6
T
R
T
R
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
31
6
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
39
7
T
R
T
R
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
32
7
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
40
8
T
R
T
R
RED / GRN
GRN / RED
33
8
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
41
9
T
R
T
R
RED / BRN
BRN / RED
34
9
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
42
10
10
T
R
T
R
RED / SLT
SLT / RED
35
10
10
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
43
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / BLU
BLU / BLK
36
11
11
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
44
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / ORG
ORG / BLK
37
12
12
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
45
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / GRN
GRN / BLK
38
13
13
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
46
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / BRN
BRN / BLK
39
14
14
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
47
15
15
T
R
T
R
BLK / SLT
SLT / BLK
40
15
15
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
48
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / BLU
BLU / YEL
41
16
16
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
49
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / ORG
ORG / YEL
42
17
17
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
50
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / GRN
GRN / YEL
43
18
18
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
51
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / BRN
BRN / YEL
44
19
19
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
52
20
20
T
R
T
R
YEL / SLT
SLT / YEL
45
20
20
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
53
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / BLU
BLU / VOL
46
21
21
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
54
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / ORG
ORG / VOL
47
22
22
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
55
23
23
T
R
T
R
VOL / GRN
GRN / VOL
48
23
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
56
24
24
T
R
T
R
VOL / BRN
BRN / VOL
49
24
Test-R
Test-T
Test-R
Test-T
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
57
25
25
T
R
T
R
VOL / SLT
SLT / VOL
50
25
GND
GND
WHT / BLU
BLU / WHT
58
26
26
T
R
T
R
WHT / ORG
ORG / WHT
59
27
27
T
R
T
R
WHT / GRN
GRN / WHT
60
28
28
T
R
T
R
WHT / BRN
BRN / WHT
61
29
WHT / SLT
SLT / WHT
62
30
RED / BLU
BLU / RED
63
31
RED / ORG
ORG / RED
64
32
Shield
Shield
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Binder
Group
Color
NONE
To MDF
Pair 1
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
Pair 1

To MDF
Pair 2
Pair 3
Pair 4
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
T1
T1
R1
DS-1 OUT
DS-1 IN
1
0
Loop 2
Loop 1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Loop 2
Loop 1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
0
2
1
Loop
HDSL2
HDSL2
2
6
DS-1 IN
2
5
R1
DS-1 OUT
T1
HDSL
2
4
HDSL
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 5 of 6
6TAAPP308-1E

APP-308
Page 6 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 1 of 6
1.1
DSL Mode Combo-Fed System Application

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The DSL Mode Combo-Fed configuration will be used when several technologies are
to be used with Total Access 3000/3010 and the shelf is to be DSX-1 and MUX-Fed.
Currently, the technologies that can be mixed together into one DSL Mode
Combo-Fed shelf are:
T1 (T1-OR)
DSX-1
The exception to mixing technologies is the ODS-2 (QFO-C). The QFO-C cannot be
used in the same shelf as a 10 DSL configured HD-10. Also, the QFO-C does not
currently support MUX-Fed operations. (This would enable the QFO-C to be used
only if wiring 8 DSL for ISDN applications.)
can accomodate a combination of up to 28/22 modules of T1-ORs, HTU-Cs,
H2TU-Cs, DSX-1s, or up to 14/11 modules of HD-10s (8 or 10 DSL mode).
DSL Mode Combo-Fed table (see Table 1). This assures the user that all technologies
reach the network via the DSX-1 connectors pairs 7 and 8 (see Table 2 and Table 3
for pinouts), the RX and TX connectors on the BNC, and the loop via the MDF
connectors pairs 1 through 5. See Table 4 for cable pinouts and Figure 1 for MDF
mapping. As long as these guidelines are followed, there is no specific ordering of
technologies or modules within Total Access 3000/3010.
NOTE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.

6 Connector Standard Block, Telzon
P/N 448-1066-301

or
or
or
*Connections listed are based on the use of the recommended terminal block. Connectors A, B, C, D, and E refer to 64-pin AMP connectors located on the Telzon terminal block.
**For use in applications where cabling is wire wrapped directly to the MDF terminal block (see Table 4 for cable pinouts).
***Review section 1.6.1 of 6TAENG201-1, located under the Engineering Guidelines tab of this manual, for detailed explanation of DSX-1 IN A and DSX-1 OUT A.
Terminal Block
Cabling
S/E Female 64 Pos.,


or
Recommended Parts

BNC (TX)
DSX-1 OUT A
To DSX-3/STS-1 Cross-connect
BNC (RX)
DSX-1 IN A***
Connector E
To DSX-1
Connector C
Connector D
Connector B
To MDF*
Connector A
Table 1. DSL Mode Combo-Fed
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 2 of 6
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 3 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
33
1
Tip/Ring
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
Shield
Ground
Shield
Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 4 of 6

Binder Group Color
NONE
BLUE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Wire Color
64-Pin AMP Pin
Total Access
3000 Slot
Tip/Ring
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
33
1
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
34
2
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
35
3
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
36
4
T
R
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
37
5
T
R
REDBLU
BLU/RED
38
6
T
R
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
39
7
T
R
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
40
8
T
R
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
41
9
T
R
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
42
10
10
T
R
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
43
11
11
T
R
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
44
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
45
13
13
T
R
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
46
14
14
T
R
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
47
15
15
T
R
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
48
16
16
T
R
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
49
17
17
T
R
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
50
18
18
T
R
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
51
19
19
T
R
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
52
20
20
T
R
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
53
21
21
T
R
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
54
22
22
T
R
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
55
23
23
T
R
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
56
24
24
T
R
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
57
25
25
T
R
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
58
26
26
T
R
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
59
27
27
T
R
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
60
28
28
T
R
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
61
29
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
62
30
REDBLU
BLU/RED
63
31
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
64
32
Shield
Ground

1
0
1
6
1
7
1
8
Pair 1
Loop 2
1
9
Figure 1. MDF Map
DSL 2
ISDN
10 DSL
1
5
DSL 1
1
4
DSL 4
1
3
DSL 3
1
2
DSL 6
1
1
DSL 5
Loop 1
Pair 3
HDSL

To MDF
Pair 2
DSL 8
DSL 7
Pair 4
DSL 10
DSL 9
Pair 5
Pair 6
Frame Ground
on the same bus.
2
0
2
1
2
2
T1
2
3
2
6
DS-1 IN
2
5
R1
DS-1 OUT
T1
2
4
2
7
2
9
3
0
HDSL2
Loop
HDSL2
2
8
3
1
3
2
Connect Column 32
to Frame Ground
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 5 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP309-1E

APP-309
Page 6 of 6
1.1.2
HTU-C, H2TU-C, and T1-OR Considerations

When installing either HTU-Cs, H2TU-Cs, or T1-ORs into Total Access 3000/3010,
the odd-numbered slots of the shelf serve as the main slot and the even-numbered slots
serve as auxiliary. Therefore, the main module is always placed in the odd-numbered
slots and the auxiliary module should be placed to the immediate right.
NOTE
independent circuits if the 1:1 protection feature is not desired.
1.1.3

slots. There is no 1:1 protection feature available for this technology.
1.1.4
Total Access3000/3010. There is no 1:1 protection capability in the DSX-1 access
module.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 1 of 6
1.1
HDSL Loop Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
HDSL Circuit Without HREs

Figure 1 illustrates a typical HDSL circuit without the use of HREs.
Central Office
Total Access 3000/3010 Chassis
Remote Site
HTU-C
12 Kft
DS1
24 AWG
HTU-R
Figure 1. HDSL Circuit Without HRE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 2 of 6
1.2
HDSL Circuit With One HRE

Figure 2 illustrates a typical HDSL circuit with the use of one HRE.
Central Office
Remote Site
HTU-C
12 Kft
HRE
24 AWG
DS1
12 Kft
24 AWG
HTU-R
Figure 2. HDSL Circuit With One HRE
1.1.3
HDSL Circuit With Two HRES

Figure 3 illustrates a typical HDSL circuit with the use of two HREs.
NOTE
Two is the maximum number of HREs that can be deployed in an HDSL
circuit.
Central Office
Remote Site
HTU-C
12 Kft
12 Kft
12 Kft
24 AWG
24A WG
24 AWG
DS1
HTU-R
Figure 3. HDSL Circuit With Two HREs

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 3 of 6
1.1.4
Total Access Deployment Guidelines for HDSL

The ADTRAN Total Access 3000/3010 system is designed to deliver HDSL-based
services over loops that are in compliance with the Carrier Service Area (CSA)
guidelines listed below:
1.1.5
All loops must be non-loaded.

The maximum loop length, including bridged tap, for 26 AWG cable is 9 kft.
The maximum loop length, including bridged tap, for 24 AWG cable is 12 kft.
Any single bridge tap is limited to 2 kft.
Total bridge tap is limited to 2.5 kft.
The total length of multi-gauge cable containing 26 AWG cable must not exceed the
following:
12 [(3*L26)/(9 LBTAP)] (in kft.)
L26 = Total length of 26 AWG cable excluding bridge taps (in kft.)
LBTAP = Total length of all bridge taps (in kft).
HDSL Loop Limits

In addition to conforming to CSA guidelines, some consideration may need to be
given to inside wiring to properly deploy the system. Some installations may require
drop and customer premises wiring to be included in the network configuration. HDSL
loop limits for different gauges of wire are displayed in Table 1.
For more detailed information about CSA guidelines, refer to Telcordia Total
Access-NWT-1210.
If a loop does not meet CSA criteria for HDSL, it may still conform to general HDSL
guidelines. Use Table 2 and Table 3 to determine if the loop is within HDSL
guidelines for the following two criteria:
Maximum dB loss is 35 @ 196 khz and 135 ohms
Maximum DC ohms per loop is 800
NOTE
The following calculations must be calculated on each individual loop of the
circuit. For example, in a one-repeatered circuit, the calculations must be
performed on the loop between the office and the repeater, and on the loop
between the repeater and the customer.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 4 of 6
Table 1. HDSL Loop Limits

Cable Gauge
Loss at 196 Khz

dB/kft
Ohms per kft
Max. Loop for

35 dB Loss
Ohms at Max.
Loop Length
26
3.880
83.3
9.0 kft
750
24
2.841
51.9
12.3 kft
638
22
2.177
32.4
16.1 kft
520
19
1.535
16.1
22.8 kft
367
NOTE
Loop limits are for a circuit with 6 dB nominal margin at 68 F.
1.1.6
HDSL Tables and Worksheets

The following section includes tables and worksheets to calculate dB loss and DC
resistance for HDSL local loops. The information is intended to give the user a
guideline when engineering and deploying new circuits or analyzing existing circuits
against HDSL criteria.
Use the worksheet in Table 2 to calculate the maximum dB loss of circuit. Use the
worksheet in Table 3 to calculate maximum DC loop resistance.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 5 of 6
Table 2. Total dB Loss at 196 khz and 135 Ohms Worksheet
A. Total length of 26 AWG cable in kft.
____________ kft
B. Calculate total 26 AWG cable loss in dB (A x 3.88)
____________ dB
C. Total length of 24 AWG cable in kft.
____________ kft
D. Calculate total 24 AWG cable loss in dB (C x 2.84)
____________ dB
E. Total length of 22 AWG cable in kft.
____________ kft
F. Calculate total 22 AWG cable loss in dB (E x 2.18)
____________ dB
G. Total length of 19 AWG cable in kft.
____________ kft
H. Calculate total 19 AWG cable loss in dB (G x 1.5)
____________ dB
I.
____________ dB
Calculate total cable loss in dB. (B + D + F + H)
J. Number of bridge taps
____________
K. Calculate total bridge tap loss (J x 3.0)
____________ dB
L. Number of cable gauge changes
____________
M. Calculate total loss due to cable gauge changes (L x 1.0) ____________ dB

N. Calculate total span loss in dB (I + K + M)
____________ dB
Note: Total loss must be < 35 dB.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP331-1E

APP-331
Page 6 of 6
Table 3. Maximum DC Loop Resistance Worksheet
____________ kft
B. Calculate total 26 AWG DC loop resistance (A x 83)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
D. Calculate total 24 AWG DC loop resistance (C x 52)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
F. Calculate total 22 AWG DC loop resistance (E x 32)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
H. Calculate total 19 AWG DC loop resistance (G x 16)
____________ ohms
I.
____________ kft
Cable length from MDF to equipment rack in kft.
J. Calculate office loop resistance (I x 32)
____________ ohms
K. Cable length from customer interface to remote unit (J x 3.0)
____________ kft
L. Calculate customer premises loop resistance (K x 32)
____________ ohms
M. Calculate total loop resistance (B + D + H + J + L)
____________ ohms
N. Consider HDSL t-r resistance in total (M + 5)
____________ ohms
Note: Total resistance must be < 800 ohms.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP332-1E

APP-332
Page 1 of 2
1.1
T1 Loop Applications
NOTE
1.1.1
T1 Circuit Without Repeaters

Figure 1 illustrates a typical T1 circuit without the use of repeaters.
Central Office
Remote Site
T1 4-Wire Circuit
6 Kft
T1-OR
NIU
Figure 1. T1 Circuit Without Repeater
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP332-1E

APP-332
Page 2 of 2
1.1.2
T1 Circuit With The Use of a Repeater

Figure 2 illustrates a typical T1 circuit with the use of a repeater.
Central Office
Remote Site
3 Kft
6 Kft
T1 Repeater
NIU
T1-OR
Figure 2. T1 Circuit With a Repeater
20012, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP333-1E

APP-333
Page 1 of 2
1.1
Optical DS2 (ODS-2) Loop Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
ODS-2 Circuit
Figure 1 illustrates a typical ODS-2 circuit.
Central Office
Remote Site
(2) 1310 nm Single
mode fibers
4 T1 Circuits
24 Km
QFO-C
Optical DS2
Remote Chassis
Figure 1. ODS-2 Circuit
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP333-1E

APP-333
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP334-1E

APP-334
Page 1 of 4
1.1
ISDN Loop Applications

NOTE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP334-1E

APP-334
Page 2 of 4
1.1.1
ISDN Circuit Using 10 DSL Mode

Figure 1 illustrates a typical ISDN circuit using 10 DSL Mode.
10
U-Interface
BR1/10
Carrier
10 DSL
18 Kft
U-Interface
30.5 Kft
SC PAM
Carrier
ISDN
Terminal Adapter
10 DSL
TRI-R
18 Kft
U-Interface
18 Kft
U-Interface
18 Kft
U-Interface
ISDN
Terminal Adapter
ISDN
Terminal Adapter
T400 or BR1/10
30.5 Kft
SC PAM
18 Kft
U-Interface
TRI-R
ISDN
Terminal Adapter
Figure 1. ISDN Circuit Using 10 DSL Mode
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP334-1E

APP-334
Page 3 of 4
1.1.2
ISDN Circuit Using 8 DSL Mode

Figure 2 illustrates a typical ISDN circuit using 8 DSL Mode.
8
U-Interface
8 DSL
BR1/10, D4,
SLC 96, ACT 2300
Carrier
8 DSL
18 Kft
U-Interface
30.5 Kft
SC PAM
Carrier
Terminal
Adaptor
8 DSL
TRI-R
18 Kft
U-Interface
Terminal
Adaptor
18 Kft
U-Interface
18 Kft
U-Interface
Terminal
Adaptor
T400 or BR1/10
30.5 Kft
SC PAM
18 Kft
U-Interface
TRI-R
Terminal
Adaptor
Figure 2. ISDN Circuit Using 8 DSL Mode
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP334-1E

APP-334
Page 4 of 4
1.1.3
ISDN Circuit Using a HDSL Interface

Figure 3 illustrates a typical ISDN circuit configured for 8 or 10 DSL using a HDSL
interface.
8 or 10
U-Interface
8 or 10 DSL
BR1/10
12 Kft HDSL
8 or 10 DSL
18 Kft
U-Interface
DSX-1
Cross Connect
18 Kft
U-Interface
Terminal
Adaptor
T400 or BR1/10
30.5 Kft
SC PAM
TRI-R
18 Kft
U-Interface
Terminal
Adaptor
Figure 3. ISDN Circuit Using an HDSL Interface
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP335-1E

APP-335
Page 1 of 2
1.1
DSX-1 Central Office Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
DSX-1 Circuit
Figure 1 illustrates a typical DSX-1 circuit within a central office.
Network
Network
Network
Figure 1. DSX-1 Circuit within a Central Office
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP335-1E

APP-335
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 1 of 6
1.1
HDSL2 Loop Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
HDSL2 Circuit Without H2R

Figure 1 illustrates a typical HDSL2 circuit without the use of H2R.
Central Office
Remote Site
12 Kft
H2TU-C
DS1
(2-wire)
H2TU-R
Figure 1. HDSL2 Circuit without H2R
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 2 of 6
1.1.2
HDSL2 Circuit With One H2R

Figure 2 illustrates a typical HDSL2 circuit with the use of one H2R.
Central Office
Remote Site
12 Kft
H2TU-C
(2-wire)
H2R
12 Kft
DS1
(2-wire)
H2TU-R
Figure 2. HDSL2 Circuit With One H2R
1.1.3
Total Access Deployment Guidelines for HDSL2

The ADTRAN Total Access 3000/3010 system is designed to deliver HDSL2-based
services over loops that are in compliance with the Carrier Service Area (CSA)
guidelines listed below:
All loops must be non-loaded.

The maximum loop length, including bridge tap, for 26 AWG cable is 9 kft.
The maximum loop length, including bridge tap, for 24 AWG cable is 12 kft.
Any single bridged tap is limited to 2 kft.
Total bridged tap is limited to 2.5 kft.
The total length of multi-gauge cable containing 26 AWG cable must not exceed
the following:
12 {(3*L26) / (9 LBTAP (in kft.)}
L26 = Total length of 26 AWG cable excluding bridge taps (in kft.)
LBTAP = Total length of all bridge taps (in kft.).
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 3 of 6
1.1.4
HDSL2 Loop Limits

In addition to conforming to CSA guidelines, some consideration may need to be
given to inside wiring to properly deploy the system. Some installations may require
drop and customer premises wiring to be included in the network configuration.
HDSL2 loop limits for different gauges of wire are displayed in Table 1.
For more detailed information about CSA guidelines, refer to Telcordia
TA-NWT-1210.
Table 1. HDSL2 Loop Limits
Cable Gauge
Loss @ 196 Khz

dB/kft
Ohms per kft
Max. Loop for

35 dB Loss
Ohms @ Max.
Loop Length
26
3.880
83.3
9.0 kft
750
24
2.841
51.9
12.3 kft
638
22
2.177
32.4
16.1 kft
520
19
1.535
16.1
22.8 kft
367
If a loop does not meet CSA criteria for HDSL2, it may still conform to general
HDSL2 guidelines. Use Table 2 and Table 3 to determine if the loop is within HDSL2
guidelines for the following two criteria:
Maximum dB loss is 35 @ 196 khz and 135 ohms
Maximum DC ohms per loop is 900
NOTE
The following calculations must be calculated on each individual loop of the
circuit. For example, in a one-repeatered circuit, the calculations must be
performed on the loop between the office and the repeater, and on the loop
between the repeater and the customer.
NOTE
Loop limits are for a circuit with 6 dB nominal margin @ 68 F.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 4 of 6
1.1.5
HDSL2 Tables and Worksheets

The following section includes tables and worksheets to calculate dB loss and DC
resistance for HDSL2 local loops. The information is intended to give the user a
guideline when engineering and deploying new circuits or analyzing existing circuits
against HDSL2 criteria.
Use the worksheet in Table 2 to calculate the maximum dB loss of circuit. Use the
worksheet in Table 3 to calculate maximum DC loop resistance.
Table 2. Total dB Loss @ 196 khz and 135 Ohms Worksheet
____________ kft
B. Calculate total 26 AWG cable loss in dB (A x 3.88)
____________ dB
____________ kft
D. Calculate total 24 AWG cable loss in dB (C x 2.84)
____________ dB
____________ kft
F. Calculate total 22 AWG cable loss in dB (E x 2.18)
____________ dB
____________ kft
H. Calculate total 19 AWG cable loss in dB (G x 1.5)
____________ dB
I.
____________ dB
Calculate total cable loss in dB. (B + D + F + H)
J. Number of bridge taps
____________
K. Calculate total bridge tap loss (J x 3.0)
____________ dB
L. Number of cable gauge changes
____________
M. Calculate total loss due to cable gauge changes (L x 1.0) ____________ dB

N. Calculate total span loss in dB (I + K + M)
____________ dB
Note: Total loss must be < 35 dB.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 5 of 6
Table 3. Maximum DC Loop Resistance Worksheet
____________ kft
B. Calculate total 26 AWG DC loop resistance (A x 83)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
D. Calculate total 24 AWG DC loop resistance (C x 52)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
F. Calculate total 22 AWG DC loop resistance (E x 32)
____________ ohms
____________ kft
H. Calculate total 19 AWG DC loop resistance (G x 16)
____________ ohms
I.
____________ kft
Cable length from MDF to equipment rack in kft.
J. Calculate office loop resistance (I x 32)
____________ ohms
K. Cable length from customer interface to remote unit (J x 3.0)
____________ kft
L. Calculate customer premises loop resistance (K x 32)
____________ ohms
M. Calculate total loop resistance (B + D + H + J + L)
____________ ohms
N. Consider HDSL2 t-r resistance in total (M + 5)
____________ ohms
Note: Total resistance must be < 900 ohms.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP336-1E

APP-336
Page 6 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP340-1E

APP-340
Page 1 of 2
1.1
DS3 Multiplexer Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The DS3 multiplexer for Total Access converts the system into one that can accept a
single DSX-3 network interface. A system with a DS3 multiplexer can accept DSX-3
and DSX-1 network interfaces, where the DSX-1 network interfaces are provided
directly to the access modules. The DS3 multiplexer incorporates time slot assignment
to deliver any DS1 (or DS2) in the DS3 to any slot in the system. This allows for
certain slots to have DSX-1 network interfaces, while other slots have a network
interface from the DS3 multiplexer.
The DS3 multiplexers can be configured as simplex or redundant, with protection for
the electronics, not the coaxial cable. If redundant, two units are installed. If not, a
single DS3 multiplexer may be installed in either of the two multiplexer slots.
Regardless of whether one or two are used, the BNC I/0 Module (P/N 1181004L1) is
required to derive the physical DSX-3 network interface.
The DS3 multiplexer is used when a number of DS1 interfaces are delivered from one
location to a Total Access 3000/3010 system. Typically, this DS3 interface will be
delivered to the Total Access 3000/3010 system from either a DCS or SONET
multiplexer. With a DS3 multiplexer installed, the system still accepts DSX-1 network
interfaces to the access modules, so a locally-derived DS1 network interface can be
delivered directly to the system and does not need to be sent over the high-speed
multiplexer. Figure 1 below illustrates the use of a DS3 MUX in a SONET Ring
application.
SONET Ring
DS3
SONET
MUX
SONET
MUX
DS3
H
T
U
C
S D D
C S S
U 3 3
HST
H
T
U
C
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 1. SONET Ring to Total Access 3000/3010
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP340-1E

APP-340
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP341-1E

APP-341
Page 1 of 2
1.1
STS-1 Multiplexer Applications

NOTE
1.1.1
Usage
The STS-1 multiplexer for Total Access converts the system into one that can accept a
single STS-1 network interface. A system with a STS-1 multiplexer can accept STS-1
and DSX-1 network interfaces, where the DSX-1 network interfaces are provided
directly to the access modules. The STS-1 multiplexer incorporates time slot
assignment to deliver any VT 1.5 (or VT 6) in the STS-1 to any slot in the system.
This allows for certain slots to have DSX-1 network interfaces, other slots to have a
network interface from the STS-1 multiplexer and no necessary loss of DS1s in the
STS-1 because certain slots have DSX-1 network interfaces.
The STS-1 multiplexers can be configured as simplex or redundant, with protection for
the electronics, not the coaxial cable. If redundant, two units are installed. If not, a
single STS-1 multiplexer may be installed in either of the two multiplexer slots.
Regardless of whether one or two are used, the BNC I/O Module (P/N 1181004L1) is
required to derive the physical STS-1 network interface.
The STS-1 multiplexer is used when a number of VT 1.5s are delivered from one
location to a Total Access 3000/3010 System via a SONET signal. Typically, this
STS-1 interface will be delivered to the Total Access 3000/3010 System from either a
DCS or SONET multiplexer. With a STS-1 multiplexer installed, the system still
accepts DSX-1 network interfaces to the access modules, so a locally-derived DS1
network interface can be delivered directly to the system and does not need to be sent
over the high-speed multiplexer. Figure 1 below illustrates the use of an STS-1 MUX
in a SONET Ring application.
SONET Ring
STS-1
SONET
MUX
SONET
MUX
STS-1
H
T
U
C
S S S
C T T
U S S
1 1
HST
H
T
U
C
C
R
A
F
T

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP341-1E

APP-341
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP342-1E

APP-342
Page 1 of 2
1.1
OC-3 Multiplexer Applications

NOTE
1.1.2
Usage
The OC-3 (L1) multiplexer for Total Access 3000/3010 transforms the system into a
SONET network element able to interface with industry standard SONET equipment.
The OC-3 module is a terminal mode SONET interface and therefore deploys as a
termination device subtending from a SONET ring. The first STS-1 within the OC-3
is terminated on the shelf. The unit multiplexes and demultiplexes the signal into 28
DS1s. It provides full time slot assignment capabilities, allowing any payload DS1 to
be routed to any slot in the system.
The OC-3 module is capable of operating in a single or fully redundant configuration.
Full redundancy is achieved by configuring the modules in a protection switching
mode in which the on-line mux would transfer the payload to the off-line, or protect,
mux upon the detection of a fault condition. In normal operation, both modules receive
concurrent payloads from the network, while only the on-line module transmits to the
network. The linked provisioning option of the OC-3 module ensures that both
modules constantly have identical provisioning settings in the event of a protection
switch to the off-line module.
The OC-3 module interfaces to the SONET 192 KBps Data Communications Channel
(DCC) for communication to network management or operation support systems
(OSS). This interface allows network operations personnel to provision, monitor, and
maintain the system from a remote management center.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPP342-1E

APP-342
Page 2 of 2
The OC-3 multiplexer is used when a number of DS1 interfaces, packaged into an
STS-1, are delivered from one location to a Total Access 3000/3010 System.
Typically, this OC-3 interface will be delivered to the Total Access 3000/3010 System
from a SONET multiplexer. With an OC-3 multiplexer installed, the system still
accepts DSX-1 network interfaces to the access modules, so a locally-derived DS1
network interface can be delivered directly to the system and does not need to be sent
over the high-speed multiplexer. Figure 1 below illustrates the use of an OC-3 MUX
in a SONET Ring application.
SONET Ring
OC-3
SONET
MUX
SONET
MUX
OC-3
1310 nm
Single-mode
Fiber
H
T
U
C
S O O
C C C
U 3 3
HST
H
T
U
C
C
R
A
F
T
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP000-1E

SECTION 4
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Site Preparation

Then Go To:
Preparing for Shelf Installation in a Central Office
PREP-401
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP000-1E

SECTION 4
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 1 of 10
1.1
Preparing for Shelf Installation in a Central Office (CO),

Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU), or Remote Terminal (RT)
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This document provides details of how a CO, MTU, or RT should be prepared to
accept the installation of one or more Total Access 3000/3010 shelves. Shelves that
will be installed in the same bay or in adjacent bays should be engineered together so
that they can share common feeds for power, timing and management interfaces as
appropriate for the application.
1.1.2
Prerequisite Procedures
Before beginning the site preparations described below, the Site Engineer should
review the Engineering Guidelines and Application Guides to determine which system
applications each shelf will be wired to perform. Based upon application, the Site
Engineer should specify how the bay holding the shelves should fit into the NEBS
lineup for CO applications. The same type of considerations should be made for RT
and MTU applications. These considerations include which power, transmission, and
clock connections will be required for each shelf.
1.2
Space Considerations
1.2.1
Fitting the Shelf into NEBS Lineups

The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is designed to flush-mount or mid-mount in any
standard 23-inch/19-inch network bay or unequal flange relay rack. Since the shelf
meets the 12-inch NEBS depth profile, it may be mounted in any 12-inch, 18-inch or
24-inch network lineup. Full cable routing support is provided for power and
transmission cables in both flush-mount and mid-mount configurations.
1.2.1.1 Vertical Space Requirements

Each shelf occupies 6 inches of vertical space in the rack. The heat baffle/
fiber routing tray occupies an additional 4 inches of vertical rack space. In a
typical application, several shelves may be stacked with a heat baffle
separating them. This arrangement results in each shelf and associated baffle
occupying 10 inches of vertical space. An additional heat baffle is
recommended to act as the cool-air intake on the bottom shelf in a stack.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 2 of 10
Adding 4 inches for this bottom heat baffle yields the following equation for
the total vertical space needed for N shelves:
Vertical Space in Inches = (10" x N) + 4"
So, for example, a stack of three shelves would occupy 34 inches of vertical
space and consist of three shelves and four heat baffles.
1.2.1.2 Use of Horizontal Spacers in a NEBS Lineup

In the case that four or more Total Access 3000/3010 shelves are to be
installed in the same bay, you should add 5-inch horizontal aisle spacers on
both sides of the bay to accommodate the high wire density of the shelves
and to allow additional ventilation space for any high-power applications
which might be deployed in the shelves.
1.2.2
Fitting the Shelf into MTU and RT Applications

For individual shelf applications, the Total Access 3000/3010 occupies 6 inches of
rack space. When the shelf is being used as a DSLAM, it is recommended that it be
used in conjunction with the heat baffle and fans. This adds 4 inches of rack space. All
applications should be implemented where there is adequate heat dissipation and
available power.
1.3
Electrical Considerations
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf supports either single-feed or dual-feed -48 Vdc
power inputs. The use of single or dual feeds should be specified by the Site Engineer
and power wiring should be run accordingly.
1.3.1
Power Wiring and Fusing

-48 V and -48 V return connections should be provided from the fuse panel using
insulated 10 AWG wire for 20 Amp fuses; 12 AWG wire should be used for 10 or 15
Amp fuses. A separate wire should be run from the fuse panel for each -48 V input and
for each -48 V return. Power wire with red insulation is recommended for the -48 V
feeds and power wire with black insulation is recommended for the -48 V return feeds.
If a shelf is to be equipped with a fan unit, then separate -48V and -48V return wiring
is required for the fan unit. 18 AWG power wire should be run from the fuse panel to
the fan unit, following the same color scheme that was used to wire the shelf. If the
shelf is wired for dual-feed power, then the fan unit should also be dual-feed powered
from the same two supply sources.
Each shelf should be furnished with a separate 20 Amp fuse on each power feed. The
fan unit should be furnished with a separate 1 Amp fuse on each power feed.
1.3.2
Frame Ground
Each Total Access 3000/3010 shelf requires a connection to frame ground using 6
AWG ground wire. A separate grounding wire from the bay itself or from the bays
grounding bar should be provided for grounding each shelf. Wire with green insulation
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 3 of 10
is recommended for frame ground connections so that frame grounds can be easily
distinguished from other power connections.
Each fan unit also requires a connection to frame ground. 16 or 18 AWG ground wire
following the same color scheme as the shelf should be used. The fan units should be
connected to frame ground using the same method as the shelves.
1.4
Timing Considerations
Different applications of the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf may have differing timing
requirements. To determine which of the clock inputs are required, consult the
Application Guide for your particular application or refer to the shelf installation
diagram if one has already been prepared.
1.4.1
Composite Clock
If a composite clock input is required, a wire run from the clock source to the bay must
be provided. Use a 22 AWG or 24 AWG shielded two-wire cable with drain (such as
AT&T P7 wire) for this run. Up to eight shelves may be daisy chained to a single
output from the timing source, so only one wire run from the timing source is required
for an installation of eight or fewer shelves. The clock wire should be routed to the
anticipated location of the first shelf in a multi-shelf installation. Inter-shelf clock
wiring is performed during the shelf installation procedure.
1.4.2
T1 Clock
If a T1 Clock input is required, a wire run from the clock source to the bay must be
provided. Use a 22 AWG or 24 AWG shielded two-wire cable with drain (such as
AT&T P7 wire) for this run.
1.4.3
Stratum 3E Clock
In a DSLAM configuration, a Total Access 3000/3010 Stratum 3E Clock module can
be used to provide an accurate, uninterrupted clock to the system if the external clock
source, typically a DS1 BITS clock, is lost. This functionality is known as Stratum 3E
Holdover. The module has a double-wide faceplate and must be plugged into slot 1.
No additional wiring is necessary.
1.5
DSX Considerations
Depending on the system application, each shelf may require connections to the
DSX-1 cross connect and/or the DSX-3 cross connect.
1.5.1
DSX-1
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf may be wired to a DSX-1 cross connect in two
different ways depending on the system application. The number of DSX-1 cross
connect positions per access module is dependent upon the particular access card.
Applications in which access modules will be fed strictly from a high-speed MUX in
the shelf may not require DSX-1 wiring. Use Table 1 to determine how many DSX-1
cross connect positions to reserve for each shelf.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 4 of 10
Table 1. DSX-1 Connections
Total Access Platform
TDM Application
DSX-1 Cross-Connect Positions

Total Access 3000
Total Access 3010
Standard DSX-Fed (APP-301)
56
44
HDSL/T1 DSX-Fed (APP-302)
28
22
DSL Mode DSX-Fed (APP-305)
28
22
QFO-C only DSX-Fed (APP-306)
56
44
Standard Combo-Fed (APP-307)
56
44
HDSL/T1 only Combo-Fed (APP-308)
28
22
DSL Mode Combo-Fed (APP-309)
28
22
The actual wiring scheme for connecting the shelf to the DSX-1 cross connect is given
in the Application Guide for each of the above applications.
To connect the shelf to a standard DSX-1 cross connect, use 24 AWG, 28-pair/22-pair
twisted, shielded transmission cables with 64-pin/50-pin female connectors on the
shelf end. Two such cables are required for each group of 28/22 connections to the
cross connect.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 5 of 10
Custom cables designed for this application may be ordered to length through
Telephone Services, Inc. (TSI) of Florida. These cables have the shield connected to
pin-64/pin-50 of the connector. Since the shelf provides a ground connection on
pin-64/pin-50 of each pair connector, simply plugging these cables into the shelf
provides proper grounding of the cable shield. TSI Part Numbers for these cables are
listed in Table 2.
Table 2. TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for DSX-1 Applications
Amphenol Requirement
TSI Model Number
Total Access 3000

Connecting to a standard wire wrap DSX-1
CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
Connecting to a 64-pin connectorized DSX-1
CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1
Total Access 3010

Connecting to a standard wire wrap DSX-1
CA4-xxxx-102-T00-2
Connecting to a 50-pin connectorized DSX-1
CA4-xxxx-104-T00-2
Where xxxx represents the length of the cable in feet. For example, a 160-foot standard cable for wire
wrapping to the DSX-1 cross connect would be CA4-0160-D12-000-1.
All connections to the Total Access 3000/3010 64-pin Amp connectors shall meet the
following minimum characteristics:
Solid copper tinned wire.
Shielded cable with drain wire. Drain wire should be connected to pin 64, unless
this arrangement is pre-empted by customer specification.
Color coding to conform to industry standard blue/white through slate-violet coding
for pairs 1 through 25 with separate binder groups for pairs 1-25 and 26 through 28
or 32.
24 AWG or 22 AWG; 24 AWG preferred
28 or 32 pair; 28 pair preferred
100 Ohm nominal characteristic impedance; 15%
Mutual capacitance of 15.72 pF/ft nominal; 17.3 pF/ft absolute maximum.
Attenuation for DS1 signal @ 0.772 MHz (1.544 Mb/s) nominally 12.3 dB/1000 ft.
Worst pair PSNEXT 53 dB @ 150 kHz, 42 dB @ 772 kHz, 38 dB @ 1600 kHz, or
better, for test cable length of 1000 feet
Cables conform to:
GR-499-DSX-1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet
TIA/EIA 464B DSX-1 Pulse Wave Shape Compliance at 500 feet
UL-c (UL) Type CMR/CMG
Jacket and insulation material to conform to existing industry standards, and to any
applicable customer specifications
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 6 of 10
1.5.2
DSX-3
If a shelf is to be equipped with a standard DS3, STS-1, or DS3 Cell Switch Module, a
single position on the DSX-3 cross connect should be reserved for the shelf. Two runs
of coax cable should be routed from a position on the DSX-3 cross connect to the
anticipated location of the shelf and terminated with standard BNC connectors on the
shelf end. The cables should be labeled IN and OUT at the shelf end to indicate where
they are connected on the DSX-3 cross connect. Either standard 734 or 735 type coax
cable is recommended depending on the cable run length listed in Table 3.
Table 3. TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for DSX-1 Applications
Coax Cable Type
734
735
Use for Run Lengths Up To

450 Feet
150 Feet
Cables designed for this application may be ordered to length through Telephone
Services, Inc. (TSI) of Florida. For connecting the shelf to a standard DSX-3 cross
connect, the following TSI Part Numbers may be used:
734 Coax Cable with BNC connectors on both ends:
CA1-xxxx-X44-734-1
734 Coax Cable with BNC connector on one end only:
CA1-xxxx-X41-734-1
735 Coax Cable with BNC connectors on both ends:
CA1-xxxx-X34-735-1
735 Coax Cable with BCN connector on one end only:
CA1-xxxx-X31-735-1
where xxxx represents the length of the cable in feet.

All coaxial cable for Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 and STS-1 signals shall meet the
following minimum specifications:
The coaxial cable shall have characteristic impedance of 75 Ohm.
Nominal mutual capacitance shall not exceed 20.4 pF/foot
The cable shall conform to ANSI standard T1-102 (1993) pulse mask definition.
The standard reference cable is WECO Type 728A at 450 feet.
Approved cable types include:
WECO 728A
Lucent 728B
Lucent 734A
Belden 9231
Belden 1809A
Lucent type 735A cable may be used up to a maximum length of 250 feet.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 7 of 10
1.6
Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Considerations

Most central office applications of Total Access 3000/3010 require the shelf to be
connected to the side of the MDF to provide loop-side cross connects to customer
loops. The exact wiring requirements for MDF connections are determined by the
specific system application of each shelf. RT and MDU/MTU applications require
similar wiring for cable runs.
1.6.1
Wiring Connections to the MDF

To connect the shelf to a standard MDF Terminal Block, use 24 AWG, 28-pair/22-pair
twisted, shielded transmission cables with 64-pin/50-pin female connectors on the
shelf end. The number of cables required is determined by the system application
(see Table 4 for wiring details).
Table 4. MDF Wiring Requirements

Total Access Platform
MDF Information
TDM Application
Terminal
Block Type
Number of
MDF Cables
Standard DSX-Fed (APP-301)
4-Connector
HDSL/HDSL2/T1 Only DSX-Fed (APP-302)
4-Connector
Standard MUX-Fed (APP-303)
6-Connector
HDSL/HDSL2/T1 Only MUX-Fed (APP-304)
4-Connector
DSL Mode DSX-Fed (APP-305)
6-Connector
None
4-Connector
HDSL/HDSL2/T1 Only Combo-Fed (APP-308) 4-Connector
DSL-Mode Combo-Fed (APP-309)
QFO-C Only (APP-306)

Standard Combo-Fed (APP-307)
6-Connector
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 8 of 10
Custom cables designed for this application may be ordered to length through
Telephone Services, Inc. (TSI) of Florida. These cables have the shield connected to
pin-64/pin-50 of the connector. Since the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf provides a
ground connection on pin-64/pin-50 of each pair connector, simply plugging these
cables into the shelf provides proper grounding of the cable shield. TSI Part Numbers
for these cables are listed in Table 5.
Table 5. TSI Amphenol Cable Model Number for MDF Connections
Data Cable Requirement
TSI Model Number
Total Access 3000

Connecting to a standard wire wrap terminal block
CA4-xxxx-D12-000-1
Connecting to a 64-pin connectorized terminal block
CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1
Total Access 3010

Connecting to a standard wire wrap terminal block
CA4-xxxx-102-T00-2
Connecting to a 50-pin connectorized terminal block
CA4-xxxx-104-T00-2
Where xxxx represents the length of the cable in feet. For example, a 210-foot standard cable for wiring to a connectorized
terminal block would be CA4-0210-D13-000-1.
1.6.2 Horizontal-side Terminal Blocks

As shown in the Application Guides of this system manual, each Total Access 3000/
3010 shelf wires out to its own terminal block on the side of the MDF. A separate
terminal block location on the side of the MDF should be reserved for each shelf to be
installed.
Telzon terminal blocks custom designed for use with the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf
are available from Thomas & Betts. These terminal blocks are wired and labeled to
match the diagrams given in the Application Guides and fit any standard MDF
universal mounting. These terminal blocks are connectorized for easy installation and
may be used with the TSI cable listed above (CA4-xxxx-D13-000-1).
The type of terminal block and number of cables needed for each system application is
given in Table 5.
Telzon part numbers for these terminal blocks are:
4-Connector Standard Block (6 inches deep):
408-1064-301
4-Connector Compact Block (4.75 inches deep):
408-1064-341
6-Connector Standard Block (6 inches deep):
448-1066-301
The terminal block for each shelf should be mounted on the MDF and the MDF cables
should be attached as shown in the Application Guide section of this system manual.
The other end of the cable should be routed to the anticipated location of the shelf and
labeled to indicate the terminal block location and which connector is attached at the
other end (A, B, C, etc.).
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 9 of 10
1.7
Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF) Considerations

If a Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is to be used in a fiber-based application, then
provisions for connecting the shelf to the FDF or other fiber patch panel must be made.
A single IN/OUT position on the FDF should be reserved for each card in the system
that will support a fiber interface.
1.7.1
Vertical Fiber Routing in the Bay

The Total Access 3000/3010 Heat Baffle is designed to allow fiber routing out either
the front or rear of the shelf in mid-mount configurations and to allow fiber routing out
the rear of the shelf in flush-mount configurations. Provisions should be made to route
fiber safely up the vertical run in the bay itself and to allow the fiber to enter the
overhead fiber routing trays. Vertical fiber routing should be designed to maintain the
minimum bend radius of the fiber and to conform to the fiber routing scheme already
in use in the CO.
1.7.2
Capacity Planning
Capacity planning for vertical routing of fiber should be performed to ensure that the
vertical routing fiber guides are large enough to support all of the fiber patch cords to
be routed to the shelves. The total number of cards in the shelves that use fiber should
be calculated and multiplied by two in order to determine the number of fibers that
need to be supported.
Planning for worst-case growth can be performed by assuming 60/48 fibers per shelf
(two for each MUX module slot plus two for each access module slot). Applications
with fiber counts this high are extremely rare. In most cases the use of a 2-inch by
2-inch vertical fiber guide will provide adequate growth space, allowing around 200
fibers to be routed down into an individual bay.
1.7.3
Followup Procedures
Once the Central Office preparations described in this procedure are complete, you
should be ready to perform the actual installation of the Total Access 3000/3010
shelves as described in NTP-501.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAPRP401-1E

PREP-401
Page 10 of 10
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP000-1E

SECTION 5
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Installation and Turnup Procedures

Then Turn To:
23"/19" Shelf Installation in a Central Office (CO), Multi-Tenant

Unit (MTU) or Remote Terminal (RT)
NTP-501
Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 MUX Installation in a Central Office Shelf
NTP-504
Total Access 3000/3010 STS MUX Installation in a Central Office Shelf
NTP-505
Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 MUX Installation in a Central Office Shelf
NTP-506
SCU Replacement in a Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf
NTP-507
HDSL HLSS Circuit Configuration and Turnup for DSX-Fed Systems
NTP-513
HDSL HLSS Circuit Configuration and Turnup for DS3-Fed Systems
NTP-514
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP000-1E

SECTION 5
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN,
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 1 of 22
1.1
23"/19" Shelf Installation in a Central Office (CO),

Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) or Remote Terminal (RT)
1.1.1
Introduction
This section provides step-by-step instructions for the installation of one or more Total
Access 3000 or Total Access 3010 (Total Access 3000/3010) shelves in a Central
Office (CO). Installation procedures include the removal of the Total Access 3000/
3010 shelves from shipping containers, mounting shelves in a CO rack, power up, all
necessary data and administrative connections, and turnup. Acceptance testing is
provided in section 6, (Acceptance Test Procedure, ATP-601) of this system manual.
NOTE
1.1.2
Before beginning the installation described in this NTP, the installer should thoroughly
review the document Preparing for Shelf Installation PREP-401, in section 4 (Site
Preparation) of this systems manual. Based on PREP-401, the installer will know
which steps of this NTP will be required for the intended use of the Total Access 3000/
3010 shelf.
To comply with UL1950 requirements, the following steps must be adhered to:
Connect to a reliably grounded -48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from
the AC source.
A readily accessible disconnect device, that is suitably approved and rated, shall be
incorporated in the fixed wiring.
The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated
-48 VDC minimum, 30A maximum.
This product is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only.
This unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.
Instructions stating the proper methods for grounding shall be included within the
guidelines of the installation practice.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 2 of 22
1.1.3
Tools Required
The tools required for installation of the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf are:
1.1.4
Wire-wrap tool
#2 Phillips-head screwdriver
Straight-slot screwdriver
Multimeter
Crimping tool for power lugs
Wire strippers
Side cutters
3/16-inch wrench
Materials Required
-48 VDC, up to 20 Amp power source for the Total Access 3000/3010, such as a
rack mounted fuse and alarm panel, or power board. See Table 1.
Table 1. Recommended Wire Gauge and Fuse Sizes
Current Draw at -48 VDC
Recommended Wire Gauge
Recommended Fuse Size
2.6 to 5.8 Amps
12 AWG
10 Amps
5.8 to 8 Amps
12 AWG
15 Amps
8 to 15 Amps
10 AWG
20 Amps
Data cables terminated in 64-pin/50-pin Amp connectors that reach from the
overhead cable tray or power board to the level of the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf. These cables should be of sufficient length to reach from the Total Access
3000/3010 location in the CO to the DSX cross connect panel for network input,
and from the shelf to the MDF for customer loops.
Four 12-24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000/3010 shelf to the CO or
MTU rack or the RT cabinet.
Four 12-24 screws for mounting each Total Access 3000/3010 Heat Baffle to the
CO or MTU rack or the RT cabinet.
Shielded 2-wire, twisted pair cross-connect wire with drain, such as AT&T P7
wire.
Insulated 10-12 gauge wire and lugs for power connections, in colors dictated by
your CO, for the battery feed and return to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
Insulated 6 gauge wire and lugs for frame ground.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 3 of 22
Data cables terminated at the Total Access 3000/3010-side in 64-pin/50-pin Amp

connectors, and at the other end in either stubs or 64-pin/50-pin Amp connectors,
depending on the mechanics of MDF and DSX cross connect panels.
Coaxial cable appropriate for DS3 network input to the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf, if a DS3 input is to be used.
WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or
during a lightning storm.
CAUTION
Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before
handling modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage
to electronic components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when
transporting or storing. When working on modules, always place them on an
approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.
1.2
Unpack and Inspect the Shelf

Each Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton
unless it was ordered as a fully racked system. Open each carton carefully and avoid
deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects. After pulling the shelf out of the
carton, remove the foam endcaps and slip the shelf out of the cardboard shipping
sleeve and protective plastic bag.
After unpacking the unit, inspect it for damage. If the equipment has been damaged in
transit, file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service. (See
APX 901, Warranty and Customer Service.)
1.3
1.3.1
Mount Shelves, Heat Baffles and Fans

Mounting Bracket Orientation
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf comes with mounting brackets that can be mounted
with the flanges facing forward or backward in two different locations on the shelf
sides. Therefore, the rack can be flush-mounted or mid-mounted.
Attaching the mounting brackets to the shelf requires four screws on each side, and are
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 4 of 22
Attaching the mounting brackets to the shelf requires four screws on each side, and are
supplied with the unit.
1. Flush-mounting: For flush-mounting on the rack, use a #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver and attach the mounting brackets with the flanges facing rearward on
the rear mounting holes.
2. Mid-mounting: For mid-mounting, use a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver and attach
the mounting brackets with the flanges facing forward on the front mounting holes.
1.3.2
Install Shelves
After attaching the mounting brackets to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf sides, use
the appropriate screws for your CO rack type and mount the shelf in the rack.
1. Flush-mount: For flush-mount systems, the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf must be
mounted from the rear of the rack, with mounting bracket flanges facing rearward.
2. Mid-mount: For mid-mount systems, the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf must be
mounted from the front of the rack, with the mounting bracket flanges facing
forward.
3. Other orientations: Other orientations will require either mounting from the front
or rear, and depend on the rack type installed in the CO or MTU and the standard
operating procedures established by your CO or MTU location.
4. Using four screws appropriate for your CO or MTU rack or RT cabinet and an
appropriate screwdriver, secure the Total Access 3000/3010 shelves in place on
the rack.
1.3.3
Install Heat Baffles and Fiber Trays

The Total Access Heat Baffle functions as both a heat baffle and fiber routing tray. As
a heat baffle, it channels heated air to the back and away from equipment operating
above a Total Access 3000/3010 system. As a fiber routing tray, it provides channels
and guides to properly route fiber optic cables delivered to multiplexer and access slots
of a system. The front panel is removable for routing fiber optic cables. To protect
installed fiber optic cables, the panel should remain installed when access is not
required. Fiber optic cable may be routed to the sides of the unit or to the rear of the
unit
The heat baffle has mounting brackets similar to those on the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf and should be mounted in the same orientation as the mounting brackets for the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf. Using the two screws provided and a #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver, position and attach the mounting brackets on the Total Access 3000/3010
Heat Baffle matching the shelf, and flush or mid-mount to conform to the shelf
mounting. Use the same screwdriver and four more screws appropriate to the CO rack
to secure the Heat Baffle into place immediately above the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf it is intended to serve.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 5 of 22
1.3.4
Install Fans
The fan assembly is designed to mount on the rear of the heat baffle. Together they
provide forced air ventilation for the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf. The heat-baffled
fan assembly is designed to cool only one chassis at a time.
The fan is designed to mount directly above a Total Access 3000/3010 shelf. Since the
unit is an integral component of the Total Access 3000/3010 System, the assembly
allows provisions to facilitate fiber optic cable routing in the front tray.
The fan assembly accommodates two power inputs, each input consisting of a -48
VDC feed and a battery return feed. The power inputs are on 0.375 inch centers. A
frame ground terminal is also provided on the rear of the assembly. The unit operates
with either or both inputs active. In the event of a fan failure, the unit provides for an
alarm indication by closing a relay contact. The unit is designed to tolerate one fan
failure and still provide adequate cooling.
Six flat head screws are provided with the fan assembly. Use the screws and a #1
Phillips screwdriver to attach the fan assembly to the back of the heat baffle and fiber
tray. Cable ties are provided for strain relief and wiring management of incoming
power, return, frame ground, and alarming to the System Controller Unit. Cable tie
holders are built into the fan assembly to accept the cable ties provided.
For the install to be UL 1950 certified, ADTRAN requires that the following
installation guidelines be followed:
The fan assembly is intended for installation in Restricted Access Locations Only.
The fan assembly shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC
NFPA 70.
Remove the protective cover from the terminal block by squeezing the black plastic
clips on each end of the terminal block and pulling the cover off. Make the proper
power, return, frame ground, and alarm connections to the terminal block. Route the
wires using the wire ties provided, ensuring that the wires do not interfere with the
operation of the fans. Replace the protective terminal block cover to avoid inadvertent
electrical shock.
To be UL 1950 certified, ADTRAN requires that the following connection guidelines
be followed:
The fan assembly must be connected to a reliably grounded -48 VDC source which
is electrically isolated from the AC source.
The frame ground stud located on the fan plate must be connected to a reliable
frame ground source.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated must be
incorporated into the fixed wiring (e.g. Fuse and Alarm Panel).
The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated
-48 VDC 1A.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 6 of 22
1.3.5
Mount Vertical Fiber Guides

If the Total Access 3000/3010 is to be used with the QFO-C Fiber Optic Transport
Module, your CO may dictate the use of fiber optic cable guides. These guides are
typically mounted on the frame; follow the manufacturers instructions for use with the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
1.4 Connect Power and Ground

Dual power buses are provided with separate battery returns. Power connections use
two separate opposing blocks, labeled TS1 and TS2, located on the lower left side of
the backplane underneath the Pair 6/Pair 5 AMP connector. The terminals are on .4375
inch centers and allow for wire gauges of up to 10 AWG. There is a separate Frame
Ground terminal, labeled FR GND, located on the bottom left corner of the backplane,
and can accommodate up to 6 AWG wire. The two power inputs, TS1 and TS2, are
identical in function and can be used for redundant power configurations. The frame
ground terminal routes to mechanical contact points on the shelf and provides an
electrical connection to the shelf metalwork.
1.4.1
Connect Shelf to Frame Ground

The frame ground lug, located on the lower left corner of the backplane, can
accommodate from 6 to 10 AWG wire. When connecting the frame ground, use 6
AWG wire. To connect the ground to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf:
1. Using an appropriate crimping tool and lug, fasten the lug to the ground wire.
2. Locate a nearby grounding screw on the equipment rack.
3. Secure the ground wire to frame ground using the lugged end of the grounding
wire.
4. Cut the ground wire length to reach from the grounding lug on the rack to the
Total Access 3000/3010 grounding terminal, located on the lower left corner of the
backplane. Leave enough slack to allow for tying to the rack, if required.
5. Using wire strippers, strip 5/8 inches of insulation from the grounding wire. Apply
an approved antioxidant compound to the exposed wire.
6. Insert stripped end of the ground wire into the copper Total Access 3000/3010
grounding terminal.
7. Tighten the ground connection securely with a straight-slot-screwdriver.
1.4.2
Connect Fan Module to Frame Ground

The Total Access 3000/3010 Fan Module has a frame ground wire internal to the fan
unit. When the fan module is properly mounted to a correctly installed heat baffle, the
fan module is automatically connected to the frame ground.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 7 of 22
1.4.3
Test Frame Ground Connection

To ensure a good ground, use a multimeter to check continuity between the frame
grounding lug and the rack grounding strap at the top of the rack. Using a voltmeter set
to its lowest resistance range, if applicable, place one lead on the racks ground strap
and the other lead on the Total Access 3000/3010 frame ground terminal. The reading
should be 1 or 2 ohms. Greater readings should be investigated. Repeat the process for
the Fan Module, using the racks grounding strap and bare metal on the Fan Module
chassis, such as the mounting screws. Readings should be in the 1 to 2 ohm range.
Greater readings should be investigated.
1.4.4
Connect Power and Return to Shelves

After connecting and checking the ground to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf,
connect power to the shelf. Check to make sure your power source is providing the
correct power and polarity to the shelf. To connect power and return to the shelf:
1. Determine which fuse/circuit breaker pairs are to supply power and return to the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
2. Remove the fuses/turn off circuit breakers from the A and B slots for the pair
determined in the above step.
3. Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the Plexiglass cover to the power
terminals. The power terminals are labeled TS1 and TS2.
4. Cut four lengths of AWG 10-12 wire to reach from the terminals on the fuse and
alarm panel to the power terminals on the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf. Be sure
to include enough length to allow for tying the wire neatly to the frame as
specified by CO SOP. Wire color should differentiate between -48 VDC supply
and return, according to CO SOP. (For power wire gauge, see Table 1 on page 2.)
5. Using the crimping tool, connect an appropriate lug to each end of the wires.
6. Using a screwdriver appropriate for the fuse and alarm panel terminals, and a
straight-slot screwdriver for the Total Access 3000/3010 power terminal, connect
the ends of one wire between the A CO -48 VDC supply and the
-48 VDC PRI terminal on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane.
7. Connect three more power wires, connecting the A CO -48 V return with TS1
-48 VDC RET; B CO -48 VDC supply with TS2 -48 VDC SEC; and B CO
-48 VDC return with TS2 -48 VDC RET.
1.4.5
Connect Power to Fan Units

The Total Access 3000/3010 Fan Module is powered by dual independent
-48 VDC / 1 Amp power supplies from the CO. The Fan Module comes with a one
amp fuse mounted on the fan frame, and draws less than 200 milliamps.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 8 of 22
To connect power to a Fan Module:
1. Determine which pair of fuses/circuit breakers are to supply power to the fan
module.
2. Remove the fuses/turn off circuit breakers from the A and B slots in the fuse and
alarm panel for the pair determined in step 1.
3. Cut four lengths of 16 or 18 gauge wire to reach from the terminals on the fuse and
alarm panel to the power terminal strip on the Fan Module. Be sure to include
enough length to allow for tying the wire neatly to the frame as specified by CO
SOP. Wire color should differentiate between -48 VDC supply and return,
according to CO SOP.
4. Using a crimping tool, connect an appropriate lug to each end of the four wires.
5. Using a screwdriver appropriate for the fuse and alarm panel terminals and a #1
Phillips head screwdriver for the Fan Module terminals, connect the -48 VDC A
CO supply to the -48 VDC A fan module terminal. Connect the -48 VDC A CO
return to the -48 VDC RET A fan module terminal. Connect the -48 VDC B CO
supply to the -48 VDC B fan module terminal. Connect the -48 VDC B CO return
to the -48 VDC RET B fan nodule terminal.
6. Install fan filter.
1.4.6
Apply Power and Check Voltage, Remove Power

Before proceeding further, ensure that power has been correctly applied to the shelf.
The proper voltage to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and fan unit is -48 VDC, with
an operating range of -42 VDC to -56 VDC.
CAUTION
Installing fuses in the fuse alarm panel at this stage will provide power to the
shelf and fans. All three fans on the fan module will begin to rotate and there
will be power to pins on the backplane and inside the shelf. Exercise caution
to avoid electric shock.
1. Install 20 Amp fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that service the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf or turn on the 20 Amp circuit breaker that powers the
shelf.
2. Using a voltmeter, place the common (normally black) lead on the TS1 -48 VDC
RET terminal and the DC volts (normally red) lead on the TS1 -48 VDC PRI
terminal. The reading should be in the operating range of -42 VDC to -56 VDC,
with a nominal value of -48 VDC. Note the - polarity.
3. Using a voltmeter, repeat step 2, using the TS2 -48 VDC RET terminal and the
TS2 -48 VDC SEC terminal.
4. Remove the fuses/turn off circuit breakers from the fuse and alarm panel slots
powering the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 9 of 22
5. Install 1 Amp fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that power the fan
module.
6. Using a voltmeter, place the common (normally black) lead on the fan module
-48 VDC RET A terminal and the DC volts (normally red) lead on the fan module
-48 VDC A terminal. The reading should be in the operating range of -42Vdc to
56Vdc, with a nominal value of -48 VDC. Note the - polarity.
7. Using a voltmeter, repeat step 6 using the -48 VDC RET B and -48 VDC B
terminals.
8. Remove the fuses/turn off the circuit breakers from the fuse and alarm panel slots
powering the fan module.
9. Use a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver to replace the protective guard over the power
terminals. (It was removed in 1.4.4 step 3.)
1.5
Remove Rear Plastic Guard

The large rear Plexiglass guard covering the backplane is a safety feature of the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf designed to keep personnel and equipment from contacting
potentially high voltage exposed at some backplane locations. Following the sequence
of steps outlined in this NTP will allow the service provider to remove the guard once,
make all the necessary Total Access 3000/3010 backplane connections, and then
reinstall the guard.
For details, go to: DLP-701.
NOTE
Wire tie anchors are pre-installed on the backplane 64-pin/50-pin Amp
connectors cable ends. It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors
while the backplane guard is removed. ADTRAN recommends using the wire
ties to secure the 64-pin/50-pin Amp connectors in place. Thread the wire ties
through the anchors while the rear plastic guard is off.
1.6
Wire Clocks
Total Access 3000/3010 accepts either T1 or composite clock inputs from an external
timing source. See the Application Guide section of this system manual for your
particular application to determine whether this step is appropriate for your intended
Total Access 3000/3010 application. As an office repeater bay deploying HDSL or
T1, no clock input is required. As an office repeater bay deploying ISDN, a composite
clock input is required.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 10 of 22
1.6.1
Connect T1 Clock
An optional external T1 clock input may be installed when using SONET multiplexers.
1.7
Wire Test Access

A six-lead (T, R, and drain, T1, R1, and drain) common test access bus is provided for
metallic test access to all customer loops and is labeled LOOP TEST ACCESS, P13/
P23, on the backplane. An additional test access bus labeled DSX-1 TEST ACCESS,
P23/P22, allows for digital loop testing. If the Total Access 3000/3010 being installed
will use these testing features, wiring will be required to gain access to the test leads.
1.7.1
Connect MLT
Metallic loop test access is gained by wiring into the connector labeled LOOP TEST
ACCESS, P13/P23, on the left side of the backplane.
1.7.2
Connect DLT
Digital or logical loop test access is gained by wiring into the connector labeled
DSX-1 TEST ACCESS, P23/P22, on the right side of the backplane.
1.8
Connect Loops to DSX-1

Total Access 3000/3010 receives its DSX-1 feed from the DSX-1 cross connect panel
in the central office. For HDSL, ISDN and T1 deployment, Total Access 3000/3010
accepts 28/22 DSX-1s from the central office via two 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors
to the backplane on Pairs 7 and 8. For full deployment of Optical DS2, 56/44 DSX-1s
are needed, and are received on four 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors on Pairs 5, 6, 7,
and 8. The female AMP connectors plug into the rear of the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf on the appropriate male pair connectors. This system manual contains a full
description of the different loop assignments and pinouts for all the services currently
deployed from Total Access 3000/3010.
1.9
Connect Loops to MDF

The Total Access 3000/3010 delivers services out to the customer loops in the same
manner that it receives its DSX-1 input from the DSX-1 cross connect panel; 64-pin/
50-pin AMP connectors on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane. The one exception
to this rule is the delivery of four T1s over optical fiber using the QFO-C access
module.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 11 of 22
Deploying either HDSL, or T1 requires the connection of two AMP connectors. See
the Application Guide section of this system manual for the appropriate wiring for
your intended use of Total Access 3000/3010.
This systems manual contains general rules on the connection of AMP connectors to
the backplane and pinouts for the different application wiring.
1.10
Replace Rear Guard

Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, replace the Plexiglass cover to the power
terminals. The power terminals are labeled TS1 and TS2. If the Total Access 3000/
3010 shelf has been installed step-by-step in the order presented in this NTP, the large
Plexiglass guard may be replaced at this time. Follow-on steps do not require access
behind the guard.
NOTE
Wire tie anchors are pre-installed on the backplane 64-pin/50-pin AMP
connectors cable ends. It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors
while the backplane guard is removed. ADTRAN recommends using the wire
ties to secure the 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors in place. Thread them
through the anchors before replacing the rear plastic guard.
1.11
Connect High Speed Metallic Interface

In addition to the individual DSX inputs from the network available via the loop
connectors on the backplane, when the Total Access 3000/3010 is employing a
multiplexer module in either slots 2 and 3 (or both), the shelf has the ability to take its
DSX input from the multiplexer. For the metallic high speed interfaces; DS3, STS-1
or DS3 ATM, the input from the network is via coaxial cable through a special coaxial
adapter mounted to the lower right corner of backplane. Total Access 3000/3010
becomes a multiplexer shelf, with the ability to direct any DSX in the DS3, STS-1 or
DS3 ATM payload, to any slot in the shelf, for whatever service is being provided to
the customer.
1.11.1 Installing the High-Speed Connector Module

The high-speed metallic interface is a special adapter mounted to the lower right hand
corner of the backplane. It is a separate part not required for individual DSX-1
network inputs.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 12 of 22
1.11.2 Connecting High-Speed Cabling

After attaching the high-speed metallic interface to the backplane, data cabling must be
installed from the network to route the high speed signal to the Total Access 3000/
3010 shelf.
1.12
Connect External Alarm Inputs / Outputs

The Total Access 3000/3010 provides standard bank alarm outputs. Each of the alarms
listed below consists of a three-pin wire-wrap header that connects to the SCU for
alarm management. The SCU provides the necessary electronic circuits for a NO/
COM/NC contact arrangement. The alarms are:
Critical Audible
(CRI-A)
Major Audible
(MAJ-A)
Minor Audible
(MIN-A)
Critical Visual
(CRI-V)
Major Visual
(MAJ-V)
Minor Visual
(MIN-V)
Spare 1
(AUX 1)
Spare 2
(AUX 2)
1.12.1 Connect Alarm Outputs

Depending on the vendor equipment employed at the CO, wiring external alarms from
the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf will vary slightly. The important consideration is
whether the external alarm equipment requires a Normally Open (NO) or Normally
Closed (NC) circuit to pass an alarm. After determining what the CO equipment
requires, connection can be made to the equipment from the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf.
1.12.2 Connect Fan Alarm Input

The Total Access 3000/3010 Fan Unit uses a NO circuit to pass a fan alarm to the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf if one or more of the three individual fans cease to
operate, or power is lost to the Fan Module itself. Under these circumstances, the
circuit closes, causing a -48 VDC signal to be passed to the Total Access 3000/3010
external alarm input header. The SCU notes the alarm and passes the information
along as appropriate.
1.12.3 Connect Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs

There are three additional external alarm inputs that can be reported to the SCU on the
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 13 of 22
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf. These are marked ACO, RMT and AUX2 (if AUX1 is
not being used for the fan alarm it may also be used for other inputs). Each functions
in an identical manner to the fan alarm. Terminal B supplies a -48 VDC source.
Terminal A expects -48 VDC if an alarm condition exists on the alarmed equipment.
1.
Connect an external alarm input to the shelf:

A. Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the long, thin plastic guard if
it is not already off from a previous procedure.
B. Choose an alarm header set from the EXT INPUTS block, P22/P20, on the
middle bottom of the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane.
C. Using standard Telco cross-connect wire, determine and cut the length
required to reach from the alarmed piece of equipment to the header you
chose in step B.
D. Allow length for 1 to 2 inches of stripped wire for wire wrap, and neat
routing out from the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
E. Using wire strippers, strip 1 to 2 inches from both ends of the wire.
NOTE
Omit the following step, F., if the alarmed piece of equipment has its own
source of -48 VDC and doesnt need the -48 VDC feed from the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf. The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf expects to see
-48 VDC on pin A of the alarm pair when an alarm condition exists.
F. Using a wire-wrap gun, wire wrap one wire to the B pin of the Total Access
3000/3010 AUX1 header (P22/P20), and the other end to the alarmed unit
alarm terminal marked B.
G. Wire wrap one end of the second wire to the A pin of the Total Access 3000/
3010 alarm header (P22/P20) and the other end to the appropriate equipment
alarm terminal.
H. Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, replace the long thin plastic guard
using the two screws provided.
NOTE
Check with the equipment manufacturer for exact alarm markings.
NOTE
If this Total Access 3000/3010 shelf will be daisy chained with a number of
other shelves using the RS-485 bus (P2/P21), do not replace the guard at this
time. The guard will be replaced after the RS-485 interconnection,
accomplished next in Section 1.13.1 of this Installation section.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 14 of 22
1.13
Connect Management Ports

The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf integrates onto the backplane several different
management ports to allow for remote management of the shelf. The management
interface is on the System Controller Unit (SCU) discussed in detail in the System
Description section of this systems manual. Depending on the SCU selected for your
system, you can use NMA over TL1 on an X.25 network, SNMP over Ethernet, TL1
over Ethernet or Telnet from a remote location. Also, regardless of SCU selection, up
to 16 shelves can be linked together on the RS-485 bus for management of those
shelves from a single management interface.
1.13.1 Connect RS-485 Bus Between Shelves

Up to 16 shelves can be linked together for management from a single shelf designated
as host. (The other shelves will be configured as clients.) This feature allows
conservation of valuable external management ports within the CO, and provides local
or remote management for up to 16 shelves from the craft interface on front of the host
SCU, or from the remote management port connections described in this section. The
alarm status of each shelf in the daisy chain can be seen from the auxiliary shelf access
menu on the host SCU.
1.13.2 Connect External Modem

Total Access 3000/3010 can be accessed and managed via modem, allowing the same
capabilities to a user as if he were connected to the local craft access port on the front of
the SCU. Access is provided by a DB-25 connector, J31/J18, and labeled ADMIN,
located on the upper right corner of the backplane. If several shelves are wired together,
the modem should be attached to the shelf containing the Host SCU. When the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf is called, the user can access not only the particular shelf to
which it is connected, but also any shelf daisy-chained to it via the RS-485 bus.
1.13.3 Connect X.25

Total Access 3000/3010 can send and receive TL1 commands for NMA management
over the X.25 packet switched network. The Total Access 3000/3010 SCU has a builtin X.25 PAD, and the shelf is ready to connect to the network. Access to the network
is via an RS-232 connector, J30/J17, labeled NTWK MGMT, located on the lower
left side of the backplane between the power terminals and the frame ground lug.
1.13.4 Connect 10BaseT

Total Access 3000/3010 can provide SNMP management capability over Ethernet. The
SCU has a built-in Ethernet interface, and the shelf is ready to connect to the network.
Access to the network is via an RJ45 10BaseT connector, J32/J28, labeled E-NET,
located on the lower right side of the backplane under the Pair 8/Pair 7 connector.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 15 of 22
To connect the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf to the Ethernet ring, simply plug the
male RJ45 modular connector into the female RJ45 port on the Total Access 3000/
3010 backplane. When planning your cable run to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf,
be sure to allow enough cable for routing the cable to the right from the backplane
connector to the frame, and for neat tie-off in accordance with CO SOP.
1.14
Install the SCU

The Total Access 3000/3010 System Controller Unit (SCU) is the focal point for all
management functions carried out by the shelf, and has the greatest number of
considerations when installing. The individual steps in this section detail these
considerations for a successful and trouble-free Total Access 3000/3010 installation.
The SCU handles local management and alarms, provides a craft interface for
provisioning individual access modules and multiplexers, and can be configured as a
host SCU to daisy chain up to 16 Total Access shelves together for management from
a single local craft interface. It can be identified by its part number, 1181018L1,
printed on the front of the faceplate underneath SCU.
The SCU also has a built-in X.25 PAD and an Ethernet interface for TL1/NMA or
SNMP management. The SCU can also be accessed by modem through the ADMIN
port, J31/J18.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 16 of 22
1.14.1 Install the SCU in Total Access 3000/3010

CAUTION
NOTE
At this point in the Installation and Turn-up Procedure, power should not be
applied.
1. Pull the ejector on the bottom of the SCU faceplate from its stowed, or closed,
position. The Total Access 3000/3010 SCU can only be inserted into the first or far
left slot of the shelf. Attempting to insert the SCU in any other slot may damage
the SCU and/or the backplane.
2. Gently but firmly push the SCU into the first slot on the left of the shelf. The first
slot is labeled for the SCU. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the
four-character display panel) and bottom (below the DB-9 craft port) of the SCU
will ensure a good seat of the SCU pins into the backplane connector.
3. Push the ejector up and closed against the SCU faceplate.
1.14.2 Insert Blank Faceplates

Insert blank faceplates into MUX and access modules slots which will not be used.
Blank face panel (P/N 1181952L1) will cover the two empty MUX slots. For the 28/
22 empty access module slots, use blank face panel (P/N 1181953L1). These panels
are to be removed when installing a MUX, Cell Switch Module, or access module.
This procedure ensures maximum cooling efficiency for the shelf.
1.14.3 Apply Power and Verify the SCU Self-Test Passes

All power, ground and administrative connections should now be completed on the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, and an SCU (the only mandatory card for any Total
Access 3000/3010 function) should be installed in the shelf. This step applies power
to the shelf with an SCU in place, and ensures that the SCU properly powers up and
successfully completes its power-on self-test routine.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 17 of 22
1.
Check to see that the SCU completes its self-test routine:

A. Install the fuse or turn on the circuit breaker to either power feed of the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf into the appropriate slot in the fuse and alarm panel.
B. Verify that the SCU power-on self-test routine is successfully completed.
The sequence on the front of the SCU faceplate is:
a. HST and ACO green LEDs will blink rapidly several times.
b. Four-character display will flash all LEDs momentarily.
c. All LEDs will extinguish except HST if the SCU is designated or
defaulted to host mode. In that case, the HST LED will remain lit.
d. Four-character display will cycle through the CRAFT Band,
Ethernet, Inband and CPU load messages. This constitutes a
complete, successful power-on test.
1.14.4 Connect Terminal or PC to Craft Port

Total Access 3000/3010 shelf management and provisioning is facilitated by a series
of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. Connecting either a
VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft interface on the SCU
faceplate allows access to the menus and management features of Total Access 3000/
3010.
1.14.5 Logon to the System

Once connected to the Total Access 3000/3010 SCU via either a VT100 terminal or
PC configured as a VT100 terminal, it is necessary to logon to the system to gain
access to the management and provisioning functions.
1.14.6 Configure Target ID (TID) and Shelf Number

Some remote management systems require a specific address and description for every
system they manage. The Target ID (TID) and Shelf Number may need to be
registered with the management system before it can manage Total Access 3000/3010.
(This step is recommended for any configuration in which multiple shelves will be
daisy-chained via the RS-485 bus for management via a Host SCU.)
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 18 of 22
1.14.7 Set Host Mode if Applicable

NOTE
If the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is to be installed as a stand alone unit, not
connected to any other Total Access shelf via the RS-485 bus, then the
Interbank Communication Mode can be set to either Host or Client. Skip the
remainder of this procedure and continue to 1.14.8.
When assembling a daisy chain for management of up to 16 shelves from a single craft
interface, one single SCU is designated as the host and all others on the chain are
designated as clients.
NOTE
Only one SCU can be designated Host in any daisy chain composed of Total
Access shelves connected on the RS-485 bus. The Host SCU must be the end
SCU on the chain. It does not matter which end has the Host SCU, but the Host
cannot be in the middle of the daisy chain. It is recommended that the Host
SCU be the first in the chain.
To back up one step from anywhere in the menu tree on the Total Access screens,
press <Esc>.
Other helpful commands are:
Backspace
Delete character to left
Enter (or Return)
Terminate Input
Control-R
Re-display screen
Control-X
Terminate Aux shelf connection (if active)
Control-Z
Return from Access module menus to SCU menu
Esc
Clear partial input data, or if none, return to previous

menu
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 19 of 22
To set host mode in the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, do the following:
1. Logon to the system.
For details, go to: DLP-716
2. From the Total Access Menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
3. From the System Controller Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
4. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 1, General, and press <Enter>.
5. From the General Menu, select option 1, Management Ports, and press <Enter>.
6. From the Management Ports Menu, select option 5, Interbank Comm. Mode, and
press <Enter>.
7. From the Interbank Comm. Mode Menu, select option 1, Host, and press <Enter>.
8. Return to the Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
9. Continue with section 1.14.8 to provision the remaining items.
1.14.8 Provision Remaining Items on SCU

Provisioning the remaining items before enabling the RS-485 bus.
3. From the Management Ports Menu, select option 3, Admin Port Baud Rate, and
press <Enter>.
4. Set the desired baud rate by selecting the corresponding number and press
<Enter>.
5. The current menu will now be the Management Ports Menu.
6. From the Management Ports Menu, select option 4, Admin Port Communications,
and press <Enter>.
7. Set the port communications to Menus by selecting option 1, and press <Enter>.
8. The current menu will now be the Management Ports Menu.
9. Press <Esc> once to return to the General Menu.
10. From the General Menu, select option 2, Date, and press <Enter>.
11. Enter the correct Date and press <Enter>.
12. The current menu will now be the General Menu.
13. From the General Menu, select option 3, Time, and press <Enter>.
14. Enter the correct Time and press <Enter>.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 20 of 22
16. From the General Menu, select option 4, Auto-Logoff, and press <Enter>.
17. To enable the Auto-Logoff, select option 2, Enable, and press <Enter>.
19. From the General Menu, select option 6, READ_ONLY Password, and press
<Enter>.
20. Enter the alphanumeric READ_ONLY password and press <Enter>.
22. From the General Menu, select option 7, READ_WRITE Password, and press
<Enter>.
23. Enter the alphanumeric READ_WRITE password and press <Enter>.
25. To return to the Provisioning Menu, press <Esc>.
26. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 2, MUX/Module, and press <Enter>.
27. From the MUX/Module Menu, select option3, MUX Auto-Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
28. To Enable or Disable MUX Auto-Provisioning, select the corresponding number
and press <Enter>.
29. The current menu will now be the MUX/Module Menu.
30. From the MUX/Module Menu, select option 4, Module Auto-Provisioning, and
press <Enter>.
31. To Enable or Disable Module Auto-Provisioning, select the corresponding number
and press <Enter>.
32. The current menu will now be the MUX/Module Menu.
33. To return to the main menu press <Enter>.
1.14.9 Repeat 1.14.1 Through 1.14.8 for Each Shelf

Each individual shelf must be tested and provisioned as described above. For each
shelf to be installed, repeat Steps 1.14.1 through 1.14.8.
NOTE
The Host SCU in any chain connected by the RS-485 bus must be the end
SCU on the chain. It does not matter which end has the Host SCU, but the
single Host cannot be in the middle of the daisy chain. Typically, the Host
SCU should be the first in the chain.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 21 of 22
1.14.10 Connect to Craft Port of Host SCU and Verify that All Banks are
Visible on Menu
When all the Total Access 3000/3010 shelves are tested and provisioned as desired by
the user, all the shelves connected by the RS-485 bus should be visible from the Host
shelf. The following procedure verifies that all the shelves can be seen from the Host
SCU.
1. Determine which shelf in the chain is the Host. The host shelf can be identified by
the lit HST LED on the SCU.
2. Logon to the system of the Host shelf
3. From the Total Access Menu, select option 1, System Controller and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
7. From the Management Ports Menu, select option 1, Auxiliary Shelf Access, and
press <Enter>.
8. From the Auxiliary Shelf Access Menu, you will be able to see all of the shelves
visible to the Host.
9. Select a shelf number different from the host and press <Enter>. The next screen
will be the logon screen of the selected shelf.
10. To return to the Host Auxiliary Shelf Access Menu of the Host shelf, press
<Control> and <X> simultaneously.
11. Return to the Total Access Menu by pressing <Esc>.
12. From the Total Access Menu, select option 6, Logoff and press <Enter>.
13. To logoff at this time, at the Exit and Logoff screen press Y and <Enter>.
NOTE
Pressing N and <Enter> at Step 13 above will return you to the Total Access
Menu.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP501-1E

NTP-501
Page 22 of 22
1.15
Provision IP Network Settings on the SCU

If the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf has a SCU and is to be connected to an IP network
for TELNET, TFTP, or SNMP management, there are several IP parameters that need
to be set for the shelf to communicate with the network.
1.16
Route Fiber Through the Total Access 3000/3010 Heat

Baffle
Total Access 3000/3010 can serve the local loop with an optical DS2 transport to
deliver up to four T1s out to the customer premises. (See APP 333, Fiber-Optic Loop
Applications, of this system manual.) In this application, the transport is fiber optics
out to the customer via a pair of single-mode fiber optic cable from the front of the
QFO-C access module, across to the left side of the shelf (viewed from the front), and
to the CO overhead fiber routing system.
1.17
Follow-up Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, the Total Access 3000/3010 shelves should be ready
for acceptance testing. Please locate the tab labeled Acceptance Test Procedures and
proceed with ATP-601, Acceptance Test Procedure for Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf,
CO Installation.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP504-1E

NTP-504
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 MUX Installation in a Central

Office Shelf
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure provides step-by-step instructions for the installation of the Total
Access 3000/3010 DS3 MUX Module into a Total Access 3000/3010 Central Office
shelf. Installation procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging,
inspecting for damage and seating the unit in the shelf. Acceptance testing is provided
in section 6 (Acceptance Test Procedure, ATP-601) of this system manual.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the DS3 MUX module.
If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding. The
prerequisite procedures include:
Installation and wiring of Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and SCU NTP-501
BNC module installation DLP-708
Coaxial cable installation PREP-401, DLP-709
1.1.3
Materials Required
Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 MUX module (two modules for 1:1 protection
switching applications)
1.2
First-time MUX Installation

CAUTION
handling modules, wear an anti-static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage
to electronic components. Place modules in anti-static packing material when
approved anti-static mat that is electrically grounded.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP504-1E

NTP-504
Page 2 of 4
The SCU is capable of storing provisioning settings for both MUX and Access
modules. Auto Provisioning transfers provisioning data, including Service State,
stored in the SCU to the respective slot upon the installation of a replacement
module of the same kind. Replacement modules of a different kind would have to
be manually provisioned, after which the provisioning settings would then be
stored in the SCU. For example, the provisioning settings of a STS-1 MUX would
be downloaded to a replacement STS-1 MUX, but not to a DS3 MUX module.
If MUX Auto Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and a DS3 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another DS3 MUX unit, the SCU will
automatically download the provisioning settings, including Service State, to the
replacement DS3 MUX.
NOTE
When both Auto and Linked Provisioning are enabled, the unit will get its
provisioning settings through Linked-Provisioning. Hence, the replacement
unit will not receive Service State information and will have to be manually
placed in the appropriate Service State.
1.
Logon to the system, if necessary

2.
From the Total Access Main menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
3.
From the System Controller Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
4.
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 13, Auto-Provisioning, and press
<Enter>. Check the setting for MUX Auto-Provisioning. To enable, continue
with the next step.
5.
From the Auto-Provisioning menu, select option 2, MUX Auto-Provisioning, and

press <Enter>.
6.
From the MUX Auto-Provisioning menu, select option 2, Enable, and

press <Enter>.
7.
Return to the Total Access Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
1.3
Primary MUX (slot A) Installation Procedure
1.3.1
Unpack and Inspect the Working DS3 MUX Module

Each DS3 MUX Module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the
carton carefully and avoid deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects. After
removing the unit from the carton, unwrap the bubble-wrap and pull the unit from the
anti-static plastic bag.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP504-1E

NTP-504
Page 3 of 4
After unpacking the unit, inspect it for damage. If the equipment has been damaged,
file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service.
1.3.2
Install the Working DS3 MUX

1.
Gently but firmly push the DS3 MUX into the second slot, slot A, at the left
end of the shelf. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the POWER
LED) and bottom (below the Test/Enable button) of the unit will ensure a good
seat of the DS3 pins into the backplane connector. Push the ejector tab up and
closed against the DS3 faceplate.
2.
Allow the self-test LED sequence to complete. The self-test should take about
10-15 seconds. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be yellow, indicating
the unit is Out-of-Service and the STATUS LED will be off, indicating the unit
is in the Unassigned (OOS-UA) state. The ONLINE LED will also be off. The
ONLINE LED will remain off until the unit is placed in the Out-of-Service,
Maintenance, or In-Service state. No alarms will be passed on to the network
until the unit is placed in the In-Service state.
3.
If a single mux configuration is being employed, proceed to DLP-740 for the

procedure to provision the DS3 MUX Module. If a protection configuration is
being employed, proceed to DLP-740 after the Protect MUX module has been
installed.
1.4
Protect MUX (slot B) Installation Procedure
1.4.1
Unpack and Inspect the Protect DS3 MUX Module

antistatic plastic bag.
1.4.2
Install the Protect DS3 MUX

1.
Gently but firmly push the DS3 MUX into the third slot, slot B, at the left end of
the shelf. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the POWER LED) and
bottom (below the Test/Enable button) of the unit will ensure a good seat of the
DS3 pins into the backplane connector. Push the ejector tab up and closed
against the DS3 faceplate.
2.
Allow the self-test LED sequence to complete. The self-test should take about
10-15 seconds. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be yellow, indicating
the unit is Out-of-Service and the STATUS LED will be off indicating the unit is
in the Unassigned (OOS-UA) state. The ONLINE LED will also be off.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP504-1E

NTP-504
Page 4 of 4
1.5
3.
Proceed to DLP-740 for procedure to provision the DS3 MUX modules.
4.
Go to ATP-602 for the DS3 MUX Module Acceptance Testing Procedure.
5.
Continue with Section 1.5 of this document when acceptance testing is complete.
Placing the Units in Service

NOTE
Ensure all alarms are cleared before placing the modules In-Service. This will
prevent false alarm from being transmitted to the network.
1.
From the working MUX Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
2.
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 4, Service State, and press <Enter>.
3.
From the Service State Menu, select option 1, In Service, and press <Enter>.
4.
Repeat the above steps for the Protect MUX.

NOTE
At this point the POWER LED on both MUX modules will illuminate
GREEN, indicating an In-Service state. Alarms will also be generated in this
state. MUX A ONLINE LED should be illuminated green and MUX B
ONLINE LED should be off. The STATUS LED on both MUX units should
be green if a DS3 signal is present and synchronized. If no DS3 signal is
present, both LEDs will be illuminated red.
1.6
Follow-up Procedure
Please proceed to the appropriate NTP for the installation of the access modules to be
installed in the Total Access 3000/3010 chassis.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP505-1E

NTP-505
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Total Access 3000/3010 STS MUX Installation in a Central

Office Shelf
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure provides step-by-step instructions for the installation of the Total
Access 3000/3010 STS-1 MUX Module into a Total Access 3000/3010 central office
shelf. Installation procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging,
inspecting for damage and seating the unit in the shelf. Acceptance testing is provided
in section 6 (Acceptance Test Procedure, ATP-601) of this system manual.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the STS-1 MUX
module. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding. The
1.1.3
Materials Required
1.2
Coaxial cable installation PREP 401, DLP-709
Total Access 3000/3010 STS-1 MUX module (two modules for 1:1 protection

CAUTION
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP505-1E

NTP-505
Page 2 of 4
modules. Auto Provisioning transfers provisioning data, including Service State, stored
in the SCU to the respective slot upon the installation of a replacement module of the
same kind. Replacement modules of a different kind would have to be manually
provisioned, after which the provisioning settings would then be stored in the SCU.
For example, the provisioning settings of an HTU-C would be downloaded to a
replacement HTU-C, but not to an HD-10 module.
If MUX Auto-Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and a STS-1 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another STS-1 MUX unit, the SCU will
replacement STS-1 MUX.
NOTE
Check Auto Provisioning Setting in SCU
1. Logon to the system
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For details go to: DLP-716.

From the Total Access Main menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 12, Auto Provisioning, and press
<Enter>. Check the setting for MUX Auto Provisioning. To enable, continue with
the next step.
From the MUX Auto Provisioning menu, select option 2, Enable, and press
<Enter>.
Return to the Total Access Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
1.3
1.3.1
Unpack and Inspect the Primary STS-1 MUX Module

Each STS-1 MUX Module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the
Inspect the unit for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has been damaged in
transit, file a claim with the carrier, then contact ADTRAN Customer Service.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP505-1E

NTP-505
Page 3 of 4
1.3.2
Install the Primary STS-1 MUX

1. Gently but firmly push the STS-1 MUX into the second slot, slot A, at the left
end of the shelf. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the POWER
LED) and bottom (below the Test/Enable button) of the unit will ensure a
good seat of the STS-1 pins into the backplane connector. Push the ejector tab
up and closed against the STS-1 faceplate.
2. Allow the unit approximately 30 seconds to completely power up and synchronize
with the SCU. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be FLASHING yellow,
indicating and Out-of-Service, unassigned (OOS-UA) state and the ON LINE
LED will be off. The ONLINE LED will remain off until the unit is placed in the
In-Service state and becomes the service provider to the network. Also, the
STATUS LED will be red and the CLOCK LED will be yellow if the receive
STS-1 signal is not present. No alarms will be passed on to the network until the
unit is placed in the In-Service state.
3. If a single configuration is being employed, proceed to DLP-741 for procedure to
provision the STS-1 MUX module. If a protection configuration is being
employed, proceed to DLP-741 after the Protect MUX module has been installed.
1.4
1.4.1

Unpack and Inspect the Protect STS-1 MUX Module
Each STS-1 MUX module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the
antistatic plastic bag.
Inspect it for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has damaged in transit, file a
claim with the carrier, then contact ADTRAN Customer Service.
1.4.2
Install the Protect STS-1 MUX

1. Gently but firmly push the STS-1 MUX into the third slot, slot B, at the left end of
the shelf. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the POWER LED) and
bottom (below the Test/Enable button) of the unit will ensure a good seat of the
STS-1 pins into the backplane connector. Push the ejector tab up and closed
against the STS-1 faceplate.
with the SCU. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be FLASHING yellow,
indicating and Out-of-Service, Unassigned (OOS-UA) state and the ON LINE
LED will be off. The ONLINE LED will remain off until the unit is placed in the
In-Service state and becomes the service provider to the network. Also, the
STATUS LED will be red and the CLOCK LED will be yellow if the receive ST
signal is not present. No alarms will be passed on to the network until the unit is
placed in the In-Service state.
3. Proceed to DLP-741 for procedure to provision the STS-1 MUX modules.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP505-1E

NTP-505
Page 4 of 4
1.5

NOTE
prevent false alarms from being transmitted to the network.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repeat the above steps for the protect MUX.
NOTE
At this point the POWER LED on both MUX modules will illuminate green,
indicating an In-Service state. Alarms will also be generated in this state.
MUX A ONLINE LED should be illuminated green and MUX B ONLINE
LED should be off. The STATUS LED on both MUX units should be greenif
an STS-1 signal is present and synchronized. If no STS-1 signal is present,
both LEDs will be illuminated red.
1.6
Follow-up Procedure
Please proceed to the appropriate NTP for the installation of the access modules to
be installed in the Total Access 3000/3010 chassis.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP506-1E

NTP-506
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 MUX Installation in a Central

Office Shelf
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure provides step-by-step instructions for the installation of both the Total
Access 3000/3010 OC-3 L1 and L2 MUX modules (P/N 1181031L1 and 1181031L2
respectively) into a Total Access 3000/3010 Central Office shelf. Installation
procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging, inspecting for
damage and seating the unit in the shelf.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to installing the OC-3 MUX
module. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding. The
1.1.3
Materials Required
1.2
Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 MUX module (two modules for 1:1 protection

CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP506-1E

NTP-506
Page 2 of 4
modules. Auto Provisioning transfers provisioning data, including Service State, stored
in the SCU to the respective slot upon the installation of a replacement module of the
same kind. Replacement modules of a different kind would have to be manually
provisioned, after which the provisioning settings would then be stored in the SCU.
For example, the provisioning settings of an OC-3 MUX would be downloaded to a
replacement OC-3 MUX, but not to a DS3 MUX module.
If MUX Auto Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and an OC-3 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another OC-3 MUX unit, the SCU will
replacement OC-3 MUX.
NOTE
1.2.1
Check Auto-Provisioning Setting in SCU

1. Log on to the system.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

From the Total Access main menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 13, Auto-Provisioning, and press
<Enter>. Check the setting for MUX Auto-Provisioning. To enable, continue with
the next step.
From the MUX Auto-Provisioning menu, select option 2, Enable, and press
<Enter>.
Return to the Total Access main menu by pressing the <Esc>.
1.3
1.3.1
Unpack and Inspect the Primary OC-3 MUX Module

Each OC-3 MUX module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP506-1E

NTP-506
Page 3 of 4
Immediately inspect it for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has been
damaged in transit, file an immediate claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN
Customer Service.
1.3.2
Install the Primary OC-3 MUX

1. Slide the OC-3 MUX half-way into slot A of the system chassis. Connect the
Receive fiber to the lower SC connector and the Transmit fiber to the upper SC
connector. Thread the two fibers up along the faceplate and the two round
standoffs so that the fibers exit the MUX through the notch at the top of the
faceplate. Gently, but firmly push the module the rest of the way into the slot,
being careful not to pinch the fibers between the faceplate and the shelf. Push the
ejector tab up and against the faceplate. See DLP-719 for proper routing of fibers
through a heat baffle.
with the SCU. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be flashing yellow,
indicating an Out-of-Service, Unassigned (OOS-UA) state and the ONLINE LED
will be on. The Status and Optics LEDs will be red and the Clock LED will be
yellow.
3. If a single configuration is being employed, proceed to DLP-742 for procedure to
provision the OC-3 MUX module. If a protection configuration is being employed,
proceed with section 1.4, Protect MUX Installation Procedure, to install the Protect
MUX.
1.4
1.4.1
Unpack and Inspect the Protect OC-3 MUX Module

Each OC-3 MUX Module is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the
Immediately inspect it for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has been
damaged in transit, file an immediate claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN
Customer Service. (See APX 901 - Warranty and Customer Service.)
1.4.2
Install the Protect OC-3 MUX

1. Slide the OC-3 MUX half-way into slot B of the system chassis. Connect the
Receive fiber to the lower SC connector and the Transmit fiber to the upper SC
connector. Thread the two fibers up along the faceplate and the two round
standoffs so that the fibers exit the MUX through the notch at the top of the
faceplate. Gently, but firmly push the module the rest of the way into the slot,
being careful not to pinch the fibers between the faceplate and the shelf. Push the
ejector tab up and against the faceplate. See DLP-719 for proper routing of fibers
through a heat baffle.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP506-1E

NTP-506
Page 4 of 4
with the SCU. Upon completion, the POWER LED will be flashing yellow,
indicating an Out-of-Service, Unassigned (OOS-UA) state and the Online LED
will be off. The STATUS and OPTICS LEDs will be red and the CLOCK LED
will be yellow.
3. Proceed to DLP-742 for procedure to provision the OC-3 MUX modules.
1.5

NOTE
prevent false alarms from being transmitted to the network.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repeat the above steps for the Protect MUX.
NOTE
At this point the Power LED on both MUX modules will illuminate green,
indicating an In-Service state. Alarms will also be generated in this state.
MUX A Online LED should be illuminated green and MUX B Online LED
should be off. The Status LED on both MUX units should be green if an OC-3
signal is present and synchronized. If no OC-3 signal is present, both LEDs
will be illuminated red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 1 of 6
1.1
SCU Replacement in a Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf

NOTE
References to common, but differing, parameters between the Total
Access 3000 and the Total Access 3010, such as number of slots, will be
conveyed by the convention a/b. The a represents the Total Access 3000
parameter and the b represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For
example, the differing number of access slots in the two platforms, 28 for
the Total Access 3000 and 22 for the Total Access 3010, would be
displayed 28/22.
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure provides step-by-step instructions for the replacement of a Total
Access System Controller Unit (SCU), into a Total Access central office shelf.
Replacement procedures include the removal of the product from its packaging and
inspecting for damage, seating the unit in the shelf, provisioning and turnup.
1.1.2
NOTE
The following procedures must be completed prior to replacing the SCU
module. All passwords, addresses and other information such as CLLI code
and TIRKS ID must be written down prior to installing the replacement SCU.
2.
3.
4.
5.

From the Total Access Menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 1, General, and press <Enter>.
From the General Menu, write down the settings for the following parameters:
1.) Date
2.) Time
3.) Auto-Logoff
6. Once all the above information has been written down, select option 1,
Management Ports, and press <Enter>.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 2 of 6
7. From the Management Ports Menu, write down the settings for the following
parameters:
1.) Craft Port Baud Rate
2.) Admin Port Baud Rate
3.) Admin Port Communications
4.) Interbank Comm. Mode
5.) Password Authentication
NOTE
Steps 8 and 9 are only to be completed for the host SCU and only when the
SCU is daisy chained to other Total Access 3000 shelves via the RS-485
interface.
8. Once all the above information has been written down, select option 1, Auxiliary
Shelf Access, and press <Enter>.
9. From this screen, write down the list of shelves visible to the SCU.
10. Once all the above information has been written down, press <Esc> three times to
return to the Provisioning Menu.
11. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 2, MUX/Module, and press <Enter>.
1.) MUX Auto-Provisioning
2.) Module Auto-Provisioning
12. Write down this information and then, press <Esc> once to return to the
Provisioning Menu.
13. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 3, Network, and press <Enter>.
14. From the Network Menu, write down the settings for the following parameters:
1.) Default Route Interface
2.) TFTP Server IP
15. Once all the above information has been written down, select option 1, Ethernet
Interface, and press <Enter>.
16. From the Ethernet Interface Menu, write down the settings for the following
parameters:
1.) IP Address
2.) Subnet Mask
3.) Gateway
17. Once all the above information has been written down, press <Esc> once to return
to the Network Menu.
18. From the Network Menu, select option 2, Inband Interface, and press <Enter>.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 3 of 6
19. From the Inband Interface Menu, write down the settings for the following
parameters:
1.) IP Address
2.) Subnet Mask
3.) Gateway
20. Once all the above information has been written down, press <Esc> twice to return
to the Provisioning Menu.
21. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 4, SNMP, and press <Enter>.
22. From the SNMP Menu, write down the settings for the following parameters:
1.) Read Community
2.) Write Community
3.) Trap Host 0 IP Address
7.) Trap Host Method
23. Once all the above information has been written down, press <Esc> once to return
to the Provisioning Menu.
24. From the General Menu, select option 5, TL1, and press <Enter>.
25. From the TL1 Menu, write down the settings for the following parameters:
1.) Shelf Number
2.) Target ID (TID)
26. Once all the above information has been written down, press <Esc> three times to
return to the Main Menu.
1.1.3
Materials Required
1.2
Total Access 3000/3010 System Controller Unit (SCU).
Unpack and Inspect the Replacement SCU

CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 4 of 6
Each SCU is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open the carton carefully
and avoid deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects. After removing the unit
from the carton, unwrap the bubble-wrap and pull the unit from the anti-static plastic
bag.
Inspect the unit for possible damage. If the equipment has damaged in transit, file a
claim with the carrier, then contact ADTRAN Customer Service.
1.3
Remove the Current SCU from the Shelf

The removal of the SCU will not disrupt the flow of data through the shelf, Cell
Switch Modules, MUX modules or access cards. A temporary loss of communication
with the shelf as well as the loss of monitoring and recording alarms will occur while
the SCU is being replaced. Since the SCU is not in the data path, no data will be
affected.
1.3.1
Logoff the system

1. From the Total Access Main Menu, select option 6, Logoff, and press <Enter>.
2. From the Exit and Logoff screen, Enter Y and press <Enter>.
1.3.2
Remove the SCU

1. Gently but firmly pull down on the faceplate ejector tab until the unit is unseated
from the backplane.
2. Slide the unit completely out of the shelf and place in an anti-static bag or on an
anti-static surface.
1.4
Install the Replacement SCU into the Shelf

1. Gently but firmly push the replacement SCU into the now empty far-left slot
labeled SCU. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the Four-Character
Display) and bottom (below the DB-9 connector) of the unit will ensure a good
seat of the SCU pins into the backplane connector.
2. Push the ejector tab close and against the SCU faceplate.
3. Verify that the SCU power-on self test routine is successfully completed. The
sequence on the SCU faceplate is:
1.) HST and ACO green LEDs will blink rapidly several times.
2.) Four-character display will flash all LEDs momentarily.
3.) All LEDs will extinguish except HST if the SCU is designated or defaulted to
Host mode. In that case, the HST will remain lit.
4.) Four-character display will cycle through the CRAFT baud, Ethernet,
Inband, and CPU load messages. Power-on self test is complete.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 5 of 6
1.5
Connect Terminal or PC to Craft Port

Connect either a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft
interface on the SCU faceplate.
1.6
Provision the Replacement SCU

It will be necessary to provision the new SCU since it is unable to Auto-Provision
itself. Provisioning can be done through the craft interface or from the faceplate of the
unit using the Four-Character Display (FCD) and faceplate toggle switch.
NOTE
The default band rate for new units is 9600.
To provision the SCU via the craft interface, perform the following:
2. Configure Target ID (TID) and Number
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

From the Total Access Menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
From the Provisioning Menu, select option 1, General, and press <Enter>.
From the General Menu, select option 1, Management Ports, and press
<Enter>.
From the Management Ports Menu, select option 5, Interbank Comm. Mode,
and press <Enter>.
From the Interbank Comm. Mode Menu, select either option 1, Host, for Host
Mode, or option 2, Client, for Client Mode, and press <Enter>.
Return to the Provisioning Menu by pressing <Esc>.
From the Provisioning Menu, configure the replacement SCU with the remaining
provisioning items that were written down at the beginning of this procedure.
1.6.2
Provision IP Network Settings

If the Total Access 3000/3010 is to be connected to an IP network for Telnet, TFTP or
SNMP management, there are several IP parameters that need to be set for the shelf to
communicate with the network. These settings are included in those written down
prior to the replacement.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP507-1E

NTP-507
Page 6 of 6
1.6.3
Connect to the Craft Port of Host SCU and Verify That All Banks are
Visible on menu.
1. Determine which shelf in the chain is the Host. The HST LED will be illuminated
green on the Host shelfs SCU.
2. Logon to the system via the craft interface of the Host SCU
3. From the Total Access Menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
7. From the Management Ports Menu, select option 1, Auxiliary Shelf Access, and
press <Enter>.
8. From the Auxiliary Shelf Access Menu, you will be able to see all of the shelves
visible to the host SCU. Verify that the replacement SCU is visible and that no
other shelves have dropped off. Refer to the list of visible shelves that were
written down during the "Prerequisite Procedures" at the beginning of this
procedure.
1.6.4
Verify Replacement SCU Communications over the X.25 Network.

1.6.5
Verify replacement SCU Communications over the IP LAN.

NOTE
It may take up to 20 minutes for the replacement SCUs new MAC address to
be updated in its network peers ARP cache. Until this update occurs, the SCU
will not be able to communicate with the network
1.7
Follow-Up Procedure
This concludes the procedure to replace a Total Access 3000/3010 SCU. No specific
follow-up instructions are necessary.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 1 of 8
TM
1.1
HLSS
Configuration and Turnup
for Go To:
For Details
Perform HDSL
Steps Below
in theCircuit
Order Listed
DSX-Fed Systems
1.1.1
Introduction
This section provides step-by-step instructions for the configuration and turnup of an
HDSL Loop Support System (HLSS) circuit on an HDSL loop-fed from the network
via individual DSX-1. Configuration procedures include installing appropriate line and
remote cards, configuring the Total Access HTU-C cards for protection switching
operation and enabling the protection switching feature.
Protection pairs on the Total Access 3000 system are adjacent odd-even slots,
indicated on the Total Access 3000 front shelf screening. The odd slot on the left is
the MAIN circuit; the even slot to the right is the AUX, or backup circuit.
1.1.2
Before beginning the configuration and turnup procedure described in this NTP, the
user should ensure that a Total Access 3000 shelf is properly installed and wired for
DSX network feeds. Also, ensure the SCU is installed and provisioned. Refer to
NTP-501, Shelf Installation in a Central Office, for detailed procedures for either of
the above applications.
NOTE
Valid protection pairs are the adjacent odd-even slots in the Total Access 3000
shelf, and are further designated by the brackets on the lower front
silkscreen of the Total Access 3000 chassis. The left (odd-numbered) slot in
the pair is the MAIN; the right (even-numbered) slot is the AUX circuit for
the pair. Thus, Slots 1 and 2 are a valid protection pair, but slots 6 and 7 are
not. The pair must have the odd-numbered slot to the left in the pair.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the technician turning up the protected circuit
knows which pair of slots has been assigned to the circuit, and that a single
DSX-1 signal from the appropriate source, generally a DSX cross connect,
has been routed and wired to the appropriate pairs of pins on backplane
connectors labeled Pair 7 and Pair 8. For a protected circuit, the appropriate
pin pairs that should receive the DSX-1 from the network are the odd
numbered pins corresponding to the MAIN, odd numbered slot. Details for
these connections are provided in APP-302, HDSL/T1-Only DSX-1-Fed
System Application, in this Systems Manual.
Total Access 3000/3010 Systems Manual
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 2 of 8
Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

1.1.3
Materials Required
1.1.4
Total Access 3000 chassis installed and wired, with SCU.

Two Total Access 3000 HTU-Cs.
Two protection switching capable HTU-Rs. These HTU-Rs are the following: P/N
1245026Lx or 1246026Lx T200 mechanics.
One dual-slot remote housing, ADTRAN P/N 1245034L1.
Install the HTU-Cs into Total Access 3000

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling
modules, wear an anti-static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic
components. Place modules in anti-static packing material when transporting or
storing. When working on modules, always place them on an approved anti-static mat
that is electrically grounded.
1. Gently but firmly push the HTU-C into the appropriate odd-numbered slot (which
will be the MAIN HDSL circuit). Compatible slots can be any slot pair that starts
with an odd number (MAIN) and includes the adjacent (to the right) evennumbered slot (AUX). Compatible slot pairs are further designated by the bracket
notation around the slot pairs on the silk screen just below the physical slots on the
front of the Total Access 3000. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the
PWR LED) and bottom (below the ACT LED) of the unit will ensure a good seat
of the HTU-C pins into the backplane connector. Repeat this step for the AUX
HTU-C to be installed in the adjacent (even, to the right) slot.
2. Push the ejector tab up and closed against the HTU-C faceplate.
1.2.
Provision the HTU-C

If Module Auto-Provisioning is enabled on the SCU, and if the new cards are of the
same type as the former, the provisioning of the former access cards of the two Total
Access 3000 slots will be written to the new access cards upon installation. If this is an
initial installation, the units will require provisioning to appropriately configure them
out of the factory default states.
1. Logon to Total Access system (see DLP-716, located in System Manual, for
detailed logon procedure).
2. Check to ensure the HTU-C line cards are correctly provisioned according to
circuit parameters. Under the Provisioning menu, set numbered option, Network
Source, to DSX. This option causes the HTU-C to look to the individual DSX
backplane connector for its data feed.
3. Ensure the provisioning of both the MAIN and AUX HTU-Cs is identical, except
for the following options:
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 3 of 8
For Details Go To:
1. Provision the MAIN unit to OUT OF SERVICE-MAINTENANCE (OOS-M)

mode.
2. Provision the AUX unit to the OUT OF SERVICE-UNASSIGNED (OOS-U)
mode.
4. Enable protection switching
1. Access the MAIN Menu of the HTU-C in the odd-numbered (MAIN) slot.
2. Select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
3. Select Option 1, Protection Mode.
4. To enable protection switching, select Option 1, ENABLE.
NOTE
Unless the AUX circuit is in the OOS-U mode, the operator will not be able
to change the Protection mode of the MAIN HTU-C.
5. Set Options 2 and 3, BER Threshold and BER Interval (see Table H in the
Installation and Maintenance practice for definitions).
6. Back out of the menu for the MAIN slot and access the HTU-C in the evennumbered (AUX) slot.
7. Select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
8. Option 1, Protection Mode, will have been set to AUTO. If you desire to
provision a different HLSS mode, select Option 1, and choose between Auto,
Manual AUX, Manual Main and Auto Hold.
9. Set Options 2-7 as desired on the AUX unit. (see Table H in the Installation
and Maintenance practice for definitions).
5. From the provisioning menu of the AUX circuit, reset the AUX unit to OOS-M.
6. Logoff the system
1. From the Total Access Menu, select Option 7, Logoff, and press <Enter>.
2 From the Exit and Logoff screen, select Y and press <Enter>.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 4 of 8
1.3.
Install the Dual-slot Stand-alone Housing

See the associated Installation and Maintenance practice, 61245034L1-5, for mounting
and wiring instructions.
NOTE
Ensure the customer equipment is correctly wired to the Main DS1 terminal
block inside the HLSS housing or utilizes the MAIN RJ-48 jack on the back
of the housing.
1.4.
Install the HTU-R

The HTU-R terminates local loop HDSL signals originating from the Central Office
(CO) unit and transforms the HDSL signal into traditional DS1 signals to be delivered
to the customer.
1.4.1
Install the HTU-R into the Dual-slot Remote Housing

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling
modules, wear an anti-static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic
components. Place modules in anti-static packing material when transporting or
storing. When working on modules, always place them on an approved anti-static mat
that is electrically grounded.
1. Connect the individual 4-wire HDSL circuits to the HDSL terminal block inside
the Dual slot remote housing. The 4-wire MAIN circuit will connect to the Loop 1
and Loop 2 terminals labeled MAIN and the 4-wire AUX circuit will connect to
the Loop 1 and Loop 2 terminals labeled AUX.
2. Gently but firmly push the HTU-R into the lower dual slot remote housing slot.
Repeat this step for the second HTU-R in the upper slot.
3. The HTU-Cs will transfer provisioning data to the HTU-Rs upon power-up. Some
provisioning of the HTU-R, however, may be necessary due to hardware
dipswitches and jumpers. See the Installation and Maintenance practice for the
specific HTU-R utilized by your company.
4. Upon provisioning of the HTU-Rs, the faceplate LEDs should read as shown in
Table 1.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 5 of 8
For Details Go To:

Table 1. Faceplate LEDs
HTU-C (MAIN)
PWR - Slow Flashing Green

DSX - Off
TST - Off
LP1, LP2 - Green
ALM - Red
ACT - Green
HTU-C (AUX)

DSX - Off
TST - Off
LP1, LP2 - Green
ALM - Off
ACT - Off
HTU-R (MAIN)
LP1, LP2 - Green

DS1 - Off
ALM - Red
ESF/SF - Yellow or Green
B8ZS/AMI - Yellow or Green
LBK - Off
HTU-R (AUX)
LP1, LP2 - Green

DS1 - Off
ALM - Red
LBK - Off
NOTE
The condition of the ALM, DSX and DS1 LEDs depends upon the status of
the equipment on the ends of the installed circuit. If both terminations of the
circuit are appropriately configured and prepared to pass data, the HTU-C
ALM LEDs will be out, the HTU-C DSX LEDs will be green (MAIN) and Off
(AUX), the MAIN HTU-R DS1 LED will be green and ALM off, while the
AUX HTU-R DS1 will be off, and ALM red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 6 of 8
1.5
Reset All Equipment To Operating Condition

When the customers at both ends of the circuit have turned up their equipment and are
running data (or test patterns, or are in loopbacks, or some other condition that will
preclude the generation of alarms), the HTU-Cs can be placed In Service to restore the
alarm generating functions of the equipment to the network.
1. From the Total Access 3000 HTU-C Provisioning Screen for both the MAIN and
AUX HTU-Cs, select the Service State option, and place both HTU-Cs In Service.
NOTE
Placing the HTU-Cs In Service will change the PWR LED from slow flashing
green to steady green.
1.6.
Disabling Protection Switching

Disabling the protection switching mode from the circuit converts both the MAIN and
AUX circuits into independent stand-alone HDSL circuits.
CAUTION
Ensure that data has been removed from the aux circuit before proceeding
with the next step. Disabling protection switching before removing data
from the AUX loop will cause a loss of signal condition on that loop. Under
normal circumstances, the data on the HLSS circuit will be running on the
MAIN HDSL circuit, and this precaution is unnecessary.
1.6.1
Disabling protection switching

1. Access the AUX HTU-C and select Option 2, Provisioning, from the HDSL Main
Menu.
2. From the Provisioning menu, choose the Service State option.
3. Select Option 3, Out Of Service-Unassigned.
4. Escape out of the AUX HTU-C menus and proceed to the MAIN HTU-C menu.
5. From the Main Menu, select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
6. From the Protection Configuration menu, select Option 1, Protection Mode.
7. Choose Option 2, Disable.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 7 of 8
For Details Go To:
NOTE
There is no provisioning required at the HTU-Rs to remove protectionswitching capability. Upon completion of the above procedure, the MAIN
circuit is an independent, non-protected HDSL circuit. The AUX circuit is
also now independent, with protection switching disabled, and currently
OOS-U.
1.6.2
Adjust wiring at Dual remote housing

Once protection switching has been disabled in the HTU-Cs, the housing is internally
wired to provide a DS1 signal to both the MAIN DS1 and AUXILIARY/TEST DS1
RJ-48 jacks. Connect the customers equipment to the AUX RJ-48 jack or the AUX
DS1 terminal strip in the housing to complete a second independent HDSL circuit.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP513-1E

NTP-513
Page 8 of 8
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 1 of 12
TM
HDSL
HLSS
Circuit
Configuration and Turnup
Perform Steps
Below
in the Order
Listed
for DS3-Fed Systems
1.1
Introduction
This section provides step-by-step instructions for the configuration and turnup of an
HDSL Loop Support System (HLSSTM) circuit on an HDSL loop fed from a DS3
MUX module. Configuration procedures include installing appropriate line and remote
cards, configuring the Total Access HTU-C cards for protection switching operation
and enabling the protection switching feature. This section specifically addresses the
procedures necessary to turn up the HDSL circuit in a protection mode. Procedures for
configuring the DS3 MUX modules for automatic protection operation are included in
NTP-514, DS3 MUX HLSS Configuration.
Protection pairs on the Total Access 3000 system are adjacent odd-even slots,
indicated on the Total Access 3000 front shelf screening. The odd slot on the left is
the MAIN circuit; the even slot to the right is the AUX, or backup circuit.
1.1.1
Before beginning the configuration and turnup procedure described in this NTP, the
user should ensure that a Total Access 3000 shelf is properly installed and wired for
DS3 operation. Also, ensure the SCU is installed and provisioned. Refer to NTP-501,
Shelf Installation in a Central Office, for detailed procedures for either of the above
applications.
1.1.2
Materials Required
Total Access 3000 chassis installed and wired, with SCU.

One or two DS3 MUX modules.
Two Total Access 3000 HTU-Cs.
Two protection switching capable HTU-Rs any HTU-R should work. These
HTU-Rs are the following 1245026Lx or 1246026Lx T200 mechanics.
One dual-slot remote housing, ADTRAN P/N 1245034L1.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 2 of 12
1.2
Unpack and Inspect the Total Access DS3 MUX Modules

removing the unit from the carton, unwrap the anti-static bubble-wrap and pull the unit
from the protective plastic bag.
(See APX-901, Warranty and Customer Service.)
1.3
Install the DS3 MUX Modules

1.
Install the DS3 MUX Module into Total Access 3000

handling modules, wear an anti-static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to
electronic components. Place modules in anti-static packing material when
The procedure below assumes that the DS3 MUX is being newly installed into
the Total Access 3000. If the MUX is already up and running, begin with
Step 1).
1.)
2.
Gently but firmly push the DS3 MUX into the second slot, slot A, at the
left end of the shelf. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the
POWER LED) and bottom (below the Test/Enable button) of the unit
will ensure a good seat of the DS3 pins into the backplane connector.
Push the ejector tab up and closed against the DS3 faceplate.
Ensure that MUX A is in the Out of Service-Maintenance (OOS-M) mode.

Placing the MUX in OOS-M will prevent the MUX from generating alarms back
to the network, and will allow loopbacks to be initiated and taken down. Data
traffic on other embedded DSX-1 circuits will not be disturbed. Note that while
the DS3 MUX is in the OOS-M mode, no alarms will be passed to the network,
including those of circuits that may already be in service on the MUX. After the
APS circuit is turned up, be sure to reset the MUX to the In Service (IS) mode as
indicated in Step 6.0.1 to regain alarm notification.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 3 of 12
NOTE
If a single multiplexer module is used, skip Step 2.1.3. For redundant MUX
applications, continue with 2.1.3 below. When using a single multiplexer,
disregard all references to the Offline MUX.
3.
Ensure that Linked Provisioning is Enabled on MUX A, and install the second
MUX in Slot B of the Total Access 3000, using Steps 1 and 2 above for the B
slot MUX.
This will allow MUX B to be configured as MUX A when MUX B is installed.
Linked Provisioning is factory defaulted to Enable, however, Linked
Provisioning does not affect Service States. The factory default Service State for
MUX B is Out of Service-Unassigned. Both MUXES are now to be configured
identically, and in the OOS-M service state.
At this point, faceplate LED indicators for MUX A (Online) and MUX B
(Offline) will be as in Table 1.
Table 1. LED Indicators for MUX A and B
ONLINE
POWER - Yellow
STATUS - Green
TEST - Off
LOCKOUT - Off
ONLINE - Green
OFFLINE
POWER - Yellow
STATUS - Green
TEST - Off
LOCKOUT - Off
ONLINE - Off
NOTE
Only one DS3 MUX is required for any data circuit to be operational. Two
modules are used for electronics redundancy of the DS3 circuit.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 4 of 12
1.4
Provision the DS3 MUX

NOTE
There are no settings on the SCU that will affect APS operation of either the
DS3 MUX units or the HTU-C line cards.
1.
Logon to Total Access system (see DLP-716, located in the System Manual, for
detailed logon procedure).
2.
If you are building a new DS3 circuit, provision the DS3 MUX modules
according to circuit parameters. If the HDSL H-LSS circuit is to be turned up in
an existing Total Access 3000 with DS3 feed, assume that the parameters have
already been set for the DS3 circuit. Disregard this step and continue.
3.
When channel mapping the DS3 MUX to individual slots configured for
protection switching, it is necessary to map a channel only to the MAIN
(odd-numbered) slot. If a fault condition occurs and a protection switch is made
from the MAIN circuit to the AUX circuit, the channel is temporarily mapped by
the DS3 MUX into the AUX (even-numbered) slot and a Failure notice attached
to the MAIN (odd) slot. Follow the steps below for mapping a channel to the
MAIN slot. For this procedure, the technician needs to know which embedded
DSX-1 in the incoming DS3 data stream to map to the appropriate APS slot in
the Total Access 3000. Do not continue without this information. In a newly
installed DS3 MUX, that has not been changed from factory defaults, the
embedded DSX-1s in the DS3 will be mapped to the like-numbered slot (i.e.
DSX-1#1 to Slot 1, DSX-1#2 to Slot 2, up to DSX-1#28 to Slot 28).
1.)
2.)
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
Access the Main menu of the DS3 MUX module and select Option 8,
Channel Mapping.
At the bottom of the screen where you see Selection or Enter Mapping
(DS1#/Slot#), enter the number of the embedded DSX-1 followed by
/ and the appropriate slot number, then <Enter>. This action will
assign the desired DSX-1 to the slot in the Total Access 3000.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 5 of 12
WARNING
Assigning the incorrect embedded DSX-1 from the DS3 to a slot in the Total
Access 3000 could disrupt existing traffic.
4. APS configuration of the DS3 MUX units is NOT required for the HTU-Cs to be
in HLSS configuration. The two APS configurations operate independently of
each other. If APS is desired on the MUX units, please see DLP-725, MUX
Module APS Configuration Procedure, for details.
NOTE - APS Faceplate Pushbutton

1. When activated with the Test/Enable switch on the Offline unit, it forces a
switch to protection. (Offline MUX becomes Online MUX).
2. When activated with the Test/Enable switch from the ONLINE unit, it
toggles the APS Lockout Status.
1.5
Install the HTU-C

The Total Access 3000 HTU-C delivers a T1 signal over an HDSL local loop. The
local loop in the HLSS configuration includes two independent 4-wire circuits. The
two HTU-Cs communicate to their respective remote units, the HTU-Rs. When an
HLSS switch occurs, the AUX circuit takes over transmitting the data load from the
MAIN circuit until the MAIN circuit is restored.
1. Install The HTU-Cs into Total Access 3000
1.)
Gently but firmly push the HTU-C into the appropriate odd-numbered
slot (which will be the MAIN HDSL circuit). Compatible slots can be
any slot pair that starts with an odd number (MAIN) and includes the
adjacent (to the right) even-numbered slot (AUX). Compatible slot pairs
are further designated by the bracket notation around the slot pairs on
the silk screen just below the physical slots on the front of the Total
Access 3000. Simultaneous thumb pressure at the top (above the PWR
LED) and bottom (below the ACT LED) of the unit will ensure a good
seat of the HTU-C pins into the backplane connector. Repeat this step
for the AUX HTU-C to be installed in the adjacent (even, to the right)
slot.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 6 of 12

2.)
2.
Push the ejector tab up and closed against the HTU-C faceplate.
Provision the HTU-C

If Module Auto-Provisioning is enabled on the SCU, and if the new cards are of
the same type as the former, the provisioning of the former access cards of the
two Total Access 3000 slots will be written to the new access cards upon
installation. If this is an initial installation, the units will require provisioning to
appropriately configure them out of the factory default states.
1.)
2).
3.)
Logon to Total Access system (see DLP-716, located in the System

Manual, for detailed logon procedure).
Check to ensure the HTU-C line cards are correctly provisioned
according to circuit parameters. Under the Provisioning menu, set
numbered option, Network Source, to Auto MUX. This option causes
the HTU-C to look to the ON-LINE MUX for its data in the event of a
protection switch between the MUX modules.
Ensure the provisioning of both the MAIN and AUX HTU-Cs is
identical, except for the following options:
a.)
Provision the MAIN unit to OOS-M mode.
b.)
Provision the AUX unit to the OOS-U mode.
4.) Enable protection switching:

a.)
b.)
c.)
d.)
Access the MAIN Menu of the HTU-C in the oddnumbered (MAIN) slot.
Select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
Select Option 1, Protection Mode.
To enable protection switching, select Option 1, Enable.
NOTE
Unless the AUX circuit is in the OOS-U mode, the operator will not be able
to change the Protection mode of the MAIN HTU-C.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 7 of 12

Table 2. Protection Configuration Option Settings
Protection Options
Settings
Description
Protection Mode ........................................... Auto ................................... System automatically switches from Main to AUX with
no user intervention. Switch is initiated by loss of sync
on Main or exceeding BER Threshold. Alarms and
switchover notification are generated via the SCU.Auto
Mode also allows reversion back to Main once sync is
re-established or the error count drops below the BER
Threshold.
Auto Hold .......................... Auto Hold provides system protection identical to Auto
Mode, except that reversions are not allowed to the Main
without user intervention. Once switchover has occurred
to the Aux circuit, data can only be reverted by
modifying any option on the terminal screen or by the
pushbutton on the faceplate of the HTU-C.
Manual Main ..................... Manual Main requires manual switchover the AUX
circuit by user intervention. Switchover can be
accomplished via the faceplate pushbutton or the
terminal screen. The SCU will make notification of a
Main circuit failure, but will not report switchover until
the data is manually switched to the Aux circuit.
ManualAux ........................ Data is manually forced to the AUX circuit and will
remain there until the mode is changed via the terminal
screen or by pushbutton on the faceplate. All other
option settings are ignored while in this mode.
Manual Dis ........................ In the Manual Dis mode, the Main and AUX circuits act
as two independent units. Separate data can run on either
circuit without affecting the operation of the other. All
other option settings are ignored while in this mode.
Minimum Hold-in Time .............................. 1-99 minutes ...................... Defines the minimum time that data will remain on the
Aux circuit. This option is only valid when in Auto or
Auto Hold Protection Modes.
BER Threshold ............................................. 1E-4, 1E-5, ........................ Allows the user to set the Bit Error Rate that will cause
switchover from the Main to AUX circuit when
1E-6, 1E-7
exceeded. BER Threshold can also be set from the Main
cards protection configuration and should coincide with
the settings used on the AUX card.
BER Interval ................................................ 5, 10, 15 minutes ............... Defines the interval over which errors will accumulate
for comparison with the BER Threshold setting. BER
Interval can also be set from the Main cards protection
configuration and should coincide with the settings used
on the AUX card.
Lock-in Hours .............................................. 0-99 .................................... Defines duration of lock-in to the AUX circuit upon
reaching the Switch to Aux Limit.
Switch to AUX ............................................. Limit1-9 ............................ Defines the number of times APS can switch from Main
to AUX over the defined Lock-in Check Interval before
the system is locked to the AUX circuit for the defined
Lock-in Hours.
Lock-in Check Interval ................................ 1-99 .................................... Defines the interval over which the Switch to AUX Limit
is compared before locking in the APS to the AUX
circuit for the Lock-in Hours duration.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 8 of 12

e.)
Set Options 2 and 3, BER Threshold and BER Interval

(see Table 2).
f.)
Back out of the menu for the MAIN slot and access the
HTU-C in the even-numbered (AUX) slot.
g.)
Select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
h.)
Option 1, Protection Mode, will have been set to AUTO.
If you desire to provision a different HLSS mode, select
Option 1, and choose between Auto, Manual Aux,
Manual Main or Auto Hold.
i.)
Set Options 2-7 as desired on the AUX unit
(see Table 2).
5.) From the provisioning menu of the AUX circuit, reset the AUX unit to OOS-M.
6.) Logoff the system.
a.)
From the Total Access Menu, select Option 7, Logoff,
and press <Enter>.
b.)
From the Exit and Logoff screen, select Y and press
<Enter>.
1.6
Install the Dual-slot Stand-alone Housing

See the associated Installation and Maintenance practice, P/N 61245034L1-5, for
mounting and wiring instructions.
NOTE
Ensure the customer equipment is correctly wired to the Main DS1 terminal
block inside the H-LSS housing or utilizes the MAIN DS1 RJ-48 jack on
the back of the housing.
1.7
Install the HTU-R

The HTU-R terminates local loop HDSL signals originating from the Central Office
(CO) unit and transforms the HDSL signal into traditional DS1 signals to be delivered
to the customer.
1.
Install the HTU-R into the Dual-slot Remote Housing

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 9 of 12

1.)
4.
Connect the individual 4-wire HDSL circuits to the HDSL terminal

block inside the Dual slot remote housing. The 4-wire MAIN circuit
will connect to the Loop 1 and Loop 2 terminals labeled MAIN and
the 4-wire AUX circuit will connect to the Loop 1 and Loop 2 terminals
labeled AUX.
2.)
Gently but firmly push the HTU-R into the lower dual slot remote
housing slot. Repeat this step for the second HTU-R in the upper slot.
3.)
The HTU-Cs will transfer provisioning data to the HTU-Rs upon powerup. Some provisioning of the HTU-R, however, may be necessary due to
hardware dipswitches and jumpers. See the Installation and Maintenance
practice for the specific HTU-R utilized by your company.
Upon provisioning of the HTU-Rs, the faceplate LEDs should read as shown in
Table 3.
Table 3. Faceplate LED Indications
HTU-C (MAIN)

DSX - On
TST - Off
LP1, LP2 - Green
ALM - Red
ACT - Green
HTU-C (AUX)

DSX - On
TST - Off
LP1, LP2 - Green
ALM - Off
ACT - Off
HTU-R (MAIN)
LP1, LP2 - Green

DS1 - Off
ALM - Red
LBK - Off
HTU-R (AUX)
LP1, LP2 - Green

DS1 - Off
ALM - Red
LBK - Off
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 10 of 12
NOTE
The condition of the ALM, DSX and DS1 LEDs depends upon the status of
the equipment on the ends of the installed circuit. If both terminations of the
circuit are appropriately configured and prepared to pass data, the HTU-C
ALM LEDs will be out, the HTU-C DSX LEDs will be green, the MAIN
HTU-R DS1 LED will be green and ALM off, while the AUX HTU-R DS1
will be off, and ALM red.
1.8
Reset All Equipment to Operating Condition

When the customers at both ends of the circuit have turned up their equipment and are
running data (or test patterns, or are in loopbacks, or some other condition that will
preclude the generation of alarms), the HTU-Cs and DS3 MUX can be placed In
Service to restore the alarm generating functions of the equipment to the network.
1.
From the Total Access 3000 DS3 MUX Provisioning screen, select Option 4,
Service State, and place the DS3 MUX into In Service. If dual MUXES are
being utilized, place MUX B In Service.
2.
From the Total Access 3000 HTU-C Provisioning Screen for both the MAIN
and AUX HTU-Cs, select the Service State option, and place both HTU-Cs
In Service.
Placing the DS3 muxes In Service will change the Power LED from yellow to green.
Placing the HTU-Cs In Service will change the PWR LED from slow flashing green to
steady green.
1.9
Disabling Protection Switching

Disabling the protection switching mode from the circuit converts both the MAIN and
AUX circuits into independent stand-alone HDSL local loops.
NOTE
Ensure that data has been removed from the AUX circuit before proceeding
with the next step. Disabling protection switching before removing data from
the AUX loop will cause a loss of signal condition on that loop. Under normal
circumstances, the data on the HLSS circuit will be running on the MAIN
HDSL circuit, and this precaution is unnecessary.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 11 of 12

1.
Disabling protection switching.

1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
7.)
Access the AUX HTU-C and select Option 2, Provisioning, from the
HDSL Main Menu.
From the Provisioning menu, choose the Service State option.
Select Option 3, Out Of Service-Unassigned.
Escape out of the AUX HTU-C menus and proceed to the MAIN
HTU-C menu.
From the Main Menu, select Option 7, Protection Configuration.
From the Protection Configuration menu, select Option 1, Protection
Mode.
Choose Option 2, Disable.
NOTE
There is no provisioning required at the HTU-Rs to remove protection
switching capability. Upon completion of the above procedure, the MAIN
circuit is an independent, non-protected HDSL circuit. The AUX circuit is
also now independent, with protection switching disabled, and currently
OOS-U.
2.
Adjust wiring at Dual remote housing. Once protection switching has been
disabled in the HTU-Cs, the housing is internally wired to provide a DS1 signal
to both the MAIN DS1 and AUXILIARY/TEST DS1 RJ-48 jacks. Connect the
customers equipment to the AUX RJ-48 jack or the AUX DS1 terminal strip in
the housing to complete a second independent HDSL circuit.
NOTE
DSX-1 DS3 multiplexer channel mapping to the even-numbered (formerly
AUX) slot in the TA3000 chassis will not automatically be restored.
Assignment of an embedded DSX-1 in the DS3 data stream to the even slot
will have to be made prior to using the slot as a DS3-fed HDSL circuit.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TANTP514-1E

NTP-514
Page 12 of 12
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP000-1E

SECTION 6
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Acceptance Test Procedures

Then Go To:
Acceptance Test Procedure for Total Access Shelf, CO Installation
ATP-601
Acceptance Test Procedure for Total Access DS3 Multiplexer

Module Installation
ATP-602
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP000-1E

SECTION 6
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP601-1E

ATP-601
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Acceptance Test Procedure for

Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf, CO Installation
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that one or
more Total Access 3000/3010 shelves have been properly installed in a central office
(CO). An Acceptance Test Checklist is provided at the end of this procedure for
sign-off on completion of this phase of installation.
1.1.2
Before beginning this procedure, you should have completed all of the installation
tasks detailed in NTP-501.
1.1.3
Tools and Materials Required

Total Access 3000/3010 Test Access Module (TAM) Card, P/N 1181980L1
Oscilloscope (optional)
A remote terminal computer system with a modem (if Total Access 3000/3010 is
connected to an external modem)
Access to a computer with LAN access (if the Total Access 3000/3010 is connected
to a LAN)
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP601-1E

ATP-601
Page 2 of 4
1.2
Acceptance Test Procedure ATP-601

1. Verify DSX-1 Wiring
Use the procedure outlined in DLP-720 to verify the wiring of each shelf to the
DSX-1 cross connect. If a wiring problem is found, correct the problem before
proceeding.
2. Verify MDF Wiring
Use the procedure outlined in DLP-721 to verify the wiring of each shelf to the
MDF. If a wiring problem is found, correct the problem before proceeding.
3. Verify Timing Connections
If timing connections have been made to the Total Access 3000/3010 Shelves,
perform the steps indicated below.
A. Check for Timing Source Port Alarm
Visually check the output card on the timing source to ensure that no alarm
condition is associated with the output port connected to the Total Access
shelves.
B.
Check Waveform with Oscilloscope
This test step is optional but is recommended in cases where the clock wire
run is long or is routed past possible sources of interference. Use the
procedure in DLP-722 to verify that the input clock waveform meets
requirements.
4. Verify Fan Operation
If Fan Units have been installed with the system, perform the steps indicated
below.
A. Visually Verify Fan Operation
Visually verify that all of the fans are operating and that no obstructions are
present to impede free air flow through the shelves.
B.
Verify Fan Unit Alarm Input to SCU
Use the procedure outlined in DLP-723 to verify that the fan unit generates
the proper alarm when it fails.
5. Verify Alarm Relay Output Connections
If a shelfs alarm relays have been wired to external alarming equipment, use the
procedure in DLP-724 to verify that the alarm relay outputs are properly wired and
functioning.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP601-1E

ATP-601
Page 3 of 4
6. Verify Inter-shelf Communication
If the installation consists of multiple shelves which have been wired together via
the RS-485 management bus, perform the procedure outlined in DLP-725 to verify
that the shelves are properly connected and communicating.
7. Verify External Modem Connection
If an external modem connection has been made, place a call from a remote
modem into the Total Access 3000/3010 modem to verify that the modem is
properly connected and functioning. Once the call is connected, logon to the
system and verify that the menus are properly displayed. When menu verification
is complete, logout of the shelf and disconnect the call.
8. Verify OSS Connections
If one of the shelves is connected to a remote OSS via TL1 over X.25, use the
procedure in DLP-726 to verify that the connection to the OSS is functioning
properly. Repeat DLP-726 for each OSS connection.
9. Verify IP LAN Connection
If the shelf is connected via the 10BaseT port to a network, use the procedure in
DLP-727 to verify that the network connection is properly configured and
working.
1.2.1
Followup Procedures
for installation of multiplexer modules and access modules. If a multiplexer module is
to be installed in any of the shelves, find the Installation and Turnup Procedure (NTP)
for that module and proceed with the installation. Once any multiplexer modules have
been installed and tested, use the installation instructions for the access modules to
install them as required.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP601-1E

ATP-601
Page 4 of 4
1.3
Acceptance Test Checklist for ATP-601
1.3.1
Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf Installation in a Central Office
Checklist
Test Step
Completed (Initial)
1. Verify DSX-1 Wiring

2. Verify MDF Wiring
3. Verify Timing Connections
4. Verify Fan Operation
5. Verify Alarm Relay Output Connections
6. Verify Inter-Shelf Communication
7. Verify External Modem Connection
8. Verify OSS Connections
9. Verify IP LAN Connection
NOTE
Write N/A by any step which is not applicable to the installed configuration.
Comments
Installation Engineer Sign-off

Name (print):
Date Completed:
Signature:
Customer Sign-off
Name (print):
Date Accepted:
Signature:
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 1 of 6
1.1
Acceptance Test Procedure for Total Access 3000/3010

DS3 Multiplexer Module Installation
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that one or
both Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 Multiplexer Modules have been properly installed
in a Total Access 3000/3010 system chassis. An Acceptance Test Checklist is provided
at the end of this procedure for sign-off on completion of this phase of installation.
1.1.2
tasks detailed in NTP-504.
1.1.3

Total Access 3000/3010 DS3 MUX, ADTRAN P/N 1181020L1/L2
Oscilloscope Tektronix TDS 540 w/75 adapter (AMT 75) or equivalent
A remote terminal computer system with a modem (if Total Access 3000/3010 is
connected to an external modem)
Access to a computer with LAN access (if the Total Access 3000/3010 is connected
to a LAN)
DS-3 pattern generator (TTC 310 or equivalent)
DS-3 transmission analyzer (TTC 310 or equivalent)
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 2 of 6
1.2
Acceptance Test Procedure ATP-602

1. Verify LED Operation
Verify operation of faceplate LEDs by pressing the Test/Enable button. LEDs
should illuminate while button is pressed.
2. Verify BNC Connector Installation
Use the procedure outlined in DLP-708 to verify the installation of the BNC
module connector to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf backplane. If an installation
problem is found, correct the problem before proceeding.
3. Verify Coaxial Cable Installation
Use the procedure outlined in DLP-709 to verify the installation of the coaxial
cable and its connection to the BNC module. If a problem is found with the
installation or connection, correct the problem before proceeding.
4. Pulse Shape Measurement
Use an oscilloscope and the diagram below to verify the pulse shape produced by
the module.
A. Set up measuring circuit as shown in Figure 1.
B. Set up the pattern generator for an Isolated Ones Pattern (001).
C. Set the DS-3 line buildout for appropriate line length.
Use an oscilloscope and the diagram below to verify the pulse shape
produced by the module.
D. Set the DS-3 Network Loopback to Looped.
E. Verify the pulse shape of the DS-3 output signal is within the specified
waveform mask in Figure 2.
5. Power Level Test
A. Connect the test circuit shown in Figure 3.
B. Set the LBO to Long in the DS-3s Provisioning Menu.
DS-3 Pattern Generator
Oscilloscope
TX
RX
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
(225 or 450 ft.)

TX
75
+/- 5%
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
TDS 754A
TTC-310
Figure 1. Pulse Shape Measurement

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 3 of 6
Amplitude Normalized to Peak Location
1.0
0.5
-1.0
-0.5
0.5
1.0
1.5
Time Slots Normalized to Peak Location
Figure 2. DS-3 Output Signal Mask
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Set the DS-3 pattern generator for an unframed all ones pattern (AIS).
Set the DS-3 Network Loopback option to Looped in the DS-3s Test Menu.
Set the DS-3 pattern generator to Local Timing.
Set the DS-3 MUX to Loop Timing.
Verify that the wideband power measurement of the DS3 signal is between
-4.7 dBm and +3.6 dBm.
6. Line Rate Accuracy Test
B. Set pattern generator to Local Timing.
RX
TX
DS-3 Transmission Analyer

(450 ft.)
75
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
TTC-310
TTC-310
Figure 3. Power Level Test Circuit

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 4 of 6
C.
D
E
Set the DS-3 pattern generator for a normal test pattern (i.e. QRSS, 220-1,
etc.).
Set the DS-3 Network Loopback.
Verify RX frequency is 20 ppm ( 895 bits/sec) or better.
7. Output Jitter Level Test

B. Set the DS-3 pattern generator to Local Timing.
C. Set the DS-3 test pattern to QRSS on the pattern generator.
D. Set the DS-3 MUX to Loop Timing.
E. Set up a Network Loopback on the DS-3 MUX.
F. Set the LBO to Long on the DS-3 MUX.
G. Verify that the wideband jitter is 5.0 UI and the highband jitter is
0.1 UI, where 1 UI = 22.4 ns.
8. Pulse Amplitude Test
Use the circuit illustrated in Figure 1 for this procedure.
A. Select an isolated ones pattern on the pattern generator.

(225 ft.)
TX
RX
TX
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
DS-3 Transmission Analyzer

(225 ft.)
RX
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
TTC-310
TTC-310
Figure 4. Line Rate Accuracy Test Circuit
TX
DS-3 Transmission
Analyzer

(<150 ft.)
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
RX
TX
(<150 ft.)
WECO 728A
or
Equivalent
TTC-310
TTC-310
Figure 5. Output Jitter Level Test Circuit

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 5 of 6
B.
C.
D.
1.2.1
Verify the pulse amplitude of the positive peak is between +0.36 and
+0.85v peak.
Verify the pulse amplitude of the negative peak is between 0.36 and
-0.85v peak.
Verify the ratio of the positive to negative isolated pulses are between
0.90 and 1.10.
Followup Procedures
for installation of access modules. These access module NTPs and DLPs are in the
production process and will be added to the manual upon completion. Please refer to
the Installation and Maintenance practice for the specific module for the installation
instructions.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAATP602-1E

ATP-602
Page 6 of 6
1.3
Acceptance Test Checklist for ATP-602
1.3.1
Total Access 3000/3010 DS-3 Multiplexer Module Installation

Checklist
Test Step
Completed (Initial)
1. Verify LED Operation

2. Verify BNC Connector Installation
3. Verify Coaxial Cable Installation
4. Pulse Shape Measurement
5. Power Level Test
6. Line Rate Accuracy Test
7. Output Jitter Level Test
8. Pulse Amplitude Test
Comments
Installation Engineer Sign-off

Name (print):
Date Completed:
Signature:
Customer Sign-off
Name (print):
Date Accepted:
Signature:
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP000-1E

SECTION 7
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Detailed Level Procedures

Then Go To:
Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard
DLP-701
Connecting a Composite Clock Input to a Shelf
DLP-702
Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock to a Shelf
DLP-703
Connecting a Shelf to MLT Equipment
DLP-704
Connecting a Shelf to DLT Equipment
DLP-705
Connecting a Shelf to a DSX-1 Cross-Connect
DLP-706
Connecting a Shelf to the MDF
DLP-707
Installing the High-Speed Connector Module
DLP-708
Connecting the High-Speed Cabling
DLP-709
Connecting the External Alarm Outputs
DLP-710
Connecting a Fan Module Alarm
DLP-711
Making RS-485 Bus Connections Between Shelves
DLP-712
Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem
DLP-713
Connecting a Shelf to the X.25 Network
DLP-714
Connecting the Terminal or PC to the Craft Port
DLP-715
Logging on to the System
DLP-716
Setting TIRKS Parameters in the SCU
DLP-717
Setting IP Parameters for an SCU
DLP-718
Routing Fiber through the Heat Baffle
DLP-719
Verifying Wiring to the DSX-1 Cross-connect
DLP-720
Verifying Shelf Wiring to MDF
DLP-721
Verifying Composite Clock Waveforms
DLP-722
Verifying the Fan Unit Alarm Connection to the SCU
DLP-723
Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections
DLP-724
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP000-1E

SECTION 7
Page 2 of 2
Then Go To:
Verifying Intershelf Communication
DLP-725
Verifying the SCU Communication over the X.25 Network
DLP-726
Verifying SCU Communications over an IP LAN
DLP-727
Upgrading Software in the System Controller Unit
DLP-728
System Configuration Archive Save
DLP-729
System Configuration Archive Restore
DLP-730
Provisioning the DS3 Multiplexer Module
DLP-740
Provisioning the STS-1 Multiplexer Module
DLP-741
Provisioning the OC-3 Multiplexer Module
DLP-742
Configuring a Multiplexer Module for APS Operation
DLP-743
Configuring the Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 List 2 MUX Module

with Subtended STS-1 List 2 MUX Modules in Single TID Mode
DLP-744
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP701-1E

DLP-701
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Removing and Replacing the Rear Plastic Guard
NOTE
1.1.2
Introduction
Removal of the rear plastic guard is required for wiring several special-purpose leads
(such as clock inputs) to the appropriate backplane terminals. When executed in order,
most procedures in this system manual only require the guard to be removed and
replaced once. Connecting clock inputs or test leads later will require removal/
replacement of the guard.
1.1.3
Removing the large, rear plastic guard usually requires that a Total Access shelf be
mounted in a rack or set on a flat work surface. Refer to NTP-501, Section 1.3 for
more information on rack mounting.
1.1.4

3/16-inch wrench
WARNING
CAUTION
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP701-1E

DLP-701
Page 2 of 4
1.2
Detailed Level Procedure 701

1. Remove Plastic Guard Covering Wire-wrap Terminals
Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the long, thin Plexiglass guard
covering the wire-wrap terminals at the bottom of the backplane. It is held in place
with two screws.
2. Remove Standoffs
Using a 3/16-inch wrench, remove the standoffs which hold the guard removed in
Step 1. This will free the lower two tabs holding the backplane guard in place.
3. Remove Remaining Screws
Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the remaining five screws (two at
each end, one at the tab on top) holding the guard in place.
4. Remove Guard
Carefully remove the guard by pulling it straight back from the backplane.
NOTE
Wire tie anchors are pre-installed on the backplane 64-pin AMP connectors
cable ends. It is easier to thread the wire ties through the anchors while the
backplane guard is removed. ADTRAN recommends using the wire ties
provided to secure the AMP connectors. Thread them through the anchors at
this time, with the guard off.
5. Reinstall Guard
Line up the Plexiglass guard with the holes provided for securing it to the
backplane. Slight compression of the guard may be required to fit the guard below
pairs 2 and 4, and above pairs 6 and 8.
6. Replace Guard on Backplane
Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, reattach the backplane guard to the
backplane using the five Phillips-head screws provided (two at each end, one at the
tab on top). Do not screw in the bottom two tabs yet.
7. Secure Lower Guard Tabs
Using a 3/16-inch wrench, secure the two lower guard tabs with the standoffs
removed in Step 2 of this DLP.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP701-1E

DLP-701
Page 3 of 4

8. Install Plexiglass Guard
Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, reinstall the long thin Plexiglass guard using
the screws (2) threaded into the standoffs just reinstalled.
1.3
Followup Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which called out this DLP and
continue with the tasks indicated there.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP701-1E

DLP-701
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP702-1E

DLP-702
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Composite Clock Input to a Shelf
NOTE
1.1.2
Introduction
The Total Access 3000/3010 terminates an external composite clock source for
applications requiring composite clock timing. This procedure assumes that an
appropriate drop wire (shielded two-wire with drain) from the CO clock source has
been run to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and is ready for connection. A detailed
illustration (Figure 1) of the Total Access 3000/3010 Clock Connections may be
found on page 4 of this DLP. See PREP-401, Section 3, of this system manual for a
further description of the clock source wire.
1.1.3
Remove the large Plexiglass guard from the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane if it is
not already removed from a preceding Installation and Turn up procedure. See
DLP-701 for details about removing the guard.
1.1.4

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP702-1E

DLP-702
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
Connect a Composite Clock to a Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf

1. Locate Clock wiring
Determine the + (or T), (or R), and drain or ground wires from the CO clock
source.
2. Strip the Ends of the Clock Wire for Wire-Wrapping
Using wire strippers, strip 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches of the insulation from the end of
the clock source twisted pair, shielded, drop wire.
3. Connect the + Lead
Using a wire wrap tool, wire wrap the + or T terminal from the clock source to
the pin marked + on connector P4/P10, EXTCLK A-IN.
4. Connect the Lead
Using a wire-wrap tool, wire wrap the - or R terminal from the clock source to
the pin marked - on connector P4/P10, EXTCLK A-IN.
5. Terminate the Shield Drain Wire
Wire wrap the drain or shield pin from the clock source to the pin marked S on
connector P4/P10, EXTCLK A-IN, if required.
6. Dress Out the Wiring
Tie the clock source wire neatly to the frame.
7. Set Termination Mode
On the daughter card mounted to the left of, and slightly below, P4/P10, move the
jumper so that the left two pins, labeled TERM IN, are connected together.
Up to eight Total Access 3000/3010 shelves may be daisy chained to a single output
from the timing source, so only one wire run is required from the timing source for an
installation of up to eight Total Access 3000/3010 shelves. Use wire of the same type
as was used for the wire run from the CO clock source to the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP702-1E

DLP-702
Page 3 of 4

1.2.2
Interconnect up to eight shelves from a single timing source

1. Measure for Needed Wire
Determine the length of wire required to run from the first shelf, connector P4/P10
to the second shelf, connector P4/P10, that is to be wired in the same daisy chain.
Leave approximately 1 inch to 1 and 1/2 inches for wire wrapping.
2. Strip the Ends of Clock wire for Wire Wrapping
Using wire-strippers, strip approximately 1 inch to 1 and 1/2 inches from both
ends of the wire run.
3. Connect + and Leads, Terminate the Shield Drain Wire of the Source
Shelf
Using a wire-wrap tool, wire wrap the +, and drain wires to the +, and
S terminal pins of connector P4/P10, A-IN, on the left side of the backplane.
Run the wire from P4/P10 on the source shelf to connector P4/P10, EXTCLK
A-IN, on the receiving shelf.
5. Connect + and Leads, Terminate the Shield Drain Wire of the
Receiving Shelf
Using a wire wrap tool, wire wrap the +, and drain wires of the wire run to
the +, and S terminals of P4/P10 on the receiving shelf.
6. Set Termination Mode
On the daughterboard of the receiving shelf, mounted to the left of, and slightly
below P4/P10, move the jumper so that the right two pins, labeled TERM OUT,
are connected together.
7. Adding Additional Shelves to the Chain
Repeat steps 1-6 for each Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, up to a total of eight in
the daisy chain, that is to be interconnected on the single CO timing source.
NOTE
In any daisy chain of Total Access 3000/3010 shelves using a single timing
source, only the first shelf in the chain should have the timing daughterboard
jumpered to TERM IN. All the remaining shelves in the chain should have
the daughterboard jumpered to TERM OUT.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP702-1E

DLP-702
Page 4 of 4
CLOCK
SOURCE
Perform Steps Below in the Order
Listed
S
R(-) T(+)
P4
EXTCLK
A - IN
+
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS 1
TERM
OUT
P4
EXTCLK
A - IN
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TERM
IN
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS 2
TERM
OUT
P4
EXTCLK
A - IN
TERM
OUT
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS 8
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Clock Connections
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP703-1E

DLP-703
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Primary and Secondary T1 Clock to a Shelf
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
An external T1 clock source input may be required when deploying some services
from Total Access 3000/3010. This procedure assumes that an appropriate drop wire
(shielded two-wire with drain) from the CO clock source has been run to the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf and is ready for connection. Refer to PREP-401, of this
System Manual for a further description of the clock source wire. SONET applications
in particular may require the use of dual T1 clocks. See the installation and
maintenance practices of the cards being installed, both for the multiplexer slots and
the access modules, to determine your clock requirements.
1.1.2
not already removed from a preceding Installation and Turn-up procedure. See
DLP-701 for details about the guard removal.
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
WARNING
CAUTION
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP703-1E

DLP-703
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1.
Locate Clock Wiring

To connect a T1 clock input to Total Access 3000/3010, Determine the +, -
and drain or shield wires from the CO clock source.
2. Strip the Ends of the Clock Wire for Wire Wrapping

Using wire strippers, strip 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches of the insulation from the end of
the clock source drop wire.
3. Connect the + Lead
Using the wire-wrap tool, wire wrap the + wire from the clock source to the pin
marked + on connector P18/P11, EXTCLK B-IN.
4. Connect the - Lead
Wire wrap the - wire from the clock source to the pin marked - on connector
P18/P11, EXTCLK B-IN.
Trim the shield wire flush with the insulation. Do not wire wrap to the S pin.
Route the clock wire out of the right side of the frame and neatly tie it down.
7. Connect Secondary T1 Clock if Required
To Connect a secondary T1 clock to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, repeat
Steps 2 through 6, using connector P24/P13 extclk C-IN instead of connector
P18/P11, EXTCLK B-IN.
NOTE
Diagrams for connecting primary and secondary T1 clock sources for the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf are shown in Figure 1.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP703-1E

DLP-703
Page 3 of 4
SECONDARY T1
CLOCK SOURCE
P24
T+ R -
EXTCLK
C-IN
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS
S
T+
PRIMARY T1
CLOCK SOURCE
EXTCLK
P20
+
B - OUT
P19
+
A - OUT
P18
+
B - IN
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Clock Connections
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP703-1E

DLP-703
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP704-1E

DLP-704
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to MLT Equipment
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Metallic Loop test access is gained by wiring into the connector labeled LOOP TEST
ACCESS, P13/P23, on the left side of the backplane. Typically, there will be test loops
from the CO test head to gain access into the metallic loop. Determine where these
leads are, and run them to the Total Access shelf before proceeding.
1.1.2
not already removed from a preceding Installation and Turn up procedure. See
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP704-1E

DLP-704
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
To Access the Metallic Loop Testing Facilities on Total Access

3000/3010:
1. Locate Test Loop Wiring
After you have located the test loops and run them to the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf, use wire strippers to strip approximately 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches from the test
leads.
2. Connect the T and R Leads
Using the wire wrap tool, wire wrap the central office T and R leads to the
Total Access 3000/3010 T and R pins , respectively, on terminal P13/P23 (see
Figure 1).
Wire wrap the drain wire of the cable to the top pin labeled S on P13/P23.
4. Connect the T1 and R1 Leads
Wire wrap the central office T1 and R1 leads to the Total Access 3000/3010
T1 and R1 pins, respectively, on terminal P13/P23.
The shield drain wire should be grounded at either the test head or the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf, but not both. If the drain wire has been terminated from
Step 3 above, do not also terminate the drain wire to the test head. Instead, trim
the drain wire off at the insulation.
Neatly tie down the test cable pair.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP704-1E

DLP-704
Page 3 of 4
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS
TERM
OUT
T
R
S
T1
R1
P13
LOOP
TEST
ACCESS
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 MLT Connections
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP704-1E

DLP-704
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP705-1E

DLP-705
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to DLT Equipment
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Digital, or Logical Loop test access is gained by wiring into the connector labeled
DSX-1 TEST ACCESS, P23/P22, on the right side of the backplane under the large
plastic guard. Typically, there will be test loops from the CO test head to gain access
into the logical loop. Determine where these leads are, and run them to the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf before proceeding.
1.1.2
not already removed from a preceding Installation and Turn-up procedure. See
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP705-1E

DLP-705
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
To Access the Digital Loop Testing Facilities on Total Access 3000/

3010:
1. Locate Digital Loop Wiring
After you have located the test loops and run them to the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf, use wire strippers to strip approximately 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches from the test
leads.
2. Connect the T and R Leads (see Figure 1)
Using the wire-wrap tool, wire wrap the central office T and R leads to the
Total Access 3000/3010 T and R pins, respectively, on terminal P23/P22.
3. Terminate the Sheild Drain Wire
Wire wrap the drain wire of the cable to the top pin labeled S on P23/P22. The
shield drain wire should be grounded at either the test head or the Total Access
3000/3010 shelf, but not both. If the drain wire is grounded at the test head, Step
1.3 should not be done. Instead, trim the drain wire off at the insulation.
4. Connect the T1 and R1 Leads
Wire wrap the central office T1 and R1 leads to the Total Access 3000/3010
T1 and R1 pins, respectively, on terminal P23/P22.
5. Terminate the Sheild Drain Wire
Wire wrap the drain wire of the cable to the bottom pin labeled S on P23/P22.
The shield drain wire should be grounded at either the test head or the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf, but not both. If the drain wire has been terminated from
Step 3 above, do not also terminate the drain wire to the test head. Instead, trim
the drain wire off at the insulation.
Neatly tie down the test cable pair.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP705-1E

DLP-705
Page 3 of 4
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TERM
OUT
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS
P23
DSX-1
TEST
ACCESS
1
T
R
S
T1
R1
S
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 DLT Connections
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP705-1E

DLP-705
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 1 of 6
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to a DSX-1 Cross Connect

NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
No wire wrapping is necessary for data connections on either the network or loop side
of the Total Access 3000/3010 platform. All the data connections on the shelf itself are
accomplished via eight 64-pin/50-pin AMP connectors that mate with the eight pairs
on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane. This DLP calls out the pin assignments for
the DSX-side inputs to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
For each AMP connector attached to the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane,
ADTRAN recommends a wire tie be attached on the cable (left) side of the connector.
Wire ties are shipped with the system for customer convenience. Earlier steps in the
installation process encouraged that the wire ties be threaded through the wire tie
anchors mounted on the screw on the left side of each connector prior to reinstalling
the large Plexiglass guard. If the wire ties were not threaded through the anchors
earlier, they can be threaded with the large guard left in place, but it may be faster to
remove the guard. Refer to DLP-701 for details on removal/installation of the guard.
1.1.2
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelf should be mounted in its permanent location in the
CO before connecting to the DSX-1 cross connect panel.
1.1.3
Small, straight-slot screwdriver

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
Waxed polyester twine
WARNING
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 2 of 6

CAUTION
1.2
Detail Level Procedure 706

1. Determine the Required DSX-1 Connections
Consult the appropriate Application Guide in Section Three, Application Guides,
of this manual to determine the connectors that you need for the shelfs intended
application. Typical applications will require either pairs 5, 6, 7 and 8, or only
loops 7 and 8 to be wired to the DSX-1 cross connect.
2. Connect the 64-pin Connectorized Cables to the Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf
As you face the rear of the shelf, pairs 5, 6, 7, and 8 are staggered left to right in a
row across the lower half of the backplane. On the Total Access 3010 pair 8 is
mounted directly below pair 7. The connectors attach with screws on the right end
and with a wire tie on the left end. Wire ties are provided with the shelf. If the wire
ties have not been threaded through the nylon anchor holes in a previous step, they
need to be threaded now. It may be necessary to remove the large plastic shield to
thread the anchors (see DLP-701).
3. Route the Data Cable from the Shelf to the DSX-1 Cross Connect
Follow company SOP to route the cables through the overhead routing trays to the
DSX-1 cross connect, tying down as necessary for a neat and secure cable run.
Route the cable for pairs 5 and 7 down the IN side of the DXS-1 cross connect.
Route the cable for pairs 6 and 8 down the OUT side of the DXS-1 cross
connect.
4. Wire Wrap the Stub Ends of the Data Cables to the DSX-1 Cross-connect
using Table 1 through Table 4 Provided on Pages 3 through 6 of this DLP
as a Guide
The tables provide the proper connections for standard color/binder inside-plant
data cable. Connector pin numbers are provided in the table for use with nonstandard color-coded data cables.
5. Neatly Tie Down the Cross Connect end of the Data Cable According to
Company Guidelines
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 3 of 6
Table 1.
Pair 5 Connection
to DSX-1
B
Perform
StepsINBelow
in the
Order Listed Cable Pair
Pairs 5 and 7
and
Pair 7 Connection to
DSX-1 IN A for
Total Access 3000
AMP Pin #
33
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
61
29
62
30
63
31
64
32
Binder Group
Color
NONE
BLUE
Wire Color
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
REDBLU
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
REDBLU
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
DSX
DSX B IN
Position #
DSX A IN
Position #
Tip/Ring
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
Shield Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 4 of 6
Table 2.

Pairs 6 and 8
AMP Pin #
33
1
34
2
35
3
36
4
37
5
38
6
39
7
40
8
41
9
42
10
43
11
44
12
45
13
46
14
47
15
48
16
49
17
50
18
51
19
52
20
53
21
54
22
55
23
56
24
57
25
58
26
59
27
60
28
61
29
62
30
63
31
64
32
Cable Pair
Binder Group
Wire Color
Color
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
REDBLU
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
BLK/GRN
NONE
GRN/BLK
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BRN
BLUE
BRN/WHT
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
REDBLU
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
DSX B OUT
Position #
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
DSX
DSX A OUT
Position #
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
Tip/Ring
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
Pair 6 Connection
to DSX-1 OUT B
and
Pair 8 Connection
to DSX-1 OUT A for
Total Access 3000
Shield Ground
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 5 of 6
Pair 5 Connection
Perform
StepsINBelow
in the Order Listed
to DSX-1
B
and
Pair 7 Connection to
DSX-1 IN A for
Total Access 3010
Pairs 5 and 7
Table 3.
26
1
Cable Pair
Binder Group
Wire Color
Color
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
27
2
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
2
2
2
2
T
R
28
3
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
3
3
3
3
T
R
29
4
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
4
4
4
4
T
R
30
5
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
5
5
5
5
T
R
31
6
REDBLU
BLU/RED
6
6
6
6
T
R
32
7
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
7
7
7
7
T
R
33
8
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
8
8
8
8
T
R
34
9
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
9
9
9
9
T
R
35
10
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
10
10
10
10
T
R
36
11
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
11
11
11
11
T
R
37
12
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
12
12
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
13
13
13
13
T
R
39
14
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
14
14
14
14
T
R
40
15
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
15
15
15
15
T
R
41
16
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
16
16
16
16
T
R
42
17
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
17
17
17
17
T
R
43
18
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
18
18
18
18
T
R
44
19
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
19
19
19
19
T
R
45
20
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
20
20
20
20
T
R
46
21
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
21
21
21
21
T
R
47
22
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
22
22
22
22
T
R
48
23
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
49
24
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
50
25
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
AMP Pin #
38
13
NONE
DSX B IN
Position #
1
1
DSX
DSX A IN
Position #
1
1
Tip/Ring
T
R
Ground
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP706-1E

DLP-706
Page 6 of 6
Table 4.

Pairs 6 and 8
26
1
Cable Pair
Binder Group
Wire Color
Color
WHT/BLU
BLU/WHT
27
2
WHT/ORG
ORG/WHT
2
2
2
2
T
R
28
3
WHT/GRN
GRN/WHT
3
3
3
3
T
R
29
4
WHT/BRN
BRN/WHT
4
4
4
4
T
R
30
5
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
5
5
5
5
T
R
31
6
32
7
REDBLU
BLU/RED
RED/ORG
ORG/RED
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
T
R
T
R
33
8
RED/GRN
GRN/RED
8
8
8
8
T
R
34
9
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
9
9
9
9
T
R
35
10
RED/SLT
SLT/RED
10
10
10
10
T
R
36
11
BLK/BLU
BLU/BLK
11
11
11
11
T
R
37
12
BLK/ORG
ORG/BLK
12
12
12
12
T
R
BLK/GRN
GRN/BLK
13
13
13
13
T
R
39
14
BLK/BRN
BRN/BLK
14
14
14
14
T
R
40
15
BLK/SLT
SLT/BLK
15
15
15
15
T
R
41
16
YEL/BLU
BLU/YEL
16
16
16
16
T
R
42
17
YEL/ORG
ORG/YEL
17
17
17
17
T
R
43
18
YEL/GRN
GRN/YEL
18
18
18
18
T
R
44
19
YEL/BRN
BRN/YEL
19
19
19
19
T
R
45
20
YEL/SLT
SLT/YEL
20
20
20
20
T
R
46
21
VOL/BLU
BLU/VOL
21
21
21
21
T
R
47
22
VOL/ORG
ORG/VOL
22
22
22
22
T
R
48
23
VOL/GRN
GRN/VOL
49
24
VOL/BRN
BRN/VOL
50
25
VOL/SLT
SLT/VOL
AMP Pin #
38
13
NONE
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
DSX B OUT
Position #
1
1
DSX
DSX A OUT
Position #
1
1
Tip/Ring
T
R
Pair 6 Connection
to DSX-1 OUT B
and
Pair 8 Connection
to DSX-1 OUT A for
Total Access 3010
Ground
6TADLP707-1E

DLP-707
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to the MDF

NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
All customer loops from Total Access 3000/3010 will normally go to the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF), or, in the case of the QFO-Cs fiber optic cable, the Fiber
Distribution Frame (FDF). In the CO, the Total Access 3000/3010 data cables go to
the horizontal side of the frame where they are connected to the frame either by
another AMP connector (for data cables connectorized at both ends), or by individual
wire wrapping on the appropriate pins (cables connectorized at one end and stubbed at
the other).
1.1.2
To Connect an AMP Data Cable to the Backplane
Before attaching a cable to a backplane connector, thread one of the provided
wire ties through the wire tie anchor provided on the left side of the backplane
connector.
Threading the wire tie connector prior to connecting the cable will greatly facilitate
getting the end of the tie through both of the anchor holes. Ideally, the wire tie anchors
should have been threaded when the large Plexiglass guard is removed for clock or
loop test wiring. If your application did not require the removal of the guard, you can
thread the wire ties by removing the two smaller shields covering the power terminals
and the alarm connections with a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver. If threading continues
to be a challenge with the smaller guards removed, the larger guard is easily removed
from that point. See DLP-701 for details on removing the guard.
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wirewrap tool
Small straight-slot screwdriver
WARNING
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP707-1E

DLP-707
Page 2 of 4
CAUTION
1.2

1. Remove the plastic protector from the backplane connector to be wired.
2. Noting the orientation of the backplane male connection receptacle, push the
female cable connector onto the backplane connector.
3. Using a small straight-slot screwdriver, snug the screw on the right side
of the cable connector into the hole provided on the backplane connector.
Secure the connector into place on the left side by tightening the wire tie
around the body of the cable connector.
4. Using a side cutter, snip the wire tie end off flush with the barrel of the tie.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for each connector on the backplane being used for your
application.
NOTE
All data cables should exit the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf to the left (as
viewed from the rear), and be neatly tied to the frame as per CO SOP. All other
wiring, for example power, loop test access, clock, external alarms, should
exit to the right and be tied off on the right side of the frame. The ground wire,
attached to J33/J22 on the backplane, should be routed to the nearest suitable
grounding point.
6. Neatly tie off the data cables to the left of the shelf.
7. Route the cables through the cable trays to the terminal blocks on the
horizontal side of the MDF.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP707-1E

DLP-707
Page 3 of 4

8. Connect the cables to the terminal blocks and tie them down neatly. For
connectorized terminal blocks, use the connection scheme given in the
appropriate applications guide. For wire-wrap terminal blocks, use the
pinouts given for each connector in the application guides.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP707-1E

DLP-707
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP708-1E

DLP-708
Page 1 of 2
1.1
Installing the High-Speed Connector Module
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
The high-speed metallic interface is a special adapter mounted to the lower right hand
corner of the backplane. It is a separate part not required for individual DSX-1 network
inputs, but is required for the high-speed electrical input from the network.
See Figure 1 for a depiction of the high-speed connector module.
1.1.2
Each adapter will arrive in its own cardboard box. After unpacking the unit, inspect it
for damage. If the equipment has been damaged, file a claim with the carrier and then
contact ADTRAN Customer Service. (See APX 901, Warranty and Customer Service
for more information.)
1.1.3

WARNING
CAUTION
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP708-1E

DLP-708
Page 2 of 2
1.2

1. Carefully line up the two screw holes in the adapter module with the holes
drilled and threaded in the backplane.
NOTE
The 24 pins on the underside of the adapter module must line up with the
24-pin female connector on the backplane. Do not force the adapter into place.
There are also two guide pins on the adapter at either end of the 24-pin
connector that line up with holes on the backplane to facilitate alignment.
2. Carefully press the adapter into place on the backplane socket.

3. Using a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver, secure the adapter to the backplane
with the two screws provided.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2298
RX
TX
Figure 1. High-Speed Connector Module
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP709-1E

DLP-709
Page 1 of 2
1.1
Connecting the High-Speed Cabling
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
After attaching the high-speed metallic interface module to the backplane, data cabling
must be installed from the network to route the high-speed signal to the Total Access
3000/3010 shelf. This interface will normally be on coaxial cable.
1.1.2
Before the high-speed cabling from the network can be connected, the high-speed
metallic interface connector must be installed. See DLP-708 for information about
installing this module.
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP709-1E

DLP-709
Page 2 of 2
1.2

1. Determine which cable from the network is for transmitting and which is for
receiving.
2. Attach the network transmit cable to the Total Access 3000/3010 upper BNC
connector, labeled RX.
The fitting is a standard BNC connector. Align the outer ring of the cable
connector with the keys on the shelf connector barrel, press the cable in, and turn
approximately one half turn clockwise to the locking dtente.
3.
Attach the network receive cable to the Total Access 3000/3010 lower BNC
connector, Labeled TX.
The fitting is a standard BNC connector. Align the outer ring of the cable
connector with the keys on the chassis connector barrel, press the cable in, and
turn approximately one half turn clockwise to the locking dtente.
NOTE
If the high speed cabling is to be run to the DS3 cross connect panel, the TX
side of the coax adapter on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane should
connect to the TX port on the cross connect, and the RX tot he RX side. If the
cabling is to run to another multiplexer device, the connect as described in
steps 1-3 above.
1.3
4.
Route the coax cable through the cable trays to the DSX-3 cross connect.
Route the cable down the cross connect to the appropriate connection point.
5.
If necessary, trim the cable to length and crimp on the appropriate connector
for connection to the cross connect.
6.
Connect the cables to the equipment connection points on the DSX-3 cross
connect. Connect the TX cable to the TX equipment connector and the RX
cable to the RX equipment.
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP710-1E

DLP-710
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting the External Alarm Outputs
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This DLP explains how to connect external alarm outputs to Total Access 3000/3010.
1.1.2
Before making external alarm connections, the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf should
be mounted in its permanent location in the CO.
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap gun
22 or 24 AWG 2-conductor twisted pair cross connect wire
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP710-1E

DLP-710
Page 2 of 4
1.2

NOTE
Each three-pin alarm header is wired the same way for the specified alarm.
1. Determine whether the external alarm reporting device uses a normally open or
normally closed circuit for alarm relay.
2. Using standard telco cross connect wire, determine and cut the length required to
reach from the alarm headers to the alarm-reporting device.
3. Using wire strippers, strip 1 inch to 2 inches from both ends of the wire.
4. Using a wire-wrap gun, wire wrap one strand to the center pin (common) from the
Total Access alarm relay header, and the other strand to either the NO (normally
open) or NC (normally closed) pin on the relay header. See Figure 1.
5. Connect, using wire wrap or lugs, as appropriate, the two wires to the appropriate
terminals on the external alarm relay device being used.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP710-1E

DLP-710
Page 3 of 4
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
TERM
IN
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS
TERM
OUT
P3
NO
P21
NC
NO
NC
NO
P1
C
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
9
AUX1
AUX2
CRI-V
MAJ-V
MIN-V
CRI-A
MAJ-A
MIN-A
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Alarm Contacts
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP710-1E

DLP-710
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP711-1E

DLP-711
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Fan Module Alarm
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
The Total Access 3000/3010 fan unit uses a normally open circuit to pass a fan
alarm to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf if one or more of the three individual fans
ceases to operate, or power is lost to the fan module itself. Under these circumstances
the circuit closes, causing a -48 Vdc signal to be passed to the Total Access 3000/3010
external alarm input header. The SCU notes the alarm and passes the information as
appropriate.
1.1.2
Since this procedure is used specifically for a fan module alarm, the fan module must
be mounted to an installed heat baffle. For details on mounting heat baffles and fan
modules, see NTP-501, Section 1.3.
1.1.3

Wire strippers
Wire-wrap tool
Phillips-head screwdriver
WARNING
CAUTION
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP711-1E

DLP-711
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Locate the AUX1 header pair on the EXT INPUTS block, P22/P24, on the middle
bottom of the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane. See Figure 1.
2. Using standard telco cross connect wire, determine and cut the length required to
reach from the Total Access 3000/3010 fan module to the AUX1 header. Allow
length for 1 inch to 2 inches for wire wrap, and neat routing out to the right from
the Fan Module and the alarm header.
3. Using wire strippers, strip 1 inch to 2 inches from one end of each wire.
4. Using a wire-wrap gun, wire-wrap one strand to the B input of the Total Access
3000/3010 AUX1 header (P22/P24). Connect the other end to the fan module unit
ALM B terminal using an appropriately sized crimp-on terminal and the ALM B
screw on the fan terminal strip.
5. Wire wrap one end of the other strand to the A input of the Total Access 3000/
3010 AUX1 header (P22/P24). Connect the other end to the fan module unit ALM
A terminal using an appropriately sized crimp-on terminal and the ALM A screw
on the fan terminal strip.
6. Replace the plastic guard over the backplane.
7. Replace the plastic guard over the fan unit terminal block.
NOTE
If you are going to wire a number of shelves together using the RS-485 bus
(P2/P21), do not replace the guard at this time. The guard will be replaced after
the RS-485 interconnection.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP711-1E

DLP-711
Page 3 of 4
FUSE/1 AMP
-48V RET -48V RET -48V DC

A
B
A
-48V DC
B
ALM
A
ALM
B
P22
EXT INPUTS
RMT
AUX1
AUX2
DO NOT REMOVE
BEFORE INSERTION
INTO PCB
AMP
ACO
TERM
IN
TOTAL ACCESS
CHASSIS
TERM
OUT
P3
NO
P21
NC
NO
NC
NO
P1
C
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
9
AUX1
AUX2
CRI-V
MAJ-V
MIN-V
CRI-A
MAJ-A
MIN-A
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Fan Connections and Alarm Contacts
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP711-1E

DLP-711
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP712-1E

DLP-712
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Making RS-485 Bus Connections Between Shelves
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Up to 16 Total Access shelves can be linked together for management from a single
shelf designated as host. The other shelves will be configured as clients. This feature
allows conservation of valuable external management ports within the CO and
provides local or remote management for up to 16 shelves from the craft interface on
front of the host SCU or the external management ports.
The daisy chain of shelves linked together via the RS-485 bus can be up to 4000 feet
long. Only one SCU, located at either end of the chain, is designated as the Host SCU.
The SCU that is to function as the Host, must be provisioned as a Host. The SCUs that
are to function as clients must be provisioned as clients. Procedures for designating
SCUs as Host or client are covered in NTP-501 of this system manual.
NOTE
ADTRAN reccomends that the Total Access 3000/3010 shelves not be
daisy-chained when using SNMP. In this configuration, each shelf must be
equipped with a SCU and connected to an Ethernet hub.
1.1.2
The Total Access 3000/3010 shelves should be mounted in their permanent location in
the CO before making RS-485 bus connections.
1.1.3
Shielded, twisted pair interconnect wire, with drain wire

Wire-wrap tool
Wire cutters
Wire strippers
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP712-1E

DLP-712
Page 2 of 4
WARNING
CAUTION
1.2

1. Measure and Pre-cut Wire
Determine and cut the length of wire necessary to reach from the RS-485
wire-wrap header, P2/P21, in the first shelf in the chain to the RS-485 wire-wrap
header, P2/P21, in the second shelf. Remember to allow for stripping the ends of
the wire, routing the wires out to the right side of the shelf to the frame, and tying
down in accordance with CO SOP.
2. Make Wire-wrap Connections to the Host Shelf
Using the wire-wrap tool, connect the shielded, twisted pair interconnect wire to
the RS-485 wire-wrap header, P2/P21, on the host Total Access 3000/3010
backplane. Connect the two conductors to the OUT A and B pins, and the shield
or drain wire to the OUT ground pin. See Figure 1 for wiring details.
3. Make Wire-wrap Connections to the Next Shelf
Run the interconnect wire to the backplane of the next in the chain, routing the
wire out to the right side of the frame. Using the wire-wrap tool, connect the two
conductors of the interconnect wiring to the RS-485 wire-wrap header, P2/P21, on
the backplane of the Client shelf. The two conductors will be wired to the A and B
IN pins, and the ground or shield wire should be at the end of the insulation.
Take care to connect the A pins of each shelf together, and the B pins together. Do
not cross the polarities. The drain wire should be connected at only one end to the
ground pin, but not both. See Figure 1.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP712-1E

DLP-712
Page 3 of 4
4. Connect any Additional Shelves

If there are more shelves to be connected, repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each shelf
to be added to the chain. Disregard the designation of Host and client for
additional shelves. Each shelf after the first will be a client shelf on the daisy
chain. It is important to note that there is only one shelf designated as host on any
daisy chain of up to 16 shelves.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP712-1E

DLP-712
Page 4 of 4
RS-485

HOST
CHASSIS
1
P2
IN
OUT
RS-485
CLIENT
CHASSIS
2
P2
IN
OUT
UP TO 16 CHASSIS
RS-485
CLIENT
CHASSIS
15
P2
IN
OUT
RS-485
CLIENT
CHASSIS
16
P2
IN
OUT
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Interbank Connections

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP713-1E

DLP-713
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to an External Modem
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Total Access 3000/3010 can be accessed and managed via modem; however the Total
Access 3000/3010 SCU does not support hardware flow control. In order to connect to
the Total Access 3000/3010 via modem, the modem must be a full-featured modem,
such as the Paradyne COMSPHERETM 3800 Plus series, with the capability to ignore
hardware flow control as required by the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, and described
below.
The Total Access 3000/3010 can be accessed and managed via modem, allowing the
same capabilities to the user as if connected to the local craft access port on the front
of the SCU. Access is provided by a female DB-25 connector, J31/J18, and labeled
ADMIN, located on the upper right corner of the backplane. When the Total Access
3000/3010 shelf is called, the user can access not only the particular shelf to which it is
connected, but also any shelf daisy chained to it via the RS-485 bus when the shelf has
been designated as host and the RS-485 bus has been enabled on every shelf in the
chain.
1.1.2
The Total Access 3000/3010 should be mounted in its permanent location in the CO
before connecting to an external modem.
1.1.3

Modem
Modem cable
Small, Straight-Slot screwdriver
WARNING
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP713-1E

DLP-713
Page 2 of 4
CAUTION
1.2

1. Mount the modem to be used with Total Access 3000/3010 in its permanent
position.
2. Connect power to the modem per manufacturers instructions.
3. Configure the modem to be used as follows:
Speed
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Flow control
Auto answer
DTR
RTS
9600 bps
8
none
1
off or none
on
ignore
ignore
4. Connect the male DB-25 connector end of the data cable to the female DB-25
connector, J31/J18, labeled ADMIN, located on the upper right corner of
the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane; screw down the cable.
5. Route the data cable to the modem.
6. Connect the other end of the cable to the modem configured as described
above.
7. Connect the modem to POTS line as required by the manufacturer.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP713-1E

DLP-713
Page 3 of 4
NOTE
To complete the connection to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, the Total
Access 3000/3010 must now be called from a PC configured as a VT100
terminal, with communication software set for 9600, 8-N-1, and no flow
control.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP713-1E

DLP-713
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP714-1E

DLP-714
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting a Shelf to the X.25 Network
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Total Access 3000/3010 can send and receive TL1 commands for management over an
X.25 packet switched network. The Total Access 3000/3010 SCU has a built in X.25
PAD, and the shelf is ready to connect to the network via a female DB-25 connector.
Access to the network is via an RS 232 port, J30/J17, labeled NTWK MGMT,
located on the lower left side of the backplane between the power terminals and the
frame ground lug.
NOTE
The DB-25 connector on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane for connection
to the X.25 packet network conforms to the RS-232D Standard. The pinouts
are listed on page 3 of this DLP. Check the pinouts of the X.25 switch to
ascertain compatibility with the standard as implemented by the Total Access
3000/3010 shelf.
1.1.2
Total Access 3000/3010 should be mounted in its permanent location in the CO before
connecting to the X.25 network. An SCU is required in the shelf to be connected via
X.25.
1.1.3

A DB-25 data cable with male connector on one end (for Total Access 3000/3010).
An appropriate connector to connect to the X.25 switch on the opposite end. It must
be of sufficient length to reach from the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane to the
X.25 switch and be neatly tied down in accordance with CO SOP.
WARNING
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP714-1E

DLP-714
Page 2 of 4
CAUTION
1.2

1. Connect the DB-25 data cable male connector to the NTWK MGMT port,
J30/J17, on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane.
2. Connect the other end of the data cable to the designated port of the X.25
switch. See Table 1 for the pinout of the NTWK MGMT port.
3. Configure the port on the X.25 switch per Table 2.
NOTE
The CO X.25 network administrator must configure the X.25 switch for the
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf, accomplishing tasks such as assignment of an
LDN number for the shelf.
NOTE
It is possible to remote the X.25 interface over a DDS line of up to 64 Kbps
capacity, with the network designer designing the specific interface. Some
smaller COs without an X.25 switch may desire to take advantage of this
capability.
1.2.1
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP714-1E

DLP-714
Page 3 of 4
Table 1. NTWK MGMT Connetor Pinout (J30)

The DB-25 connector on the Total Access 3000/3010 backplane
for connection to the X.25 packet network conforms to the
RS-232D Standard. The pinouts are:
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description
Frame Ground
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Carrier Detect
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Transmit Clock
Not Used
Receive Clock
Not Used
Not Used
Data Terminal Ready
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
From
DTE
DCE
DTE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DCE
DTE
-
Check the pinouts of the X.25 switch to ascertain compatibility

with the standard as implemented by the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP714-1E

DLP-714
Page 4 of 4
Table 2. X.25 Switch Parameters
Parameter
Value
Logical Channel Layout

Channel Configuration
1-way (incoming calls only) or 2-way
Baud Rate
Up to 64 Kbps
Number of SVCs
Up to 4
Number of PVCs
0 (not supported)
Link Layer (Layer 2)

Frame Size (N1)
1064 to 3072 bits
Retry Limit (N2)
Ack Timer (T1)
20 sec (20000 milliseconds)
Time Out (T3)
3 sec (3000/3010 milliseconds)
Window Size (K)
Packet Layer (Layer 3)

Interface Mode
DCE
Throughput Rate
Up to 64 Kbps
Packet Size
128 bytes
Packet Window
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP715-1E

DLP-715
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Connecting the Terminal or PC to the Craft Port
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Total Access 3000/3010 shelf management and provisioning is facilitated by a series
of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. Connecting either a
VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the craft interface on the SCU
faceplate allows access to the menus and management features of Total Access 3000/
3010. This section in the Installation and Turn-up procedure specifies how to connect
the VT100 terminal or PC to the Total Access SCU.
The front craft access port for the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is located on the
faceplate of the SCU and is a DB-9 connector. Access can also be made to the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelf from the backplane through the port labeled ADMIN, J31/
J18. It is a DB-25 connector, and is located on the upper right corner of the backplane.
NOTE
Connecting to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf from the front craft port on
the SCU requires a straight serial data cable. Connection to the Total Access
3000/3010 shelf via the rear connector on the backplane requires the use of a
null modem cable, because that port is configured for a modem and expects
to see DCE equipment.
1.1.2
An SCU unit must be installed in the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and the shelf must
be powered for terminal communication to function.
1.1.3

VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software
Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP715-1E

DLP-715
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
Connecting a VT100 Terminal to Total Access 3000/3010

1. Set the parameters of the VT100 terminal to:
9600 baud rate
8 data bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
2. If the terminal has a parallel setting, disable it and use serial setting.
3. If you are using the rear Total Access 3000/3010 ADMIN connector,
use a null modem cable with a male DB-25 connector on the Total
Access 3000/3010 end.
4. If you are using the front craft port, use a serial cable with a male
DB-9 connector on the Total Access 3000/3010 end.
5. Plug the male end of the data cable into the Total Access 3000/3010
shelf. Make connection to the VT100 terminal as appropriate for
your equipment.
1.2.2
Connecting a Personal Computer Emulating a VT100

Terminal to Total Access 3000/3010
Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will
emulate a VT terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal or Hyperterminal are two
such examples in the Windows format, but there are many other adequate,
commercially available software packages, virtually all of which will allow your PC or
laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC
or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for Total Access 3000/3010.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP715-1E

DLP-715
Page 3 of 4

1. Set the Parameters of the Communications Software to:
9600 baud rate
8 data bits
No parity
1 stop bit
No flow control
2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate com port (as
opposed to dial up connection).
3. If you are using the rear Total Access 3000/3010 ADMIN connector,
use a null modem cable with a male DB-25 connector on the Total
Access 3000/3010 end.
4. If you are using the front craft port, use a serial cable with a male
DB-9 connector on the Total Access 3000/3010 end.
5. Plug the male end of the data cable into the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for your equipment.
You are now ready to connect and logon to Total Access 3000/3010, as described in
DLP-716 of this system manual.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP715-1E

DLP-715
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP716-1E

DLP-716
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Logging On to the System
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Once connected to the Total Access 3000/3010 SCU via either a VT100 terminal or
PC configured as a VT100 terminal, it is necessary to logon to the system to gain
access to the management and provisioning functions. This section of the Installation
and Turn-up Procedure details the specific procedure for logging on to the system, and
accessing the various management and provisioning functions.
1.1.2
DLP-715, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the Craft Port, needs to be completed
before logging on to Total Access 3000/3010.
1.1.3

Data cable to connect to VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal
VT100 or PC configured as a VT100 terminal
1.2
1.2.1
To log in to the Total Access 3000/3010 menu structure

1. After connecting to the system as described in DLP-715, a blank screen will
appear.
Pressing any key will bring up the logon screen. Upon entering the logon screen,
the cursor will blink at the Account Name field.
2. At the Account Name field, input the Account Name, and press <Enter>.
The cursor will blink at the Password field.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP716-1E

DLP-716
Page 2 of 4

3. At the Password field, input the Password, and press <Enter>.
The Account Names and Passwords for the Total Access 3000/3010 system are as
follows:
Table 1. Account Names and Passwords
Account Name
Default Password
ADMIN
PASSWORD
READ_WRITE
PASSWORD
READ_ONLY
PASSWORD
NOTE
The Account Name and Password are to be entered in all capital letters.
The Total Access 3000/3010 system has three levels of access granted to a user.
The lowest level of access is READ-ONLY, and allows a user to see, but not change,
the current configuration of the system. The next level, READ-WRITE, allows the
user to both see and change system configuration parameters.
The third level of access, for network system administrators, is the ADMIN level.
This access is reserved for network system administrators.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP716-1E

DLP-716
Page 3 of 4

4. Upon entering the correct password, the Total Access 3000/3010 main menu is
presented on the screen (see Figure 1 below)
Shelf:
Total Access System
Unacknowledged Alarms: CRITICAL MAJOR ALERT INFO
03/09/01 18:27
Total Access
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
System
Common
Common
Access
System
Logoff
Controller
A - [DS3CSM]
B - [............]
Modules
Alarms
Selection :
? - System Help Screen
Figure 1. Total Access 3000/3010 Main Menu Screen

5. You are now logged on to the Total Access menu system
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP716-1E

DLP-716
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP717-1E

DLP-717
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Setting TIRKS Parameters in the SCU
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
Remote management systems require a specific address and description for every
system they manage. The Target ID (TID) and Shelf Number must be registered with
the management system before it can find and manage Total Access 3000/3010. This
procedure assigns the codes to the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf for use with the
management system.
NOTE
For up to 32 Total Access 3000/3010 shelves to operate on a daisy chain
connected by the RS-485 bus, all the shelves on the chain must have a
unique Shelf Number to identify the specific shelf on the chain. More
detailed information about the RS-485 is located in DLP-712, and
NTP-501 of this system manual.
NOTE
The Target ID (TID) and the Shelf Number will be issued from the TIRKS
system and should be provided to the installer as part of the Total Access 3000/
3010 installation package. If not, see the CO system administrator for Target
ID (TID) and Shelf Number assignment. For COs not using TIRKS, values
must still be put into the Target ID (TID) and Shelf Number locations if the
shelf is to be used as a host or client shelf on the RS-485 bus.
1.1.2
You must be connected and logged on to set the TIRKS parameters in the SCU.
1.1.3

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP717-1E

DLP-717
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
To set the Target ID (TID) in the system:

2. From the Total Access 3000/3010 main menu, select option 1, System
Controller, and press <Enter>.
3. From the System Controller menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
4. From the Provisioning menu, select option 5, TL1, and press <Enter>.
5. From the TL1 menu, select option 2, Target ID, and press <Enter>.
6. Enter the 11 character Target ID and press <Enter>.
The Target ID issued from TIRKS will be an 11 digit code similar to the following
format: HTVLALEXD01
Where:
HTVL designates the city
AL
designates the state
EX
identifies the Central office or remote terminal
D
identifies equipment type (D is administrative equipment)
01
identifies the piece of equipment of that type at the CO
7. Press <Esc> to return to the main menu.
1.2.2
To set the Shelf Number, continue with the following:

1. From the Provisioning menu, select option 5, TL1, and press <Enter>.
2. From the TL1 menu, select option 1, Shelf Number/Shelf ID, and press
<Enter>.
3. Input the Shelf Number and press <Enter>.
NOTE
The Shelf Number is a numerical value between 1 and 254 (inclusive) and is
used to identify the shelf as distinct on the RS-485 bus. Only 16 shelves are
supported on a single RS-485 bus; therefore, there should not be matching
Shelf Numbers on the same RS-485 bus.
4. Press <Esc> to return to the main menu.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP717-1E

DLP-717
Page 3 of 4
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP717-1E

DLP-717
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP718-1E

DLP-718
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Setting IP Parameters for an SCU
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
If the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf is to be connected to an IP network for Telnet,
TFTP, or SNMP management, there are several IP parameters that need to be set for
the shelf to communicate with the network. These parameters along with the
procedures for setting them, are described in this DLP.
1.1.2
This procedure assumes that an SCU is installed in the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
1.1.3

WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP718-1E

DLP-718
Page 2 of 4
1.2
1.2.1
Set IP Parameters for an SCU

1.
Logon to the system

2.
3.
From the Total Access 3000/3010 main menu, select option 1, System
Controller, and press <Enter>.
From the System Controller menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
NOTE
Ethernet Interface (steps 5-12) only required if Ethernet on backplane
(J32/J28) is used.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
From the Provisioning menu, select option 3, Network, and press <Enter>.
From the Network menu, select option 1, Ethernet Interface, and press <Enter>.
From the Ethernet Interface menu, select option 1, IP Address, and press <Enter>.
Input the IP Address and press <Enter>.
From the Ethernet Interface menu, select option 2, Subnet Mask, and press
<Enter>.
9. Input the Subnet Mask and press <Enter>.
10. From the Ethernet Interface menu, select option 3, Gateway, and press <Enter>.
11. Input the Gateway and press <Enter>.
12. Press <Esc> once to return to the Network menu.
NOTE
Inband Interface (steps 13-20) only required if the Inband Management
option, through an appropriate MUX is used.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
From the Network menu, select option 2, Inband Interface, and press <Enter>.
From the Inband Interface menu, select option 1, IP Address, and press <Enter>.
Input the IP Address and press <Enter>.
From the Inband Interface menu, select option 2, Subnet Mask, and press
<Enter>.
Input the Subnet Mask and press <Enter>.
From the Inband Interface menu, select option 3, Gateway, and press <Enter>.
Input the Gateway and press <Enter>.
Press <Esc> to return to the main menu.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP718-1E

DLP-718
Page 3 of 4
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP718-1E

DLP-718
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP719-1E

DLP-719
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Routing Fiber Through the Heat Baffle

NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
The Total Access 3000/3010 supports the use of both mux modules and access
modules which use fiber-optic interfaces. The Total Access 3000/3010 Heat Baffle
also serves as a fiber routing tray for routing the fiber optic cable from the front of
fiber-optic modules, across to the left side of the shelf (viewed from the front), and to
the CO overhead fiber routing system. This DLP describes briefly the general
guidelines for routing the Total Access 3000/3010 fiber optic cables.
NOTE
Fiber optic cable is delicate, and can be damaged by rough handling. During
the routing process, be careful to avoid bends in the cable of less than 1-inch
radius.
1.1.2
To route fiber optic cables, this procedure assumes that vertical fiber guides have been
mounted on the frame in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
1.1.3

Medium straight-slot screwdriver
Fiber optic cable
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP719-1E

DLP-719
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Using a medium straightslot screwdriver, remove the front guard from the
heat baffles fiber optic routing tray.
It is held in place with a single screw on each end.
2. Starting with the leftmost fiber-optic module to be used in the shelf, insert the
fiber optic cable into the fiber optic transceiver on the card prior to inserting
the card into the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
Note which fiber is transmit and which is receive.
3. Route the fiber optic cable from the transceiver on the card to the exit at the
top of the card just behind the top end of the faceplate.
The fiber optic cable exits the modules straight up and into the fiber optic routing
tray. As you face the component side of the module, the cable routes above (to the
right of) the metal guide arm on the lower left side of the card, and to the left of
the metal guide arm near the top left side of the card just prior to cable exit. The
fiber optic cable will make a gentle bend from horizontal to vertical in the run
from the transceiver mount to the card exit.
4. Insert the module into the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
Note which is the transmit fiber and which is the receive fiber. Be careful not to
crimp the fiber optic cable between the top edge of the fiber-fed MUX/access
module and the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf.
5. Using the routing clips in the fiber optic routing tray to hold the cable loosely
in place, run the fiber optic cable from its presentation at the top of the
module to the left of the Total Access 3000/3010 routing tray. See Figure 1 for
routing the fiber out the back of the fiber tray and Figure 2 for routing the
fiber from the side of the fiber tray.
It is not necessary that the fiber optic cable be threaded into each routing clip it
passes, and in a Total Access 3000/3010 shelf fully populated with fiber-optic
modules, the fiber optic cables for the last modules installed on the right side of
the shelf will not fit into the leftmost routing clips.
6. If the vertical fiber optic cable guides are mounted on the back of the Total
Access 3000/3010 frame, route the fiber optic cable to the rear of the shelf and
out over the back of the baffle.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP719-1E

DLP-719
Page 3 of 4
HST
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 1. Routing Cable out the Back
HST
C
R
A
F
T
Figure 2. Routing Cable from the Side
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP719-1E

DLP-719
Page 4 of 4

7. If the vertical fiber optic cable guides are mounted on the front of the Total
Access 3000/3010 frame, route the fiber optic cable out the cutout located on
the left front side of the fiber routing tray.
8. Continue the routing of the fiber optic cable up the vertical fiber routing
guide, onto the CO overhead fiber routing tray, and on to the Fiber
Distribution Frame.
9. Using a straight-slot screwdriver, replace the front guard to the fiber routing
tray. The fiber optic cable will route out the top of the fiber-optic module, and
behind the front guard. There is access engineered into the fiber routing tray
so that the cable routes behind the front guard without being compressed.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP720-1E

DLP-720
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying Wiring to the DSX-1 Cross Connect
NOTE
by the convention a/b. The a represents the Total Access 3000 parameter the
and b represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For example, the
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that a Total
Access 3000 system has been properly wired to the DSX-1 cross connect. This
procedure should be performed by two people: one at the shelf being tested and the
other at the DSX-1 cross connect.
1.1.2
Before beginning this procedure, you should have completed all installation tasks
involving the connection of the Total Access 3000 system to the DSX-1 cross connect.
1.1.3

Total Access 3000 Test Access Module (TAM) card
Test Jack, Bantam plug to alligator clips
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP720-1E

DLP-720
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Verify That the Shelf Under Test is Powered
Verify that the shelf to be tested is powered with -48V.
2. Seat the TAM card in the Slot to be Tested
Seat the TAM card in the slot to be tested. If the entire shelf needs to be tested,
start with slot 1. This test may only be performed on the access module slots
labeled 1 through 28. This test may not be performed on the SCU slot or the A and
B MUX slots.
3. Connect the Test Jack to DSX-1 IN A
Locate the position on the DSX-1 cross connect which corresponds to DSX-1 A
for the slot under test. Plug the test jack into the jack labeled IN.
4. Ground Tip and Check for Green Pair 7 LED
Connect Tip of the test jack to frame ground. Visually verify that the LED on the
TAM card labeled Pair 7 is lit green. No other LED on the TAM card should light.
If the LED lights up red, this indicates that the Tip and Ring wires are reversed.
No LED lit indicates no continuity on the Tip.
5. Ground Ring and Check for Red Pair 7 LED
Disconnect the test jacks Tip from Ground. Connect the Ring of the test jack to
frame ground. Visually verify that the LED on the TAM card labeled pair 7 is lit
red. No other LED on the TAM card should light. If the LED lights up green, this
indicates that the Tip and Ring wires are reversed. No LED indicates no continuity
on the Ring.
6. Connect the Test Jack to DSX-1 OUT A
Move the test jack from the IN jack to the OUT jack of the same DSX-1 cross
connect position.
7. Connect tip to Ground and Check for Green Pair 8 LED
Connect the Tip of the test jack to frame ground. Visually verify that the LED on
the TAM card labeled Pair 8 is lit green.
8. Connect Ring to Ground and Check for Red Pair 8 LED
Disconnect the test jacks Tip from ground. Connect the Ring of the test jack to
frame ground. Visually verify that the LED on the TAM Card labeled pair 8 is lit
red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP720-1E

DLP-720
Page 3 of 4
NOTE
Steps 9 through 14 should only be performed if the shelf has Pair 5 and Pair
6 connectors wired to the DSX-1 cross connect.
9. Connect the Test Jack to DSX-1 IN B
Locate the position on the DSX-1 cross connect which corresponds to DSX-1 B
for the slot under test. Plug the test jack into the jack labeled IN.
10. Connect Tip to Ground and Check for Green Pair 5 LED
the TAM card labeled Pair 5 is lit green.
Disconnect the test jacks Tip from ground. Connect the Ring of the test jack to
red.
12. Connect the Test Jack to DSX-1 OUT B
Move the Test Jack from the IN jack to the OUT jack of the same DSX-1 Cross
connect position.
13. Connect Tip to Ground and Check for Green Pair 6 LED
the TAM card labeled pair 6 is lit green.
Disconnect the Test Jacks Tip from ground. Connect Ring of the test jack to
red.
15. Repeat for All Access Module Slots
When performing this test during the initial installation of a shelf, Steps 2 through
14 should be repeated for all 28 access module slots. When performing this test as
part of a troubleshooting procedure, test only the slots involved in the
troubleshooting.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP720-1E

DLP-720
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP721-1E

DLP-721
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying Shelf Wiring to the MDF
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that a Total
Access 3000/3010 system has been properly wired to the Main Distribution Frame
(MDF). This procedure should be performed by two people: one at the shelf under test
and the other at the MDF.
1.1.2
Before beginning this procedure, you should have completed all installation tasks
involving the connection of the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf to the MDF.
1.1.3

Total Access 3000/3010 Test Access Module (TAM) Card
Test Jack Wire-wrap post slide-on connectors to alligator clips
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP721-1E

DLP-721
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Verify that the Shelf Under Test is Powered
Verify that the shelf to be tested is powered with -48V.
2. Seat the TAM card in the Slot to be Tested
Seat the TAM card in the slot to be tested. If the entire shelf needs to be tested,
start with slot 1. This test may only be performed on the access module slots
labeled 1 through 28. This test may not be performed on the SCU slot or the A and
B MUX slots.
3. Connect Tip of Pair 1 on the MDF to Ground
Locate the position on the MDF which corresponds to Pair 1 for the slot under test.
Use the test jack to connect the wire-wrap pin labeled T to frame ground.
4. Check for Green Pair 1 LED
Visually verify that the LED on the TAM card labeled Pair 1 is lit green. No other
LED on the TAM card should light. If the LED lights up red, this indicates that the
Tip and Ring wires are reversed. No LED lit indicates no continuity on Tip.
5. Connect Ring of Pair 1 on the MDF to Ground
Disconnect Tip of Pair 1 from frame ground. Use the test jack to connect the
wire-wrap pin labeled R for Pair 1 to frame ground.
6. Check for Red Pair 1 LED
Visually verify that the LED on the TAM card labeled Pair 1 is lit red. No other
LED on the TAM card should light. If the LED lights up green, this indicates that
the Tip and Ring wires are reversed. No LED lit indicates no continuity on Ring.
7. Connect Tip of Pair 2 on the MDF to Ground
Move the test jack from the Pair 1 position to the Pair 2 position for the same slot.
Connect Tip of Pair 2 to frame ground.
Visually verify that the LED on the TAM card labeled Pair 2 is lit green.
9. Connect Ring of Pair 2 to Ground
Disconnect Tip of Pair 2 from Ground. Connect Ring of Pair 2 to frame ground.
Visually verify that the LED on the TAM card labeled Pair 2 is lit red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP721-1E

DLP-721
Page 3 of 4
NOTE
Steps 11 through 18 should only be performed if the shelf has Pair 3 and Pair
4 connectors wired to the MDF.
11. Connect Tip of Pair 3 to Ground
Disconnect Tip of Pair 3 from ground. Connect Ring of Pair 3 to frame ground.
15. Connect Tip of Pair 4 to Ground
Move the Test Jack from the Pair 3 position to the Pair 4 position for the same slot.
NOTE
Steps 19 through 22 should only be performed if the shelf has the Pair 5
connector wired to the MDF.
19. Connect Tip of Pair 5 to Ground.
20. Check for Green Pair 5 LED.
21. Connect Ring of Pair 5 to Ground.
Disconnect Tip of Pair 5 from Ground. Connect Ring of Pair 5 to frame ground.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP721-1E

DLP-721
Page 4 of 4

22. Check for Red Pair 5 LED.
NOTE
Steps 23 through 26 should only be performed if the shelf has the Pair 6
connector wired to the MDF.
23. Connect Tip of Pair 6 to Ground.
24. Check for Green Pair 6 LED.
25. Connect Ring of Pair 6 to Ground.
26. Check for Red Pair 6 LED.
27. Repeat for All Access Module Slots.
When performing this test during the initial installation of a shelf, Steps 2 through
26 should be repeated for all 28 access module slots. When performing this test as
part of a troubleshooting procedure, test only the slots involved in the
troubleshooting.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP722-1E

DLP-722
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying Composite Clock Waveforms
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that the
composite clock inputs and outputs on the Total Access 3000/3010 shelf meet
requirements to ensure proper clock recovery throughout the clock chain.
1.1.2
Before beginning this procedure, you should have completed the installation tasks
detailed in DLP-702.
1.1.3

Oscilloscope with dual trace capability
Two scope probes
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP722-1E

DLP-722
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Set Up the Oscilloscope
Place the oscilloscope in a position so that the probes can be readily attached to the
rear of the Total Access shelf. Power up the oscilloscope and attach the two
probes.
This procedure requires that the rear plastic guard be removed.

2. Connect the Scope to the Composite Clock Input
Connect one scope probe to the + wire-wrap pin of Connector P4 (EXTCLK AIN). Connect the other probe to the - wire-wrap pin of the same connector.
3. Configure Scope to Display Differential Voltage
Configure the scope to display the voltage difference between the two probes.
Adjust the time and voltage scales to correctly display the waveform. The
waveform should be a square wave with a 5/8 duty cycle.
4. Examine the Clock Waveform for Peak Voltage
Examine the waveform to determine the peak voltage. If the peak voltage is less
than 2.7 V or more than 5.5 V, then the clock signal does not meet specifications.
If a problem exists, verify that the number of loads on the clock chain is equal to
or less than the maximum number supported by the clock source.
If the number of loads is within spec, check the length of the cable run to ensure
that they do not exceed the maximum allowed for the cable type. If the cable is
within spec, verify that only one clock termination is present on the clock chain.
5. Examine the Clock Waveform for Rise and Fall Time
Examine the waveform to determine the rise and fall time. Verify that the rise and
fall time is less than 0.5 microseconds.
If a problem exists, verify that the number of loads on the clock chain is equal to
or less than the maximum number supported by the clock source.
If the number of loads is within spec, verify that only one clock termination is
present on the clock chain.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP722-1E

DLP-722
Page 3 of 4

6. Examine the Clock Waveform for Ringing or Noise
Examine the waveform for any ringing or noise. The waveform of an isolated
pulse should be rectangular and not display significant ringing or noise.
If excessive ringing or noise is present, first verify that only one clock termination
is present on the clock chain. If clock termination is correct, verify that the wiring
is correct and that the clock wire is not routed next to a noise source.
7. Remove the Oscilloscope
Once the waveform has been verified, remove the scope probes from the Total
Access shelf. If the rear plastic guard was removed in Step 1, replace it.

1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP722-1E

DLP-722
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP723-1E

DLP-723
Page 1 of 4
Perform Verifying
1.1
Steps Belowthe
in the
Fan
Order
Unit
Listed
Alarm Connection to the SCU
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that the Fan
Units Alarm Relay contacts have been properly wired to the SCU external alarm
inputs and that the SCU is properly provisioned to indicate a fan unit failure when this
condition is indicated by the fan unit.
This procedure should be performed at installation on each Total Access 3000/3010
shelf that has a Fan Unit installed in the shelfs heat baffle/fiber optic routing tray.
1.1.2
detailed in DLP-711 and provisioned the SCU as indicated in the Shelf Installation
NTP-501.
1.1.3

Fuse Extractor (if required by model of fan fuse in use)
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP723-1E

DLP-723
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Connect to the Shelfs Craft Interface
If you are not already connected to the shelfs craft interface either with a VT100
compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software, use the
procedure in DLP-715 to connect to the craft interface. Alternately, if the shelf is
part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a PC
connected to the network to Telnet into the shelf.
2. Logon to the Shelf
3. Go to the Shelfs Master Alarm Log
From the shelfs top-level menu, select option 5 to go to the System Alarms menu.
From the System Alarms menu, select option 2 to go to the Alarm Logs menu.
4. Verify that no Fan Unit Alarm is Currently Active
Check the Master Alarms Log to verify that no active alarm is indicated for the fan
unit. The fan alarm utilizing the AUX 1 input will by default have a desciption of
EXTN input #1. This can be changed at the User Definable Alarms menu. If an
alarm is indicated, check that the fan unit is powered and working. If the fan unit is
operating but an alarm state is still present, check the wiring between the fan unit
and the Total Access Shelf to verify that it is correct. (See DLP-711 for details of
correct wiring.) Take any corrective action required to clear the alarm state before
proceeding.
5. Locate the Fuse for the Fan Unit
Locate the fuse in the bay fuse panel that feeds that fan unit under test. If no
individual fuse for the fan unit exists on the bay fuse panel, use the fuse on the rear
of the fan unit instead.
CAUTION
Verify that the fuse you have located is the correct fuse. Pulling the wrong fuse
may remove power from an active transmission system and result in
service-affecting problems.
6. Remove the Fan Unit Fuse
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP723-1E

DLP-723
Page 3 of 4

Using the fuse extractor if necessary, remove the fan unit fuse from the bay fuse
panel. If no bay fuse exists for the fan unit, remove the fuse from the rear of the
fan unit instead.
7. Verify that the System Alarm Log Shows the Fan Unit Alarm
Check the System Alarm Log to verify that an active alarm has appeared which
has the description EXTN input #1 associated with it. Verify that the alarm level
matches the user programmable level assigned during the Installation Procedure
(MINOR is the default level for this alarm). If no alarm appears, check the alarm
wiring between the fan unit and the Total Access shelf (wiring details are given in
DLP-711).
8. Replace the Fan Unit Fuse
Replace the fan unit fuse that was removed in Step 6.
9. Verify that the System Alarm Log Shows the Alarm has Cleared
Check the System Alarm Log to verify that the EXTN input #1 alarm has cleared.
The original EXTN input #1 Active Alarm line will remain in the Alarm Log, but
should no longer be reversed video. A new line should be present in the Alarm
Log indicating that the Fan Unit Failure alarm has cleared.
10. Clear Inactive Alarms
At Master Alarm screen, select (C)lear inactive to perform a Clear Inactive
Alarms. Use the Y key to confirm when prompted. This action should remove the
fan alarms from the Alarm Log.
11. Log out of the Shelf
Use the <ESC> key to back up through the menu levels until you are logged out of
the shelf.
12. Repeat the Test for Each Shelf with a Fan Unit.
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for each shelf that has a fan unit installed.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP723-1E

DLP-723
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP724-1E

DLP-724
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying the Alarm Relay Output Connections
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to verify that the Total
Access 3000/3010 shelfs external alarm relay outputs are properly connected to any
office alarm equipment.
This procedure should be performed at installation on each Total Access 3000 shelf
that is wired out to external office alarm equipment.
1.1.2
detailed in DLP-710.
1.1.3

VT100 Terminal or PC with VT100 Terminal Emulation software
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP724-1E

DLP-724
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Connect to the Shelfs Craft Interface
If you are not already connected to the shelfs craft interface either with a VT100
compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software, use the
procedure in DLP-715 to connect to the craft interface.
Alternately, if the shelf is part of a management cluster connected to the local
network, you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the shelf.
Logon to the shelf using the READ-WRITE account name and password (see
DLP-716 for details).
3. Go to the System Controllers Test Alarm Relays Menu
3.1 From the shelfs top-level menu, select option 1 to go to the System
Controller menu.
3.2 From the System Controller menu, select option 4 to go to the Test menu.
3.3 From the Test menu, select option 1 to go to the Test Alarm Relays menu.
4. Configure the Alarm Relay Concentrator for Out of Service or Test
If the shelves are connected to an Alarm Relay Concentrator which is connected to
an upstream alarm system, configure the Concentrator in Out of Service or Test
mode for all of the Total Access 3000 shelves input positions so that no alarms
will be forwarded. (Refer to the Alarm Relay Concentrator documentation.)
5. Check the Critical Audible Relay
Select menu option 1 to toggle the Critical Audible Relay on. Verify that the
Alarm Relay Concentrator indicates a critical audible alarm for the proper shelf
location. Select menu option 1 again to toggle the Critical Audible Relay off.
Verify that the alarm indication clears on the Concentrator.
6. Check the Critical Visual Relay
Select menu option 2 to toggle the Critical Visual Relay on. Verify that the Alarm
Relay Concentrator indicates a critical visual alarm for the proper shelf location.
Select menu option 2 again to toggle the Critical Visual Relay off. Verify that the
alarm indication clears on the Concentrator.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP724-1E

DLP-724
Page 3 of 4

7. Check the Major Audible Relay
Select menu option 3 to toggle the Major Audible Relay on. Verify that the Alarm
Relay Concentrator indicates a major audible alarm for the proper shelf location.
Select menu option 3 again to toggle the Major Audible Relay off. Verify that the
8. Check the Major Visual Relay
Select menu option 4 to toggle the Major Visual Relay on. Verify that the Alarm
Relay Concentrator indicates a major visual alarm for the proper shelf location.
Select menu option 4 again to toggle the Major Visual Relay off. Verify that the
9. Check the Minor Audible Relay
Select menu option 5 to toggle the Minor Audible Relay on. Verify that the Alarm
Relay Concentrator indicates a minor audible alarm for the proper shelf location.
Select menu option 5 again to toggle the Minor Audible Relay off. Verify that the
10. Check the Minor Visual Relay
Select menu option 6 to toggle the Minor Visual Relay on. Verify that the Alarm
Relay Concentrator indicates a minor visual alarm for the proper shelf location.
Select menu option 6 again to toggle the Minor Visual Relay off. Verify that the
11. Logout of the Shelf
Press the <ESC> key until the top level shelf menu is displayed. Select menu
option 7 to logout of the shelf.
12. Repeat the Test for Each Shelf
Repeat Steps 5 through 11 for each shelf.
13. Restore the Alarm Relay Concentrator
If the Alarm Relay Concentrator was re-provisioned in Step 4, restore the
provisioning by taking the input ports for all of the Total Access Shelves out of the
Out of Service or Test mode. Verify that the Concentrator shows no alarm states
for the Total Access Shelves.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP724-1E

DLP-724
Page 4 of 4
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP725-1E

DLP-725
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying Intershelf Communication
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed if two or more Total
Access 3000/3010 shelves are connected together via the RS-485 bus to allow
intershelf communication. This procedure verifies that the Host SCU can properly
communicate with all Client SCUs connected on the RS-485 bus.
1.1.2
detailed in DLP-712. For intershelf communication to succeed, you must have
properly configured the Target ID (TID) and Shelf Number in each SCU and must
have enabled the RS-485 interface on each SCU. In addition, one SCU must be
configured for Host Mode while all other SCUs must be configured in Client Mode.
1.1.3

WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP725-1E

DLP-725
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Connect to the Host SCUs Craft Interface
If you are not already connected to the Host SCUs craft interface either with a
VT100-compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software, use
the procedure in DLP-715 to connect to the craft interface.
NOTE
This procedure may only be performed while connected to the host SCU.
Attempting to perform this procedure while connected to an SCU in Client
Mode will not work.
Logon to the shelf using the ADMIN or READ_WRITE account name and
password.
3. Go to the Auxiliary Shelf Access Menu
3.1 From the main menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press <Enter>.
3.2 From the System Controller menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
3.3 From the Provisioning menu, select option 1, General, and press <Enter>.
3.4 From the General menu, select option 1, Management Ports, and press
<Enter>.
From the Management Ports menu, select option 1, Auxiliary Shelf Access, and
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP725-1E

DLP-725
Page 3 of 4
press <Enter>.
4. Check the List of Shelves for Completeness
Check the list of shelves presented by the SCU to ensure that all shelves connected
on the bus appear. Each shelf should appear listed by CLLI Code and TIRKS ID
Number. The shelf containing the Host SCU should be distinguished by an
asterisk (*).
If a shelf does not appear on the list, check the following in order until the problem
is corrected:
Verify the RS-485 bus wiring between the shelves (see DLP-712 for wiring
details).
Verify that the shelf is powered and that the SCU is active.
Verify that the shelf has been properly provisioned with a CLLI Code and
TIRKS ID Number.
Verify that each shelf in the chain has a unique TIRKS ID Number.
Verify that the shelf has the RS-485 bus enabled.
Verify that only one SCU in the chain is configured for Host Mode.
5. Perform a Bank Connect to the Client Shelf
Pick the first Client shelf from the list. (Do not attempt to select the host shelf
from the list since this connection will not be allowed.) Type the number next to
the shelf and press <Enter> to perform a bank connect to that shelf. The main
menu for the shelf should be displayed.
If the main menu is displayed, then communication between the Host SCU and the
Client SCU is working properly. If communication fails, check the items listed in
the note from Step 4.
6. Disconnect from the Client Shelf
Press <Esc> to return to the Client Shelfs main menu, then select option 6,
Logoff, and press<Enter>. The bank selection menu of the Host SCU will be
displayed.
7. Repeat the Bank Connect for each Client Shelf
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each Client Shelf in the chain.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP725-1E

DLP-725
Page 4 of 4
8. Log out of the Host SCU

Once all tests are completed, hit the <Esc> key until you arrive at the main menu.
Select option 6 to log out of the shelf.
1.3
Followup Procedures
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which called out this
DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 1 of 6
1.1
SCU
Communication
over the X.25
Perform Verifying
Steps Belowthe
in the
Order
Listed
Network
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed to ensure that the SCU
is communicating properly over the X.25 network.
1.1.2
Before beginning this procedure, you should have physically connected the shelf
containing the SCU to the X.25 network (see DLP-714) and completed the
provisioning tasks detailed in DLP-717 for each SCU connected on the RS-485 bus.
1.1.3

WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 2 of 6
1.2

1. Connect to the SCUs Craft Interface
If you are not already connected to the Host SCUs craft interface either with a
VT100-compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software, use
the procedure in DLP-716 to connect to the craft interface.
2. Logon to the SCU

Use the READ_WRITE account name and password to logon to the SCU.
3. Go to the T1 Menu
3.1 From the main menu, select option 1, System Controller, and press <Enter>.
3.2
From the System Controller menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
3.3
From the Provisioning menu, select option 5, TL1, and press <Enter>.
4. Choose the Enter TL1 Command Option

Choose menu option 3 from the TL1 Menu to get to the TL1 command input
prompt.
5. Retrieve the X.25 Status
Issue the following command to retrieve the X.25 status:
rtrv-stat-x25:::1;
6. Verify that the X.25 Status is Correct
Verify that the response is of the form:
<CLLI Code> <date> <time>
M 1 COMPLD
/* Link status 0x50 */
/* Frame status 0x0 */
/* Server 0 status 104 user */
If the response does not match that shown above, use Table 1, Table 2, and
Table 3 to determine the X.25 state.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 3 of 6
Perform
Steps
Below
in the Order Listed
Link Status
Value
Meaning
0x00
No Clear-To-Send (CTS), No Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
0x10
Clear-To-Send (CTS) present, No Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
0x40
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) present, No Clear-To-Send (CTS)
0x50
Normal, CTS and DCD both present
Table 1. Link Status
Frame Status Value
Meaning
0x0 to 0x100
Normal state. Gives the number of frame buffers in use.

This number will normally be either 0x0, 0x1, or 0x2 but
may go higher under heavy traffic.
0x101
Idle
0x102
Setup
0x103
Frame Reject
0x106
Reject Sent
0x108
Busy
0x109
Remote Busy
Table 2. Frame Status Value
Server Status Value
Meaning
0x0 to 0x100
Normal state. Gives the number of frame buffers in use for

that particular server. This number will normally be either
0x0, 0x1, or 0x2 but may go higher under heavy traffic.
0x104
Server Idle and Ready
Table 3. Frame Status Value

2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 4 of 6

If the X.25 status is not correct, check the connection to the X.25 network and
correct the problem before proceeding.
NOTE
If the SCU is to be connected to one or more Operational Support Systems,
the following steps should be performed for each OSS to ensure that the OSS
can communicate with the SCU.
7. Have the OSS Connect to the SCU
Contact the administration center for the OSS and have the personnel at the center
perform a manual connect to the SCU over the X.25 network. You will need to
provide the X.25 LDN in order for the call to be completed. If you are unsure of
the LDN, get it from the X.25 network administrator.
If the attempt to connect is not successful, contact the X.25 network administrator
and report the symptoms of the failure.
8. Have the OSS Perform a TL1 Activate User Command
Once the OSS is successfully connected to the SCU, have the OSS personnel log
in by performing a TL1 Activate User command using the syntax below:
act-user::test:1::<password>;
where <password> is the READ_WRITE password set in the SCU. This will log
the OSS in as user test.
9. Check the X.25 Status to Ensure that the OSS is Properly Logged In
Once the OSS is successfully logged in, issue the following TL1 command on the
local terminal to check the X.25 status:
rtrv-stat-x25:::2;
The response should be:
<CLLI Code> <date> <time>
M 2 COMPLD
/* Link status 0x50 */
/* Frame status 0x0 */
/* Server 4 status 0 user TEST */
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 5 of 6
NOTE
Each user that logs in is assigned to one Server. Servers are assigned from the
bottom up, so that Server 4 is used first, Server 3 next, and so forth.
10. Have the OSS Perform a TL1 Cancel User Command
Ask the OSS personnel to log off the SCU by performing the following command:
canc-user::test:2:end;
Once the log off is completed, have the OSS personnel drop the X.25 call.
11. Repeat for Each OSS
Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for each OSS that should be able to connect to the SCU.
12. Logoff the SCU
Press <ESC> on the local VT100 interface until you arrive back at the Main Menu.
Choose menu option 6 to logoff the SCU.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP726-1E

DLP-726
Page 6 of 6
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP727-1E

DLP-727
Page 1 of 4
1.1
Verifying SCU Communications over an IP LAN
NOTE
This procedure details the test steps which must be performed on the SCU when the
10BaseT port is connected to a local area network to ensure that the SCU is
communicating properly over the network.
1.1.1
Before beginning this procedure, you should have physically connected the shelf to the
local area network and completed the provisioning tasks detailed in DLP-718.
1.1.2

Access to a PC or other computer connected to the local area network
WARNING
CAUTION
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP727-1E

DLP-727
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Ascertain the SCU IP Address
If you do not already have the IP Address for the SCU, either obtain it from the
network administrator or manually check for the address in the Provisioning Menu
of the Network Management Interface.
NOTE
You must logon as System Administrator to modify the IP parameters on the
SCU.
2. Ping the SCU from a Remote Computer on the Network
Using a remote computer system connected to the local area network, perform an
ICMP Ping on the IP Address of the SCU. Verify that the SCU responds properly.
If the SCU fails to respond, try the following:
Verify that the proper IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway
are provisioned in the SCU (see DLP-718 for details).
Verify that the shelf containing the SCU is properly cabled into
the local area network and that the 10BaseT cable is properly seated in
the RJ-45 jack on the rear of the shelf. If multiple shelves are present,
make sure that the network cable is plugged into the proper shelf.
If the Total Access shelf is connected to a hub or other network device
that provides a carrier sense light for each port, verify that the carrier
sense light for the port to which the Total Access shelf is connected is lit.
If this light is not lit, check that cabling between the hub and the shelf.
If none of these steps are successful, contact the administrator of the local area
network for assistance.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP727-1E

DLP-727
Page 3 of 4
NOTE
Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to
perform a Ping command. Most computers running a networked version of
Microsoft Windows or UNIX allow a Ping to be performed by simply
typing ping <IP Address> at a command line prompt. Typically the Ping
program will respond by indicating that the remote IP Address has either
responded in a certain amount of time or that no response was received.
NOTE
Some versions of Ping will continue running until you explicitly tell them to
stop. If the program does not terminate on its own, try typing <Ctrl-C> to get
the program to stop.
3. Telnet to the SCU
From the same computer used in the previous step, Telnet to the SCU and verify
that the Telnet session is properly opened and that a list of shelves is presented.
NOTE
Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to
perform a Telnet. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft
Windows or UNIX allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing Telnet
<IP Address> at a command line prompt. Telnet is a utility common on many
local area networks that allows remote access to another computer or piece of
equipment. Performing a Telnet to a SCU will result in the user being
presented with a list of shelves available for connection. Choosing one of the
shelves from the list will provide access to the same menu interface that is
available through the craft port on the front of the shelf. Some versions of
Telnet will display these menus in the same window from which the Telnet
command was issued while others will open a separate window to display the
Telnet session.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP727-1E

DLP-727
Page 4 of 4
4. Perform an SNMP Query on the SCU

If the SCU is to be managed remotely using an SNMP Management Station, then
the network connection between the SCU and the Management Station should be
tested.
Contact the administrator of the SNMP Management System and provide
them with the IP Address and SNMP Community Name Strings for the
SCU. Have the administrator perform an SNMP query on the MIB II System
Group to ensure that the Management System can access the SCU.
If the SNMP Management System is unable to query the SCU, contact your
network administrator for assistance.
NOTE
The SNMP Community Name Strings are set on the Provisioning Menu of the
Network Management Interface. The default value for the Read Community
Name string is public and the Write Community Name string is private.
1.3
Followup Procedures
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP728-1E

DLP-728
Page 1 of 4
1.1
in the System Controller Unit
Perform Upgrading
Steps Below inSoftware
the Order Listed
NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure provides step-by-step instructions for the upgrading the application
software in the System Controller Unit (SCU). This procedure offers instructions for
using either TFTP or Y-modem protocols for transferring the new software to the
SCU.
1.1.2
Prerequisite Procedures (TFTP)

The following procedures must be completed prior to attempting a software upgrade
on the SCU using TFTP. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before
proceeding. The prerequisite procedures include:
Installation and wiring of a Total Access 3000/3010 shelf and SCU NTP-501
Physical installation of the Multiplexer Module(s) to be used (MUXs are needed
only if the TFTP upgrade will be facilitated by the in-band management channel):
DS3 MUX NTP-504
STS MUX NTP-505
OC-3 MUX NTP-506
Verifying SCU Communications over an IP LAN DLP-727
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP728-1E

DLP-728
Page 2 of 4
1.1.3
Prerequisite Procedures (Y-modem)

The following procedures must be completed prior to attempting a software upgrade
on the SCU using Y-modem. The Y-modem protocol may be used over a variety of
transmission mediums. The prerequisites listed below have qualifying statements. If
the particular transmission medium is not going to be used, skip the corresponding
prerequisite procedure. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before
proceeding. The prerequisite procedures include:
1.1.4
Materials Required
1.2
Making RS-485 Bus Connections Between Shelves DLP-712 (This prerequisite
need only be completed if communicating with client shelves using the RS-485
Bus)
Connecting the Shelf to an External Modem DLP-713 (This prerequisite need
only be completed if communicating with the shelf using an external modem)
Setting IP Parameters for an SCU DLP-718 (IP Parameters are only considered a
prerequisite if using IP over Ethernet or the inband management channel)
Total Access 3000/3010 System Controller Unit
Management connection to the Total Access 3000/3010
Upgrading the SCU using TFTP

1. Save the new firmware file onto a TFTP server reachable by the Total Access
3000/3010 SCU that is to be upgraded.
2. Logon to the SCU.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP728-1E

DLP-728
Page 3 of 4

3. From the Total Access Main menu, select System Controller Unit, and press
<Enter>.
4. From the System Controller Unit menu, select Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
5. From the Provisioning menu, select SCU/System Administration, and press
<Enter>.
6. From the System Administration menu, select Software Update, and press
<Enter>.
7. From the Software Update menu, select TFTP Update, and press
<Enter>.
8. From the TFTP Update menu, select Firmware TFTP Server, and press
<Enter>.
9
Enter and/or verify the IP Address of the TFTP Server containing the
software file.
10. From the TFTP Update menu, select Remote Filename, and press
<Enter>.
11. Enter the name of the file that was saved to the TFTP Server in step 1.
Be sure to include all punctuation and file extensions that are associate with the
file.
12. From the TFTP Update menu, select Initiate Transfer, and press
<Enter>.
13. The TFTP Status will state Transfer in Progress while transferring, and
Transfer Complete when finished
14. The Flash Status will state Flash Write Completed when finished.
Once the Flash Status flashes Flash Write Completed, press <Esc> twice to return
tothe Software Update menu
15. Select Reboot SCU, and press <Enter>.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP728-1E

DLP-728
Page 4 of 4
16. Confirm Reboot by typing <Y> and <Enter>.

This will not disrupt service on the Total Access 3000/3010. The SCU will restart
and the upgrade is complete. The firmware version that is currently installed may
be checked by viewing the Configuration Menu of the SCU.
1.3
Upgrading the SCU Using the Y-modem Protocol

1. Save the new firmware file onto the computer that is being used to control the
upgrade.
2. Logon to the SCU
3. From the Total Access main menu, select System Controller Unit, and press
<Enter>.
4. From the System controller Unit menu, select Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
6. From the System Administration menu, select Software Update, and press
<Enter>.
7. From the Software Update menu, select Y-modem Update, and press <Enter>.
8. Press <Y> and <Enter> to initiate the download.
The Software Upload screen will appear and state Expecting a Y-modem
transfer, use the communication program being run on the computer to send the
new firmware file to the SCU. Make sure that Y-modem transfer is selected as the
protocol for the communication program.
9. Select Reboot SCU, and press <Enter>.
10. Confirm Reboot by typing <Y> and <Enter>.
This will not disrupt service on the Total Access 3000/3010. The SCU will restart
and the upgrade is complete. The firmware version that is currently installed may
be checked by viewing the Configuration Menu of the SCU.
1.4
Follow-up Procedure
This completes the procedure for upgrading the Total Access 3000/3010 SCU. Return
to the document from which this procedure was called and continue.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 1 of 6
1.1
System Configuration Archive Save

NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
The Total Access 3000/3010 SCU (System Controller Unit), in conjunction with a
TFTP server, provides the ability to manually or automatically store the system
configuration for use during disaster recovery. In addition to its use for fast recovery
of system provisioning in the case of flood or fire, the SCA (System Configuration
Archive) system may be used to clone baseline system configurations to new
installations so that only a few system-specific provisioning options need to be altered.
This can significantly reduce initial setup time.
The system administrator may access and control the SCA system using EMS,
terminal menus, or SNMP. The administrator can perform manual saves of SCA
information to a TFTP server or can schedule automatic save operations for certain
times of the day. Scheduling save operations will help to reduce simultaneous SCA
system generated network traffic.
The SCA system save operation saves backup information from all modules present in
the shelf, including the SCU, cell switch modules, and access modules. The restore
operation allows the administrator to control which modules provisioning options are
to be restored.
NOTE
SCA menus and operations are available only to privileged administratorlevel accounts
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 2 of 6

1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to configuring the SCA system in
the SCU. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding. The
Physical installation of the Multiplexer Module(s) to be used (necessary if
implementing the inband management channel for IP or SNMP traffic):
DS3 MUX NTP-504
STS MUX NTP-505
OC-3 MUX NTP-506
Proper installation and connection of a TFTP server
1.2
1.2.1
Determine SCA Parameters

The SCA system needs to be provisioned with certain parameters before being used.
These parameters consist of the filename prefix, filename suffix, maximum automatic
save instances, Automatic Save Time and the TFTP servers IP address or hostname.
The filename prefix, filename suffix, maximum automatic save instances are used
together to form the SCA filename on the TFTP server.
The filename prefix is a 0 30-character string that will be used to construct the
beginning of the SCA filename.
The filename suffix is a 0 8-character string that will be used to construct the end of
the SCA filename. The suffix, by default, consists of .sca. If a period is desired in
the extension of the filename, it must be included in the filename suffix field.
The maximum file instances field determines the maximum number of SCA
filenames to save to the TFTP server. This is often called a backup file rotation
scheme, where the last files to be saved are always maintained on the backup server.
If this field is set to a value of seven, seven uniquely named SCA files will be written
to the TFTP server. The eighth file to be written will overwrite the first of the saved
files. The sequence 1..7, 1..7, 1..7 will be continually cycled through until the value
of this field is changed. After the maximum number of SCA filenames is changed, the
next SCA save is named using an instance of one.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 3 of 6

The generated SCA filename will be of the form (excluding parentheses):
(prefix)_(instance)(suffix)
where:
prefix
is the value of filename prefix field.
instance is decimal number between 1 and the max AutoSave instances field.
Suffix
is the value of the filename suffix field.
For example, if the prefix is "Flintville", the next AutoSave file instance is 3, and the
suffix is ".sca", the name of the next SCA AutoSave filename will be
"Flintville_3.sca".
The TFTP server is identified by a hostname or IP address. The TFTP server field
provides for a standard IP Address or up to a 40-character hostname.
NOTE
TFTP servers allow network clients to read or get practically any file from
the local TFTP directory; however, some TFTP servers do not permit clients
to write or put data that would result in the creation of a new file. This
behavior is site-specific and depends upon the operating system, local
configuration files, or the particular TFTP server being used. On the other
hand, some TFTP servers unconditionally allow new files to be created, and
other TFTP servers must be reconfigured or recompiled to permit the creation
of new files.
Most Unix/Linux TFTP servers do not allow clients to create new files, but
usually allow clients to overwrite or replace files that already exist in the local
TFTP directory. This allows the administrator to work around the issue by
creating the desired files in the TFTP directory before attempting to write the
file to the TFTP server from the network.
For example, if the name of a fictitious shelf was "Flintville", the administrator
would create the following files in the /tftpboot directory:
Flintville.sca
Flintville_1.sca
Flintville_2.sca
Flintville_3.sca
Flintville_4.sca
Flintville_5.sca
Flintville_6.sca
Flintville_7.sca
This action would allow the shelf to perform manual SCA saves to
Flintville.sca", and a rotation-schedule of 7 SCA AutoSaves to
"Flintville_1.sca" through "Flintville_7.sca".
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 4 of 6

1.2.2
Configure the Global SCA Settings

1. From the Total Access 3000/3010 Main menu, select System Controller, and
press <Enter>.
2. From the System Controller Main menu, select Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
4. From the SCU/System Administration menu, select System Configuration
Archive (SCA), and press <Enter>.
5. From the System Configuration Archive (SCA) menu, select SCA Operations,
and press <Enter>.
6. From the SCA Operations menu, select SCA TFTP Server, and press
<Enter>.
Enter the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that is to store the SCA
files. This field will support up to 30 characters.
7. Return to the Main menu by pressing <Esc>.
1.2.3
Configure the SCA System for Automatic Archival

press <Enter>.
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
4. From the SCU/System Administration, select System Configuration Archive
(SCA), and press <Enter>.
5. From the System Configuration Archive menu, select SCA AutoSave
Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
6. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave System, and
press <Enter>.
The following settings will be available:
Enable
Disable
This option is the master control for the automatic save. If this option is enabled,
automatic saves will occur as scheduled. If this option is disabled, automatic saves
will not occur (manual saves may still be performed).
7. Select Disable and continue to the next step.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 5 of 6

8. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Only If Prov
Changes, and press <Enter>.
The following settings will be available:
Enable
Disable
This option, if set to enable, prohibits automatic saves unless a provisioning option
changed after the previous save. If this option is set to disable, automatic saves
will occur according to the normal schedule.
9. Select the appropriate option, according to the central office standard
operating procedure or network administrator, and continue to the next step.
10. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Filename Prefix,
and press <Enter>.
This option provides a field that will support up to 30 characters. The contents of
this field make up the first portion of the system configuration archive filename
written to the TFTP server.
11. Input the appropriate filename prefix and press <Enter>.
12. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Filename Suffix,
and press <Enter>.
This option provides a field that will support up to 8 characters. The contents of
this field make up the last portion of the system configuration archive filename
written to the TFTP server.
13. Input the appropriate filename suffix and press <Enter>.
14. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select Max AutoSave File
Instances, and press <Enter>.
This option may be set between 1 and 7 and controls the number of SCA files
stored on the TFTP server for each system. Refer to the description in step 1 for
more information concerning this field.
15. Enter the maximum file instances and press <Enter>.
16. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Time (Hour),
and press <Enter>.
17. Using 24-hour clock hours, enter the hour in which the automatic save
function should occur.
18. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Time (Minute),
and press <Enter>.
19. Enter the minute of the hour in which the automatic save function should
occur.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP729-1E

DLP-729
Page 6 of 6

20. From the SCA AutoSave Provisioning menu, select AutoSave Retries, and
press <Enter>.
This option dictates the number of times the SCU will try to transfer the file to the
TFTP server if the previous attempt fails. The number of retries may be set
between 0 and 99.
21. Verify the SCA automatic save was successful.
Verification of SCA automatic save can be accomplished by verifying that the
SCA filename (including the defined prefix, instance, and suffix) appears on the
TFTP server after an automatic save is scheduled to occur.
1.2.2 To Manually Perform a SCA Save:

press <Enter>.
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
and press <Enter>.
6. From the SCA Operations menu, select Remote Filename, and press <Enter>.
This field provides for a 1 to 40 character filename. This filename will be saved to
the TFTP server when an SCA save is performed manually. No extension will be
added to this filename. If an extension is desired, put the dot and extension in the
filename field.
7. From the SCA Operations menu, begin the SCA save by selecting Perform
TFTP SCA Save, and press <Enter>.
A status screen will provide information about the SCA save, including the state of
the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the status screen will display SCA
Save Status: Complete.
8. Verify that the save was successful
Verification of SCA save can be accomplished by verifying that the SCA filename
appears on the TFTP server after an automatic save is scheduled to occur.
1.3
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure that called out this DLP and
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 1 of 6
1.1
System Configuration Archive Restore

NOTE
and the "b" represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For example, the
1.1.1
Introduction
The Total Access 3000/3010 SCU (System Controller Unit), in conjunction with a
TFTP server, provides the ability to manually or automatically store the system
configuration for use during disaster recovery. In addition to its use for fast recovery
of system provisioning in the case of flood or fire, the SCA (System Configuration
Archive) system may be used to clone baseline system configurations to new
installations so that only a few system-specific provisioning options need to be altered.
This can significantly reduce initial setup time.
The system administrator may access and control the SCA system using EMS,
terminal menus, or SNMP. The administrator can perform manual saves of SCA
information to a TFTP server or can schedule automatic save operations for certain
times of the day. Scheduling save operations will help to reduce simultaneous SCA
system generated network traffic.
The SCA system save operation saves backup information from all modules present in
the shelf, including the SCU, cell switch modules, and access modules. The restore
operation allows the administrator to specify which modules provisioning options are
to be restored.
NOTE
SCA menus and operations are available only to privileged administratorlevel accounts
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 2 of 6

1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to configuring the SCA system in
the SCU. If necessary, refer to the appropriate documentation before proceeding. The
Physical installation of the Multiplexer Module(s) to be used (necessary if
implementing the in-band management channel for IP or SNMP traffic):
DS3 MUX NTP-504
STS MUX NTP-505
OC-3 MUX NTP-506
Proper installation and connection of a TFTP server
Completion of an SCA Save DLP-729
1.2
1.2.1
Configure the TFTP Server Address

1. From the Total Access 3000/3010 main menu, select System Controller, and
press <Enter>.
2. From the System Controller main menu, select Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
<Enter>.
and press <Enter>.
6. From the SCA Operations menu, select SCA TFTP Server, and press <Enter>.
This field holds the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that holds the saved
SCA files.
7. Enter the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that holds the saved
SCA files.
8. Return to the System Configuration Archive (SCA) menu by pressing <Esc>.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 3 of 6

1.2.2
Configure the SCA Restore Options

1. From the System Configuration (SCA) menu, select SCA SCU Restore
Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
The SCA SCU Restore Provisioning menu allows the user to specify which types
of provisioning options are to be overwritten by the SCA restore and which types
of provisioning options will be unaffected. The following text provides a
description of the types of provisioning options available on the SCU.
able or enable the ability to overwrite provisioning options to the SCU using
the restore function. If the Restore Provisions To SCU option is enabled, the
remaining options described below will dictate what options are overwritten
and which are unaffected. If the Restore Provisions To SCU option is
disabled, no provisioning changes will be made to the SCU during an SCA
restore. This option is useful for protecting the current SCU settings during an
SCA restore operation that should only impact the Cell Switch and Access
Modules.
Restore SCU SCA Provisions This option dictates whether SCA-related
provisioning parameters should be restored on the SCU. All SCA provisions
such as SCA AutoSave, filename, SCU and Access Module restore settings,
etc. will be overwritten if this option is set to enable. No SCA provisions will
be overwritten if this option is set to disable.
Restore SCU Network Provisions This option dictates whether general IP
network-related provisioning parameters should be restored on the SCU.
General IP network-related parameters include the various telnet, DNS, IPforwarding, and firmware TFTP server settings. This option does not control
the restore of network interface settings (such as IP address, netmask or
gateway).
Restore SCU Network Interface Provisions This option dictates whether
network interface related settings (such as IP address, netmask and gateway)
for the Ethernet, Inband, and Local PPP network interface are to be
overwritten on the SCU. If this option is enabled, the network interface
parameters will be overwritten by the SCA restore. If this option is disabled,
no changes will be made to the network interface parameters.
NOTE
If the network interface parameters are changed, all TCP/IP, SNMP, and
Telnet communication will be halted until the devices trying to communicate
with the SCU are provisioned to correctly handle the change.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 4 of 6
Restore SCU SNMP Provisions This option dictates whether SNMP-related

parameters will be overwritten on the SCU by an SCA restore. SNMP-related
parameters include such items as SNMP ifIndexing method, trap-host IP
addresses, System Name, Location, and Contact strings, as well as the public
and private SNMP community strings. If this option is enabled, the SNMP
parameters will be overwritten by the SCA restore. If this option is disabled,
no changes will be made to the SNMP parameters.
Restore SCU Security System Provisions This option dictates whether
security system related parameters should be overwritten on the SCU by an
SCA restore. Security system provisions include such items as system and
user account names and passwords, as well as acceptance criteria of user
passwords such as case-sensitivity and the options of allowing NULL or
empty passwords. If this option is enabled, the security system parameters will
be overwritten by the SCA restore. If this option is disabled, no changes will
be made to the security system parameters.
2. Enable and/or disable the appropriate options according to the needs of the
specific situation.
3. Return to the System Configuration Archive (SCA) menu by pressing <Esc>.
4. From the System Configuration Archive (SCA) menu, select SCA Module
Restore Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
The SCA Module Restore Provisioning menu (shown in Figure 1) will be
displayed. This screen will display all of the module slots, 1-28/22 for access slots
and A and B for cell switch module slots. Each slot will have the name of the card
that occupies that slot and an indication of whether the SCA restore is enabled or
disabled for that particular slot. Each slot may be individually provisioned as
enabled and disabled.
Other selections for easy manipulation of the module restore status include the
following:
Restore Provisions To Modules This option functions as a global override to
disable or enable the ability to overwrite provisioning options to the any access
or cell switch module using the restore function. If the Restore Provisions To
Modules option is enabled, the individual card options and the remaining
options described below will dictate which cards options are overwritten and
which are unaffected. If the Restore Provisions To Modules option is
disabled, no provisioning changes will be made to any module during an SCA
restore. This option is useful for protecting the current module settings during
an SCA restore operation that should only impact the SCU.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 5 of 6
Restore In-Service Module Provisions The value for this option dictates
whether SCA restore operations will affect In-Service access and cell switch
modules. Setting this field to disable will prevent all modules that are
provisioned as In-Service from being affected by an SCA restore. Setting this
field to enable will allow the SCA restore function to overwrite data on access
and cell switch modules that are provisioned as In-Service (as long as the SCA
restore is not prohibited by any other option described in this text).
Restore to Empty Slot (Pre-Provision) This option dictates whether SCA
restore operations will attempt to pre-provision empty slots according to the
provisioning in place when the SCA save function occurred. If an empty slot
is pre-provisioned, inserting a linecard matching the type of card present in the
SCA file for that slot will result in automatic provisioning of the card to the
settings present in the SCA file.
TID: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Total Access System
Unacknowledged Alarms:
NONE
SCA Module Restore Provisioning
Slot
CardType
1. *Octal ADSL..
2. *Octal ADSL..
3. *Octal ADSL..
4. *Octal ADSL..
5. *Octal ADSL..
6. *Octal ADSL..
7. *Octal ADSL..
8. *Octal ADSL..
9. *Octal ADSL..
10. *Octal ADSL..
29.
30.
31.
Restore
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Slot
CardType
11. *Octal ADSL..
12. *Octal ADSL..
13. *Octal ADSL..
14. *Octal ADSL..
15. *Octal ADSL..
16. *Octal ADSL..
17. *Octal ADSL..
18. *Octal ADSL..
19. *Octal ADSL..
20. *Octal ADSL..
Restore Provisions To Modules

Restore In-Service Module Provisions
Restore to Empty Slot (Pre-Provision)
Selection :
Restore
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
11/07/02 17:01
Unit Number:
1
Slot
CardType
21. *Octal ADSL..
22. *Octal ADSL..
23. *Octal ADSL..
24. *Octal ADSL..
25. *Octal ADSL..
26. *Octal ADSL..
27. *IMA Module..
28. ............
A. *DS3CSM......
B. *DS3CSM......
: DISABLE
: DISABLE
: DISABLE
*
+
x
............
=
=
=
=
=
Restore
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
In-Service
Out-Of-Service
No Prov-Info
Unsupported
Empty Slot
Normal = Restorable, Inverse = NOT restorable

(E)nable ALL slots, (D)isable ALL slots, (T)oggle ALL slots
Figure 1. SCA Module Restore Provisioning
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP730-1E

DLP-730
Page 6 of 6

The remaining text in this section describe available Hotkeys visible at the
bottom of the SCA Module Restore Provisioning Screen:
E Hotkey Pressing the E key will force the restore state of all slots to
Enable.
D Hotkey Pressing the D key will force the restore state of all slots to
Disable.
T Hotkey Pressing the T key will toggle the restore state of all slots.
5. Make the appropriate changes to the SCA Module Restore Provisioning

Screen.
6. When finished, press <Esc> to return to the System Configuration Archive
(SCA) menu and continue with the next section.
1.2.3
Perform the System Archive Restoration

and press <Enter>.
2. From the SCA Operations menu, select Remote Filename, and press <Enter>.
This field provides for a 1 to 40 character filename. This filename will requested
from the TFTP server (by the SCU). This name must match the filename stored on
the TFTP server character for character, including extension. Determine which
file is to be used for the system being restored and use that filename in this field.
3. From the SCA Operations menu, select Perform TFTP SCA Restore, and press
<Enter>.
A status screen will provide information about the SCA restore, including the state
of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the status screen will display SCA
Restore Status: Complete (with exceptions). Any exceptions will be listed below
the SCA Restore Status field. Multiple pages are viewed by selecting (P)revious,
(N)ext, (F)irst, (L)ast by pressing the letter in parenthesis.
4. Verify that the restore was successful
Verification of SCA restore may be accomplished by verifying that the SCA
Restore Status shows complete and no unexpected exceptions appear in the
exceptions list.
5. Return to the main Total Access menu by pressing <Esc>.
1.3
Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure that called out this DLP and
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 1 of 10
1.1
Provisioning the DS-3 Multiplexer Module

NOTE
by the convention a/b. A represents the Total Access 3000 parameter and
1.1.1
Introduction
This section provides step-by-step instructions for the provisioning of a Total Access
3000/3010 DS-3 MUX module. In the case of 1:1 protection, instructions are included
for the provisioning of the working and protect modules.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to provisioning the DS3 MUX
module and are assumed to have been completed. If necessary, refer to the appropriate
documentation before proceeding. The prerequisite procedures include:
1.1.3
Physical installation of DS-3 MUX Module NTP-504
Tools Required
A pen or pencil will be required to operate the recessed APS button on the faceplate of
the unit.
1.1.4
Materials Required
1.2
Total Access 3000/3010 DS-3 MUX module (two modules for 1:1 protection
Preparing to Provision the Primary MUX (slot A)

NOTE
If MUX Auto-Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and a DS-3 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another DS-3 MUX unit, the SCU
will automatically download the provisioning settings, including Service
State, to the replacement DS-3 MUX.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 2 of 10

Linked Provisioning only applies to MUX modules and transfers provisioning data
from one MUX to the replacement MUX. Unlike Auto-Provisioning, LinkedProvisioning does not transfer the Service State of the current MUX to the replacement
MUX. The Linked-Provisioning feature can be set from either MUX module and is
enabled on both units or disabled on both units.
NOTE
The module must first be placed in the OOS, Maintenance or OOS, Unassigned service
state before provisioning can take place. Follow the procedure below to place the
module in the OOS, Maintenance state.
NOTE
Although provisioning changes can take place in the OOS, Unassigned
service state, the MUX will be unable to pass data in this state.
1.2.1
Place the Module in Out-of-Service, Maintenance State

1. Logon to the system, if necessary
For Details go to: DLP-716.
2. From the System Controller Menu select option 2, Common A [DS3MX], and
press <Enter>.
3. From the Working MUX Menu select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
4. From the Provisioning Menu select option 1, Service State, and press <Enter>.
5. From the Service State Menu select option 2, Out-of-Service, Maintenance, and
press <Enter>.
6. Return to the Working MUX Provisioning menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed to
Section 1.3.
1.3
Provisioning the Primary MUX

The following steps includes each provisioning item and a brief description of each.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 3 of 10

1. From the Provisioning Menu select option 1, Framing, and press <Enter>.
1. CBIT CBIT parity format is enabled.
2. M13 M13 only format is enabled.
3. Auto-detect The MUX detects the framing format of the far end
terminal and adjusts the local framing format accordingly.
Select the desired option by typing the corresponding number and press <Enter>.
2. From the Provisioning Menu select option 2, Line Build Out, and press <Enter>.
1. Short The cable length is less than 225 feet of 734A or equivalent coaxial
cable or less than 100 feet of LucentTM 735 or equivalent coaxial cable.
2. Long The cable length is greater than 225 feet of 734A or equivalent
coaxial cable or greater than 100 feet of LucentTM 735 or equivalent coaxial
cable.
3. From the Provisioning Menu select option 3, Clock Source, and press <Enter>.
1. Local DS-3 transmit clock is provided by a local 44.736 Mhz (+20 ppm)
clock.
2. Loop DS-3 transmit clock is provided by a recovered network clock.
4. From the Provisioning Menu select option 5, Linked Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
This option is only necessary if a second MUX will be employed. If a single
configuration is being implemented, disregard this option and proceed to Step 5.
1.
2.
Disable Provisioning changes to either MUX will affect only the unit for
which the changes were made.
Enable Linked Provisioning ensures that provisioning changes made to one
unit are automatically reflected in the other unit and is recommended for a 1:1
protection configuration. Please note that Service State is not a Linked option
and will not be reflected in the other unit.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 4 of 10

NOTE
In a protection configuration, it is recommended to Enable Linked
Provisioning so that the Protect MUX is automatically provisioned with the
identical settings as the Working MUX.
NOTE
The DS-3 Line Code parameter is hard-coded to B3ZS and cannot be changed.
5. Return to the Working MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed to the
next section.
1.4
Performance Monitoring Provisioning

Performance monitoring options can be set to enable the module to capture
performance monitoring data. Alarm thresholds for various alarm conditions are set
and, when exceeded, issue an appropriate alarm. To set alarm threshold values perform
the following.
1. From the Working MUX Main Menu select option 6, Performance Monitoring,
and press <Enter>.
2. From the Performance Monitoring Menu select option 5, Daily Threshold, and
press <Enter>.
Options 5-8 are able to have alarm thresholds set. Options 5 and 6 will be shown
here. Options 7 and 8 are identical in the different alarms they contain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
Code Violation ........................... L

Errored Second ......................... L
Code Violation ........................... P-P
Code Violation ........................... CP-P
Errored Second ......................... P-P
Errored Second ......................... CP-P
Severley Errored Second.......... P-P
Severley Errored Second.......... CP-P
Unavailabe Second .................... P-P
Sev Errored Frame Second ...... P
Protection Switch Count
Definitions
L, -L Line
P, -P Path
P
P-bit parity
CP
C-bit parity
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 5 of 10

3. As an example, from the Daily Threshold Menu select option 1, Code
Violation.L, and press <Enter>.
1. Set Alarm Threshold
2. Set Alarm Enable
Set the Alarm Threshold and then Enable the alarm to be issued if the set threshold
value is exceeded.
4. Return to the Performance Monitoring Menu by pressing <Esc>.
5. From the Performance Monitoring Menu select option 6, Far-End Daily
Threshold, and press <Enter>.
1. Code Violation CP-P
2. Errored Second.. CP-P
3. Severely Errored SecondCP-P
4. Unavailable Second... CP-P
6. For an example, from the Far-End Daily Threshold Menu select option 2, Errored
SecondCP-P, and press <Enter>.
2. Set Alarm Enable
Set the Alarm Threshold and then Enable the alarm to be issued if the set
threshold value is exceeded.
7. Return to the Working MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed to the
next section.
1.5
Protection Configuration Provisioning

This provisioning option is only used when two DS-3 MUX Modules are installed and
will be used in a protection switching configuration. Please proceed with the following
steps to provision protection switching on the working MUX. If the MUX is in a single
configuration, please continue this procedure at Section 5, Channel Mapping
Provisioning.
1. From the Working MUX Main Menu select option 7, Protection Configuration,
and press <Enter>.
2. From the Protection Configuration Menu select option 3, BER Line Switch, and
press <Enter>.
This option INHIBITS or ALLOWS APS operation based on the Bit Error
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 6 of 10

Rate (BER) on the line.
1.
2.
INHIBIT Inhibits APS operation.

ALLOW Allows APS operation.
3. From the Protection Configuration Menu select option 4, BER Line Threshold, and
press <Enter>.
This option sets the BER threshold which, when exceeded, will trigger an APS
switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
> 1x10-9
> 1x10-8
> 1x10-7
> 1x10-6
> 1x10-5
> 1x10-4
> 1x10-3
4. From the Protection Configuration Menu select option 1, APS Lockout Status, and
press <Enter>.
This option will INHIBIT or ALLOW the Working module to perform an APS
switch to the Offline module when it is the Online (transmitting to the network)
module.
1.
2.
INHIBIT
ALLOW
5. Return to the Primary MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc>and proceed to the next
section.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 7 of 10
1.6
Channel Mapping Provisioning

Channel mapping is necessary so that the embedded T2s, T1s, or E1s can be routed to
the intended slot of the Total Access 3000/3010 chassis upon being demultiplexed
from the DS-3 data stream. The DS-3 MUX module is capable of mapping T2s, T1s,
and E1s, or any combination thereof, to the Total Access 3000/3010 slots. These
bandwidth mapping options of T2, T1, or E1 are referred to as mapping schemes.
A single T2 has a bandwidth of 6.312 Mb/s and can be comprised of either the entire
T2, four T1s, or three E1s. Table 1 details how the 28 T1s would be bundled into the
seven T2s and Table 2 details how the 21 E1s would be bundled into the seven T2s. In
both tables, the assignment scheme, such as T1s #1, #2, #3, and #4 bundled into T2 #1,
is permanent and cannot be changed. This becomes important when mapping in a
scheme other than 1-to-1, which maps T1s 1-28/1-22 to slots 1-28/1-22, respectively.
If mapping in E1 mode, the particular T2 is divided into three E1s and the user would
need to refer to Table 2 to determine which E1s are bundled into the T2. For example,
if mapping E1 #1 to a particular slot, T2 #1 would be divided into E1s #1, #2, and #3.
Please see NOTE below for further instructions if mixing mapping schemes in the
same shelf.
NOTE
It is important to note when channel mapping that the equivalent T2 bandwidth
becomes delegated to the selected mapping scheme until changed. If mapping
in E1 mode, the equivalent T2 bandwidth of 6.312 Mb/s is divided into three
E1s of 2.103 Mb/s each. If mapping in T1 mode, the equivalent bandwidth of
6.312 Mb/s is divided into four T1s of 1.544 Mb/s each. It is not possible
within the bandwidth of a particular T2 to map both E1s and T1s. One T2
could be divided into E1s and another T2 could be divided into T1s and those
E1s and T1s routed to any slot selection.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 8 of 10

Table 1. How T1s are Bundled into T2s
Table 2. How E1s are Bundled into T2s
T2#
T1s Assigned to that T2#
T2#
E1s Assigned to that T2#
#1, #2, #3, #4
#1, #2, #3,
#5, #6, #7, #8
#4, #5, #6,
#9, #10, #11, #12
#7, #8, #9,
#13, #14, #15, #16
#10, #11, #12,
#17, #18, #19, #20
#13, #14, #15,
#21, #22, #23, #24
#16, #17, #18,
#25, #26, #27, #28
#19, #20, #21,
When mapping a single T2 as one T2, and not three E1s or four T1s, the entire 6.312
Mb/s is routed to the designated slot.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 8, Channel Mapping, and press
<Enter>.
The following four options (1), (2), (3) and (4) will only be available when the
MUX is in out of service state and the user has entered the Channel Mapping
menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Toggle Chan/Slot Screen toggles the channel mapping screen view mode.
Mapping information can be viewed as which channel is mapped to which
slot or which slots are assigned to which channels.
Toggle Mapping Input Mode selects which mapping scheme is to be used.
Channels can be mapped in T2 bundles, E1 bundles or individual T1s.
Remove all mappings removes all mapping provisioning.
1-to-1 T1/Slot mappings restores a 1:1 T1 mapping scheme.
2. Set Mapping Scheme

The factory default setting is 1-to-1 T1 mapping which is T1s 1-28/1-22 being
mapped to the like slot number, 1-28/1-22, respectively. If the module is not
mapped in this manner, but that is the desired scheme, select option (4) and press
<Enter>. Use option (2) to change the bandwidth mode, T1/E1/T2. Please note the
mapping scheme mode at the lower portion of the screen just above ? System
Help Screen. The three different modes will be displayed as follows:
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 9 of 10

T1 Mapping scheme this will map any T1 to any slot.
Selection or Mapping (T1# / Slot#):
Example Selection or Mapping (T1# / Slot#): 1/10
This will map T1 #1 to slot 10.
E1 Mapping scheme this will map any E1 to any slot.
Selection or Mapping (E1# / Slot#):
Example Selection or Mapping (E1# / Slot#): 1/2
This will map E1 #1 to slot 2.
T2 Mapping scheme this will map any T2 to any slot.
Selection or Mapping (T2# / Slot#):
Example Selection or Mapping (T2# / Slot#): 2/9
This will map the entire 6.312 Mb/s of bandwidth contained in T2 #2 to slot 9.
Any previous mapping scheme employed on slot 9 will be automatically removed.
NOTE
The system will prompt you to make sure you want to employ a new mapping
scheme.
When channel mapping the DS3 MUX to individual slots configured for protection
switching, it is necessary to map a channel only to the MAIN (odd-numbered) slot. If a
fault condition occurs and a protection switch is made from the MAIN circuit to the
AUX circuit, the channel is temporarily mapped by the DS-3 MUX into the AUX
(even-numbered) slot and a failure notice attached to the MAIN (odd) slot. Follow the
steps below for mapping a channel to the MAIN slot. For this procedure, the
technician needs to know which embedded DSX-1 in the incoming DS-3 data stream
to map to the appropriate APS slot in the Total Access3000/3010. Do not continue
without this information. In a newly installed DS-3 MUX that has not been changed
from factory defaults, the embedded DSX-1s in the DS-3 will be mapped to the likenumbered slot (i.e. DSX-1#1 to Slot 1, DSX-1#2 to Slot 2, up to DSX-1#28 to Slot 28/
DSX-1 #22 to Slot 22).
1.
2.
Access the Main menu of the DS-3 MUX module and select Option 8,
Channel Mapping.
At the bottom of the screen where you see:
Selection or Enter Mapping (T1#/Slot#):
Enter the number of the embedded DSX-1, followed by / and the
appropriate slot number, then <Enter>. This action will assign the desired
DSX-1 to the slot in the Total Access3000/3010.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP740-1E

DLP-740
Page 10 of 10

CAUTION
Assigning the incorrect embedded DSX-1 from the DS-3 to a slot in the Total
Access 3000/3010 could disrupt existing traffic.
3. Return to the Primary MUX Main menu by pressing <Esc>.
This concludes the procedure for provisioning a single MUX in a non-protection
configuration or the Primary MUX in a protection configuration. Please proceed to
Section 1.7 for provisioning the Protect MUX in a protection configuration.
1.7
Preparing to Provision the Protect MUX (slot B)

Ensure that Linked Provisioning is Enabled on the Working MUX before
proceeding. The factory default setting for Linked-Provisioning is Enabled and
should be already set. The procedure to access this feature is listed below for
convenience.
1. From the Total Access Main menu, select option 2, Common A, and press <Enter>.
This will be the menu tree for the DS-3 MUX in slot A.
2. From the DS-3 MUX A Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
Check to see if Enabled or Disabled. To enable, continue with the next two steps.
3. From the Provisioning Menu, select option 5, Linked Provisioning, and press
<Enter>.
4. From the Linked Provisioning menu, select option 2, Enable, and press <Enter>.
5. Return to the Total Access Main Menu by pressing <Esc> key.
The Protect MUX in slot B should now be provisioned with the identical settings as
the Primary MUX in slot A.
1.8
Follow-up Procedure
This completes the procedure for provisioning the Total Access 3000/3010 DS-3
Multiplexer Module. Proceed to Section 1.5, Placing the Units in Service, of NTP-504.
If this procedure was called out from another document, return to that document and
continue.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 1 of 8
1.1
Provisioning the STS-1 Multiplexer Module

NOTE
1.1.1
Introduction
3000/3010 STS-1 MUX module. In the case of 1:1 protection, instructions are
included for the provisioning of the working and protect modules.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to provisioning the STS-1 MUX
1.1.3
Physical installation of STS-1 MUX Module NTP-505
Tools Required
the unit.
1.1.4
Materials Required
Total Access 3000/3010 STS-1 MUX module (2 modules for 1:1 protection
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 2 of 8
1.2

NOTE
If MUX Auto-Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and a STS-1 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another STS-1 MUX unit, the SCU
State, to the replacement STS-1 MUX.

MUX. Linked-Provisioning can be set from either MUX module and is either enabled
on both units or disabled on both units.
NOTE
The module must first be placed in the OOS, Maintenance service state before
provisioning can take place. Follow the procedure below to place the module in the
OOS, Maintenance state. Follow sections 1.2 1.4 and section 1.6 to provision a
single MUX in a non-protection configuration.
1.2.1

For details go to: DLP-716 for details.
2. From the System Controller Menu select option 2, Common A [STS-1MX], and
press <Enter>.
3. From the Primary MUX Menu select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
5. From the Service State Menu select option 2, Out-of-Service, Maintenance.
6. Return to the Primary MUX Provisioning menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed to
Section 1.3.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 3 of 8
1.3

The following procedure includes each provisioning item and a brief description of
each.
1. From the Provisioning Menu select option 1, Line Build Out, and press <Enter>.
1. Short The cable length is less than 100 feet for 728A or 734A coax.
2. Long For distances greater than 100 feet for the above described cable.

This option sets where the transmit clock derives its timing.
1. Loop Timing is derived from the incoming STS-1 data stream.
2. Free Run Timing is derived from an onboard oscillator.
3. External Timing is derived from a DS1 BITS (SF or ESF) timing
source.
a. External (Pri & Sec) Automatic non-revertive switching occurs
between the primary (B-IN) and secondary (C-IN) EXT Clock inputs.
b. External (Pri only) Only the primary EXT Clock input is used.
c. External (Sec only) Only the secondary EXT Clock input is used.
<Enter>. This option is only necessary if a second MUX will be employed. If a
single configuration is being implemented, disregard this option and proceed to
step 5.
1. Disable Provisioning changes to either MUX will affect only the unit for
which the changes were made.
2. Enable Linked Provisioning ensures that provisioning changes made to one
unit are automatically reflected in the other unit and is recommended for a 1:1
protection configuration. Please note that Service State is not a Linked option
and will not be reflected in the other unit. This setting has no affect in a single
MUX configuration.
NOTE
In a protection configuration, it is recommended to Enable Linked
Provisioning so that the Protect MUX is automatically provisioned with the
identical settings as the Primary MUX.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 4 of 8

4. Selecting option 5, Restore Factory Defaults, will restore the provisioning of the
unit to its factory default state. The factory default settings are listed below.
Line Build Out:

Clock Source:
Service State:
Linked Provisioning:
PM Threshold Enable:
VT Channel Mapping:
Short
Loop
Out-of-Service, Unassigned
Enabled
Off
Off
5. Return to the Primary MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed to the
next section.
1.4

the following:
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 6, Performance Monitoring, and
press <Enter>.
2. Options 5 through 8 are able to have alarm thresholds set. Options 5 and 6 will be
shown here. Options 7 and 8 are identical, except the alarm thresholds are based
on 15 minute intervals instead of 24 hour intervals. From the Performance
Monitoring Menu select option 5, STS1 Daily Thresholds, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
Code Violation .......................... S

Errored Second ....................... .S
Severly Errored Second .......... S
Code Violation .......................... L
Errored Second ........................ L
Severly Errored Second .......... L
Unavailable Second.................. L
Code Violation .......................... P
Errored Second ........................ P
Sev Errored Second ................. P
Unavailable Second.................. P
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 5 of 8

3. As an example, from the Daily Threshold Menu select option 1, Code
Violation.S, and press <Enter>.
2. Set Alarm Enable
125
Off
Set the Alarm Threshold by selecting option 1, Set Alarm Threshold, and inputting the
desired threshold. Finally, enable the alarm by selecting option 2, Set Alarm Enable,
and setting to On. This will cause that alarm to be issued if the set threshold value is
exceeded.
4. Return to the Performance Monitoring Menu by pressing <Esc>.
5. From the Performance Monitoring Menu select option 6, STS1 Far-End Daily
Thresholds, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Code Violation
Errored Second
Severely Errored Second
Unavailable Second
Code Violation
Errored Second
Sev Errored Second
Unavailable Second
L
L
L
L
P
P
P
P
6. For an example, from the Far-End Daily Threshold Menu select option 2, Errored
SecondL, and press <Enter>.

2. Set Alarm Enable
100
Off
and setting to On. This will cause that alarm to be issued if the set threshold value is
exceeded.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 6 of 8

next section.
1.5

This provisioning option allows the user to set a Protection Configuration state of the
STS-1 MUX. If the MUX is in a single configuration, please continue this procedure at
Section 1.6, Channel Mapping Provisioning.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 7, Protection Configuration, and
press <Enter>.
press <Enter>. This option indicates whether the module is "Allowed" to
automatically switch to the protection MUX or is "Inhibited" from switching to the
protection MUX.
A. Inhibit
B. Allow
3. Return to the Primary MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed
to the next section.
1.6
VT1.5 Channel Mapping Provisioning

VT1.5 Channel mapping is necessary so that the embedded T1s can be routed to the
correct slot of the Total Access 3000/3010 chassis upon being extracted from the
STS-1 data stream. Table 1. lists the VT1.5# (1-28) and the corresponding mapping
to the SONET VT Group #, VT#.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 8, VT1.5 Mapping, and press
<Enter>.
2. The factory default setting is "Remove all mappings" and renders the MUX unable
to provide service to the access slots. The available three options are
described below.
1. Toggle Chan/Slot Display This option allows the user to choose how to
display the mapping. In slot mode, routing is displayed with respect to the
access slot number. In channel mode, routing is displayed withrespect to
channel number.
2. Remove all mappings This option removes all mappings and renders the
system unable to provide service from the STS-1 to the access slots.
3. 1-to-1 Chan/Slot mappings Reverts all mapping back to a 1-to-1
configuration where payload VT1.5 #1 is mapped to slot 1, payload VT1,5 #2
is mapped to slot 2, and so forth, to VT1.5 #28 to slot 28.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 7 of 8

Section 1.7 for provisioning the Protect MUX in a protection configuration or return
to NTP-505 to place the single MUX In-Service.
Table 1. VT1.5 Channel Mapping Provisioning

VT1.5#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
VT Group #, VT#
1,1
2,1
3,1
4,1
5,1
6,1
7,1
1,2
2,2
3,2
4,2
5,2
6,2
7,2
1,3
2,3
3,3
4,3
5,3
6,3
7,3
1,4
2,4
3,4
4,4
5,4
6,4
7,4
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP741-1E

DLP-741
Page 8 of 8
1.7

Ensure that Linked Provisioning is Enabled on the Primary MUX before proceeding.
The factory default setting for Linked-Provisioning is Enabled and should be
already set. The procedure to access this feature is listed below for convenience.
1. From the Total Access Main menu, select option 2, Common A, and press <Enter>.
This will be the menu for the STS-1 MUX in slot A.
2. From the STS-1 MUX A Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
Check to see if Enabled or Disabled. To enable, continue with the next two steps.
<Enter>.
4. From the Linked Provisioning menu, select option 2, Enable, and press <Enter>.
5. Return to the Total Access Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
The Protect MUX must first be placed in the OOS, Maintenance service state before
Linked Provisioning automatically provisions the unit. Perform the following
procedure to place the module in the OOS, Maintenance mode:
6. From the System Controller Menu select option 2, Common B [STS-1MX], and
press <Enter>.
7. From the Protect MUX Menu select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
10. Return to the Protect MUX Provisioning menu by pressing <Esc>.
The Protect MUX in slot B should now be provisioned with the identical settings as
the Primary MUX in slot A.
1.7.1
Follow-up Procedure
This completes the procedure for provisioning the Total Access 3000 STS-1
Multiplexer Module. Proceed to NTP-505 to place the units In-Service. If this
procedure was called out from another document, return to that document and
continue.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 1 of 14
1.1
Provisioning the OC-3 Multiplexer Module

NOTE
by the convention a/b. A represents the Total Access 3000 parameter and
1.1.1
Introduction
3000/3010 OC-3 MUX module. In the case of 1:1 protection, instructions are included
for the provisioning of the working and protect modules.
1.1.2
The following procedures must be completed prior to provisioning the OC-3 MUX
1.1.3
Physical installation of OC-3 MUX Module NTP-506
Tools Required
the unit.
1.1.4
Materials Required
Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 MUX module (2 modules for 1:1 protection
1.2

NOTE
If MUX Auto-Provisioning is enabled in the SCU and an OC-3 MUX unit is
subsequently removed and replaced with another OC-3 MUX unit, the SCU
State, to the replacement OC-3 MUX.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 2 of 14

MUX. Linked-Provisioning can be set from either MUX module and is either enabled
on both units or disabled on both units.
NOTE
The module must first be placed in the OOS, Maintenance service state before
provisioning can take place. Follow the procedure below to place the module in the
OOS, Maintenance state.
1.2.1

Logon to the system
1. From the System Controller Menu select option 2, Common A [OC-3MX], and
press <Enter>.
2. From the Primary MUX Menu select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
4. From the Service State Menu select option 2, Out-of-Service, Maintenance and
press <Enter>.
5. Return to the Primary MUX Provisioning menu by pressing <Esc> and proceed
to Section 1.3.
1.3

The following procedure includes each provisioning item and a brief description of
each.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 3 of 14

<Enter>.
1. Enable
2. Disable
NOTE
In a protection configuration, it is recommended to select option 1 to enable
Linked Provisioning so that the Protect MUX is automatically provisioned
with the identical settings as the Primary MUX.
2. From the Provisioning Menu select option 3, Signal Fail Threshold, and press
<Enter>. This option sets the Bit Error Rate (BER) at which service is
unacceptable for a particular application. If a protection card with a less severe
impairment is available, the traffic will be transferred to that card.
1. 1x10-3
2. 1x10-4
3. 1x10-5
3. From the Provisioning Menu select option 4, Signal Degradation Threshold, and
press <Enter>. This option sets the BER at which service is marginal or
degraded for a particular application. If a protection card with a less severe
impairment is available, the traffic will be transferred to that card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1x10-5
1x10-6
1x10-7
1x10-8
1.10-9
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 4 of 14

This option sets source of timing for the OC-3 transmit clock
1. Receive OC-3 Timing is derived from the received OC-3 data. Timing can
be derived from either Fiber A or Fiber B or from both Fiber A and Fiber B.
2. Free Run Timing is derived from an onboard oscillator.
3. EXT DS1 SF or ESF Timing is derived from an externally connected DS1
BITS SF or ESF timing source. ESF synchronization status messages are not
received with this option. Timing can be derived from either the Primary or
Secondary External Clock or from both the Primary and Secondary External
clocks.
4. EXT DS1 ESF (sync msgs) Timing is derived from an externally connected
DS1 BITS ESF framed all ones timing source which provides synchronization
status messages. Timing can be derived from either the Primary or Secondary
External Clock or from both the Primary and Secondary External Clocks.
5. From the Provisioning Menu select option 6, OC-3 Transmission Sync Message,
and press <Enter>. This option sets whether the transmit OC-3 S1 sync message is
derived from the clock source or is not used for Synchronization.
1. Derive from Source
2. Dont Use
6. From the Provisioning Menu select option 7, DCC Side, and press <Enter>. This
option sets whether the Data Communication Channel (DCC) is active on the
Network or User side.
1. Network
2. User
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 5 of 14

7. From the Provisioning Menu select option 8, System ID, and press <Enter>. This
option sets the address used by DCC (in conjunction with the NSAP Area
Address) to uniquely identify each OC-3 MUX. This option requires a
hexadecimal input by the user.
Input the desired System ID in hexadecimal format and press <Enter>.
8. From the Provisioning Menu select option 9, NSAP Area Address, and press
<Enter>. This option sets the address used by the DCC to identify the node. This
option requires an alphanumeric input by the user.
Input the desired NSAP Area Address in alphanumeric format and press <Enter>.
9. From the Provisioning Menu select option 10, Clock Out Options, and press
<Enter>. This option sets various transmit clock options
1. Clk Out Enable Enables or Disables the Clk Output.
2. Clk Output Selects the dual or single clock output mode. The dual mode
provides two independent clock outputs; one from MUX A (A-OUT) and
another from MUX B (B-OUT). If MUX A is unplugged, the A output is lost.
Likewise, if MUX B is unplugged, the B output is lost. The single mode
provides one clock output if the A-OUT and B-OUT terminals are jumpered
together (T to T and R to R). In the single mode, either MUX can be
unplugged and a clock output will be present on the single clock output cable.
3. Clk out LBO Selects the line build out cable length for the DS-1 timing
clock output.
4. Clk out type Selects the SF or ESF framing format for the DS-1 timing
clock output. If ESF is selected, ESF data link synchronization messages are
output.
5. Clock Out Source Selects the source of the DS1 timing clock output. If
Receive OC-3 is selected, the A output from MUX A (A-OUT) derives timing
from the receive fiber of MUX A and the B output from MUX B (B-OUT)
derives timing from the receive fiber of MUX B. If EXT Clock In is selected,
the A output derives timing from the PRI EXT clock input and the B output
derives timing from the SEC EXT clock input. This option can be used to
daisy chain shelves (A-OUT to B-IN and B-OUT to C-IN) if multiple cable
pairs are not available from the BITS clock source.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 6 of 14

10. Selecting option, Restore Factory Defaults, will restore the provisioning of the unit
to its factory default state. The factory default settings are listed below:
Service State:
Linked Provisioning:
Signal Fail Threshold:
Signal Degrade Threshold:
Clock Source:
OC-3 TX sync msg:
DCC Side:
Clk Out Type:
Clk out LBO:
Clk out Enable:
Clk output:
Clk Out Source:
PM Threshold:
VT Mapping:
Out-of-Service, Unassigned
Enable
1x10-3
1x10-5
Receive OC-3 A&B
Derive from Source
Network
DS-1 SF
000-133 feet
Disabled
Dual Output
Receive OC-3
Disabled
Unmapped
next section.
1.4

the following.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 6, Performance Monitoring, and
press <Enter>.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 7 of 14

2. Options 5 and 6 are able to have alarm thresholds set. From the Performance
Monitoring Menu select option 5, OC-3 Daily Thresholds, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Section Code Violations

Section Errored Seconds
Section Severely Errored Seconds
Line Code Violations
Line Errored Seconds
Line Severely Errored Seconds
Line Unavailable Seconds
Path Code Violations
Path Errored Seconds
Path Severely Errored Seconds
Path Unavailable Seconds
3. As an example, from the OC-3 Daily Threshold Menu select option 1, Section
Code Violations, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
Set Alarm Threshold 125

Set Alarm Enable
Disabled
and setting to Enable. This will cause that alarm to be issued if the set threshold value
is exceeded.
4. Return to the Performance Monitoring Menu by pressing <Esc> .
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 8 of 14

5. From the Performance Monitoring Menu select option 6, OC-3 Quarterly Hourly
Thresholds, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Section Code Violations

Section Errored Seconds
Section Severely Errored Seconds
Line Code Violations
Line Errored Seconds
Line Severely Errored Seconds
Line Unavailable Seconds
Path Code Violations
Path Errored Seconds
Path Severely Errored Seconds
Path Unavailable Seconds
6. For an example, from the Quarterly Hourly Threshold Menu selectoption 9, Path
Errored Seconds, and press <Enter>.
1.
2.
Set Alarm Threshold

Set Alarm Enable
125
Disabled
and setting to Enable. This will cause that alarm to be issued if the set threshold value
is exceeded.
next section.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 9 of 14
1.5

This provisioning option allows the user to set a Protection Configuration state of the
OC-3 MUX. If the MUX is in a single configuration, please continue this procedure at
Section 1.6, Channel Mapping Provisioning.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 7, Protection Configuration, and
press <Enter>.
press <Enter>. This option indicates whether the module is Allowed to
automatically switch to the protection MUX or is Inhibited from switching to the
protection MUX.
1.
Inhibit
2.
Allow
next section.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 10 of 14
1.6
VT1.5 Channel Mapping Provisioning

VT1.5 Channel mapping is necessary so that the embedded T1s can be routed to the
correct slot of the Total Access 3000 chassis upon being extracted from the OC-3 data
stream. Table 1 lists the VT1.5# (1-28) and the corresponding mapping to the SONET
VT Group #, VT#.
Table 1. VT1.5 Channel Mapping Provisioning
VT1.5#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
VT Group #, VT#
1,1
2,1
3,1
4,1
5,1
6,1
7,1
1,2
2,2
3,2
4,2
5,2
6,2
7,2
1,3
2,3
3,3
4,3
5,3
6,3
7,3
1,4
2,4
3,4
4,4
5,4
6,4
7,4
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 11 of 14

1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 8, VT1.5 Mapping, and press
<Enter>.
2. The factory default setting is Remove all mappings and renders the MUX unable
to provide service to the access slots. The available three options are described
below:
1. Toggle Chan/Slot Display This option allows the user to choose how to
display the mapping. In slot mode, routing is displayed with respect to the
access slot number. In channel mode, routing is displayed with respect to
channel number.
2. Remove all mappings This option removes all mappings and renders the
system unable to provide service from the OC-3 to the access slots.
3. 1-to-1 Chan/Slot mappings Reverts all mapping back to a 1-to-1
configuration where payload VT1.5 #1 is mapped to slot 1, payload VT1.5 #2
is mapped to slot 2, and so forth, to VT1.5 #28 to slot 28.
1.7
Path Trace
Path Trace message is used for connectivity information and can be set with this
option. The available settings are listed below with a brief description of each.
1. From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 9, Path Trace, and press
<Enter>.
1. Show Path Traces Shows the user the trace message received from the farend node.
2. Send Path Trace Allows user to enter the Path Trace Message sent to the
fare-end.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 12 of 14
1.8
Display Options
Display Options allows the user to format the output display of the MUX Menu
screens to their preference. The available settings are listed below.
1
From the Primary MUX Main Menu select option 11, Display Options, and press
<Enter>.
1.
2.
3.
4.
VT Number Display Format

High ASCII Characters
Screen Height
Screen Width
2. Return to the Primary MUX Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
Section 2.10 for provisioning the Protect MUX in a protection configuration or
return to Section 1.5 of NTP-506 to place the units In-Service.
1.9

Ensure that Linked Provisioning is Enabled on the Primary MUX before proceeding.
The factory default setting for Linked-Provisioning is Enabled and should be already
set. The procedure to access this feature is listed below for convenience.
1. From the Total Access Main Menu, select option 2, Common A - [OC-3 MUX],
and press <Enter>. This will be the menu tree for the OC-3 MUX in slot A.
2. From the OC-3 MUX A Menu, select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
Check to see if Linked Provisioning Enabled or Disabled. To enable, continue with
the next two steps.
<Enter>.
4. From the Linked Provisioning Menu, select option 2, Enable, and press <Enter>.
5. Return to the Total Access Main Menu by pressing <Esc>.
The Protect MUX must first be placed in the OOS, Maintenance service state before
Linked Provisioning automatically provisions the unit. Perform the following
procedure to place the module in the OOS, Maintenance mode.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 13 of 14

6. From the System Controller Menu select option 2, Common B [OC-3MX], and
press <Enter>.
7. From the Protect MUX Menu select option 2, Provisioning, and press <Enter>.
10. Return to the Protect MUX Provisioning menu by pressing <Esc>.
The Protect MUX in slot B should now be provisioned with the identical settings
as the Primary MUX in slot A.
1.9.1
Follow-up Procedure
This completes the procedure for provisioning the Total Access 3000 OC-3
Multiplexer Module. Proceed to NTP-506 to place the units In-Service. If this
procedure was called out from another document, return to that document and
continue.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP742-1E

DLP-742
Page 14 of 14
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP743-1E

DLP-743
Page 1 of 4
a Multiplexer
Perform Configuring
Steps Below in the
Order Listed Module for APS Operation
1.1
Introduction
This section provides step-by-step instructions for the APS configuration of a Total
Access 3000 MUX module. Instructions are included for the DS3, STS-1 and OC-3
Multiplexer Modules.
1.1.1
Before beginning the configuration procedure described in this DLP, the user should
ensure that a Total Access 3000 shelf is properly installed and wired for the respective
MUX operation. Also, ensure the SCU is installed and provisioned. Refer to NTP-501,
Shelf Installation in a Central Office, for detailed procedures for either of the above
applications.
1.1.2

Total Access 3000 chassis installed and wired with SCU.
Two Total Access 3000 (DS3, STS-1 or OC-3) Multiplexer Modules
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP743-1E

DLP-743
Page 2 of 4
1.2

1. Install the Total Access 3000 MUX Modules
See NTP-504 NTP-506 for installation and turn-up instructions for the DS3,
STS-1 and OC-3, respectively.
1.2.1
Configure Protection Switching

1.)
Logon to system if necessary (see DLP-716 for details).
2.)
Enable protection switching

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
From the Total Access Main menu, select option 2, Common A.

Select option 7, Protection Configuration, and press <Enter>.
Select option 1, APS Lockout Status, and press <Enter>.
Set APS Lockout Status to ALLOW.
Access the main menu of the Total Access 3000 MUX in slot B by
returning to the Total Access 3000 Main menu and choosing option 3,
Common B.
Select option 7, Protection Configuration, and press <Enter>.
Select option 1, APS Lockout Status, and press <Enter>.
Set option 1, APS Lockout Status, to ALLOW or INHIBIT.
ALLOW permits a protection switch from the Online unit to the Offline unit
upon detection of a fault condition.
INHIBIT does not permit a protection switch from the Online to the Offline unit.
For example, setting this option to INHIBIT on MUX B (Offline) with MUX A
(Online) set to ALLOW will allow an APS switch from MUX A to MUX B, but will
disallow an APS switch back to MUX A should a subsequent fault condition occur.
ALLOW would permit an APS switch back to MUX A.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP743-1E

DLP-743
Page 3 of 4

3.)
For an OC-3 Mux, an additional APS setting is located under the

Provisioning menu, option 3, Switching Type.
a)
b)
c)
d)
From the Total Access 3000 main menu, select option 2, Common A.
Select option 7, Provisioning.
Select option 3, Switching Type.
Set Switching Type to Line or Path.
LINE switches based on the Line (K1, K2) indicators.

PATH switches based on the STS-1 path level monitoring.
NOTE
Ensure that both units are set for the same Switching Type, Line or Path. If
Linked Provisioning is Enabled, setting the Switching Type on one unit will
automatically transfer that setting to the other unit.
4.)
If Linked Provisioning is Disabled, manually set MUX B to the

same Switching Type setting as MUX A.
a)
b)
c)
d)
1.2.2
From the Total Access 3000 main menu, select option 2, Common A.
Select option 7, Provisioning.
Select option 3, Switching Type.
Set Switching Type to Line or Path.
Faceplate APS Button

1.
Please note the following functions of the faceplate APS button.
When activated while simultaneously depressing the Test/Enable switch

on the stand by unit, a switch to protection is forced.
When activated while simultaneously depressing the Test/Enable switch
from the on line unit, the APS Lockout Status is toggled.
NOTE
Performing a Perform APS switch (option 2) from the Protection Configuration
menu will override an APS Lockout Status of INHIBIT.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP743-1E

DLP-743
Page 4 of 4

1.2.3
Facpelate APS LED Indicators

Upon installation and provisioning of the Total Access 3000 MUX
modules, the faceplate LEDs should read as in Table 1.
A Flashing Yellow POWER LED indicates an Out-of-Service, Unassigned Service
State. On the DS3 MX this LED will be Solid Yellow when in the Unassigned State.
Table 1. Faceplate LEDs
Working
Protect
POWER
Flashing Yellow
POWER
Flashing Yellow
STATUS
Red
STATUS
Red
TEST
Off
TEST
Off
LOCKOUT
Off
LOCKOUT
Off (if set for ALLOW)

Yellow (if set for INHIBIT)
ONLINE
Off
ONLINE
Off
1.2.4
Disable Protection Switching

1.
Disabling protection switching.

1.)
2.)
Access the Main Menu of both Total Access 3000 MUX units and select
option 7, Protection Configuration.
Select option 1, APS Lockout Status, and toggle from ALLOW to
INHIBIT. Ensure that both Mux modules are set for an APS Lockout
Status of INHIBIT.
CAUTION
In this configuration, transmission to the network will be lost if the online mux
is rendered out-of-service.
NOTE
In this configuration, the ONLINE MUX (indicated by faceplate LED)
is transmitting to the network while both MUX units are receiving
from the network and distributing to the access modules.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 1 of 12
1.1
Configuring the Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 List 2
MUX Module with Subtended STS-1 List 2 MUX Modules in
Single TID Mode
NOTE
and the "b" represents the Total Access 3010 parameter. For example, the
differing number of slots in the two platforms, 28 for the Total Access 3000
and 22 for the Total Access 3010, would be displayed 28/22.
1.1.1
Introduction
This procedure details the steps which must be performed to provision Total Access
3000/3010 OC-3 List 2 MUX Modules that have been properly installed in a Total
Access 3000/3010 System Chassis and are to subtend up to two STS-1 List 2 MUX
Modules installed in Total Access 3000/3010 Expansion Shelves. A completion
checklist is provided at the end of this procedure for sign-off completion of this phase
of installation. See Figure 1 for an overview drawing.
Total Access 3000 with OC-3 MUX

SCU
1181018L1
OC-3MX
OC-3MX
1181031L1
1181031L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
OPTICS
OPTICS
TEST
TEST
CLOCK
CLOCK
LOCKOUT
LOCKOUT
MODE
SELECT
ALM
FSE
HST
ACO
HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
ALM
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
LP2
ALM
TX
ALM
TX
TX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
RS-485
ACO
C
R
A
SONET
Add/Drop MUX
(ADM)
TL1 Over
DCC
ON LINE
ON LINE
MPS
MPS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
F
T
SCU
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
ACT
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
ACT
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
10
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
11
RX
ACT
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
12
M
O
N
13
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
14
M
O
N
15
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
16
M
O
N
17
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
18
M
O
N
19
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
20
M
O
N
21
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
22
M
O
N
23
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
24
M
O
N
25
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
26
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
27
28
Total Access 3000 with STS-1 MUX

STS-1 MX STS-1 MX HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C
SCU
1181106L1
1181018L1
1181031L1
1181031L1
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
CLOCK
CLOCK
LOCKOUT
LOCKOUT
SELECT
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
DSX
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
TST
LP1
LP1
LP1
LP2
ALM
ACO
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
ALM
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
LP2
MODE
FSE
HST
1181106L1
PWR
POWER
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
1181106L1
DSX
TST
TST
LP1
LP2
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
DSX
LP2
ALM
TX
PWR
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
LP2
ALM
TX
ALM
TX
TX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
ACO
C
R
A
ON LINE
ON LINE
MPS
MPS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
SCU
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
F
T
M
O
N
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
ACT
RX
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
ACT
RX
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
21
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
20
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
19
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
18
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
17
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
16
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
15
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
14
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
13
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
12
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
11
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
10
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
M
O
N
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
22
23
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
24
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
25
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
26
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
RX
A
P
S
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
27
28
Total Access 3000 with STS-1 MUX

STS-1 MX STS-1 MX HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C
SCU
1181106L1
1181018L1
1181031L1
1181031L1
POWER
POWER
STATUS
STATUS
TEST
TEST
CLOCK
CLOCK
MODE
SELECT
ACO
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
PWR
DSX
TST
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
ALM
TX
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
LP2
1181106L1
PWR
DSX
TST
LP1
ALM
TX
ALM
FSE
HST
1181106L1
PWR
LP2
ALM
TX
ALM
TX
TX
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
E
Q
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
ACO
LOCKOUT
C
LOCKOUT
ON LINE
R
A
ON LINE
MPS
MPS
TEST/
ENABLE
TEST/
ENABLE
F
T
SCU
TX
TX
M
O
N
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
10
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
11
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
12
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
13
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
14
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
15
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
16
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
17
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
18
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
A
P
S
20
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
21
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
19
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
22
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
23
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
A
P
S
24
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
25
TX
M
O
N
RX
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
TX
M
O
N
RX
A
P
S
M
O
N
RX
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
26
ACT
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
27
RX
A
P
S
ACT
A
P
S
GRN = NORM
YEL = MAN
28
Figure 1. Overview
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 2 of 12
1.1.2
tasks detailed in NTP-501 for all shelves, completed all of the installation tasks
detailed in NTP-506 for the Intelligent NE (Host) shelf that contains the OC-3 List 2
MUX, and completed all of the installation tasks detailed in NTP-505 for the
Expansion Shelves (Clients) that will contain the STS-1 List 2 MUX.
NOTE
Before starting the DLP procedure below, an NSAP Area Address and System
ID (for DCC Communications between the OC-3 List 2 MUX and the
interfacing equipment in terminal point-to-point mode) will need to be
assigned by the Network Administrator. A Target ID (TID) will also need to
be assigned for use in the Total Access 3000 SCU.
1.1.3
Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3 MUX, ADTRAN P/N 1181031L2 (one for
non-redundant, two for redundant systems)
Total Access 3000/3010 STS-1 MUX, ADTRAN P/N 1181030L2 (one per
Expansion Shelf for non-redundant, two per Expansion Shelf for redundant
systems)
Total Access 3000/3010 Quad BNC I/O Module, ADTRAN P/N 1181007L1
Total Access 3000/3010 Dual BNC Adapter Module, ADTRAN P/N 1181004L1
(one per Expansion Shelf)
Total Access 3000/3010 SCU, ADTRAN P/N 1181018L1 (one per shelf)
High Speed Cabling (coax) of proper length with attached male BNC connectors
on both ends for connecting Expansion Shelves to Intelligent NE (four in
applications with two Expansion Shelves)
Access to a computer with LAN access (if the Total Access 3000/3010 is
connected to a LAN) or a computer with an RS-232 interface and terminal
emulation program (if the Total Access 3000/3010 is not connected to a LAN)
WARNING
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 3 of 12
CAUTION
to electrical components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when
1.2

1. Install the Quad BNC Adapter Module to Intelligent NE (Host) Shelf
1.) The Quad BNC Adapter Module, ADTRAN P/N 1181007L1 to the rear of the
Intelligent NE (Host) Shelf that contains the Total Access 3000/3010 OC-3
List 2 MUX, ADTRAN P/N 1181031L2.
for details go to DLP-708
NOTE
The Dual and Quad BNC Adapter Modules are attached to the backplane of
the Total Access 3000/3010 in the same manner.
2
Install the Dual BNC Adapter Module to Expansion Shelves (Client)

Installing Dual BNC Adapter Module to Expansion Shelves (Client)
3. Install High Speed Cabling from Intelligent NE to Expansion Shelves

1.) Use a BNC ended male-to-male high speed cable of proper length to connect
to the female BNC connector labeled TX on port 1 (located closest to the
backplane) on the Quad BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of
the Intelligent NE (Host) shelf.
2.) Connect the other end of this cable to the female BNC connector labeled RX
on the Dual BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the first
Expansion Shelf.
to the female BNC connector labeled RX on port 1 (located closest to the
backplane) on the Quad BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of
the Intelligent NE (Host) shelf.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 4 of 12
4.) Connect the other end of this cable to the female BNC connector labeled TX
on the Dual BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the first
Expansion Shelf.
to the female BNC connector labeled TX on port 2 (located closest to the aisle)
on the Quad BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the
Intelligent NE (Host) shelf.
6.) Connect the other end of this cable to the female BNC connector labeled RX
on the Dual BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the second
Expansion Shelf.
to the female BNC connector labeled RX on port 2 (located closest to the aisle)
on the Quad BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the
8.) Connect the other end of this cable to the female BNC connector labeled TX
on the Dual BNC Adapter Module that is installed on the rear of the second
Expansion Shelf.
4. Verify Common Modules Installed in Intelligent NE and Expansion
Shelves
1.) Verify that the SCU, ADTRAN P/N 1181018L1 and either single or redundant
OC-3 List 2 MUX Modules, ADTRAN P/N 1181031L2 are installed in the
2.) Verify that the SCU, ADTRAN P/N 1181018L1 and either single or redundant
STS-1 List 2 MUX Modules, ADTRAN P/N 1181030L2 are installed in all
Expansion Shelves (Client).
5. Verify RS-485 Bus Connection
1.) Verify that DLP-712 (part of NTP-501) has been completed. Pins A, B, and
Drain/Ground OUT on wire-wrap header P2 on the rear of the Intelligent NE
(Host) shelf should be connected to pins A, B, and Drain/Ground IN on
wire-wrap header P2 on the rear of the first Expansion Shelf (Client). Pins A,
B, and Drain/Ground OUT on wire-wrap header P2 on the rear of the first
Expansion Shelf (Client) should be connected to pins A, B, and Drain/Ground
IN on wire-wrap header P2 on the rear of the second Expansion Shelf
(Client).
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 5 of 12
6. Provision SCU in the Intelligent NE (Host) Shelf

1.) Access the menus for the Intelligent NE (Host) shelf by either connecting
through the front panel craft port (see DLP-715) or by Telnet session if
connected to the LAN.
2.)
From the Main Menu, select System Controller.
3.)
From the System Controller Main Menu, select Provisioning.
4.)
From the Provisioning Menu, select General.
5.)
From the General Menu, select Management Ports.
6.)
From the Management Ports Menu, select Interbank Comm. Mode.
7.)
Set Interbank Comm. Mode to Host.
8.)
Verify that the HST LED on the SCU front panel is green.
9.)
Press <Esc> until you have returned to the SCU Provisioning Menu.
10.) Select TL1.

11.) From the TL1 Menu, select Target ID (TID) and enter the valid Target ID
that was obtained from the Network Administrator.
12.) Select Legacy AID Compatibility and set to Enable.
NOTE
The Legacy AID Provisioning option is set to Enabled so that the OC-3 L2
MUX may be supported by previous NMA templates that do not support
subtended STS-1 circuits. This option should only be enabled when using the
OC-3 L2 MUX (P/N 1181031L2) and compatible NMA templates.
13.) Press <Esc> to return to the Total Access Main Menu.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 6 of 12
7. Provision SCU in the Expansion Shelves (Client)

1.) Access the menus for the Expansion Shelf (Client) by either connecting
2.) From the Main Menu, select System Controller.
3.) From the System Controller Main Menu, select Provisioning.
4.) From the Provisioning Menu, select General.
5.) From the General Menu, select Interbank Comm. Mode.
6.) Set Interbank Comm. Mode to Client.
7.) Verify that the HST LED on the SCU front panel has gone out.
8.) Press <Esc> until you have returned to the SCU Provisioning Menu.
9.) Select TL1.
10.) From the TL1 Menu, select Client Shelf Management.
11.) From the Client Shelf Management Menu, select Expansion Shelf.
12.) You will be automatically directed to the Unit Number Menu where the Unit
Number for the shelf will need to be added. After selecting the Unit Number,
the SCU will automatically verify that the Unit Number does not conflict with
the Unit Number of any other shelf. If there is a conflict, a message will be
displayed and another Unit Number will need to be selected. The first
subtended shelf is typically assigned the Unit Number 2 and the second
subtended shelf is typically assigned the Unit Number 3.
13.) Verify that the Target ID (TID) has been automatically updated and is the
same as the Target ID (TID) that was entered at the Intelligent NE (Host)
Shelf SCU.
15.) Repeat section 1.2.7 above for each of the Expansion Shelves.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 7 of 12
8. Provision OC-3 List 2 MUX in the Intelligent NE (Host) Shelf

2.) From the Main Menu, select the OC-3 MUX.
3.) From the OC-3 MUX Main Menu, select Provisioning.
4.) From the Provisioning Menu, select OC-3 Provisioning.
5.) Set OC-3 Transmission Sync Message to Derive From Source.
6.) Press <Esc> to return to the Provisioning Menu and select EC-1 #1
Provisioning.
7.) From the EC-1 #1 Provisioning Menu, set Transmission Sync Message to
Derive From Source.
8.) Press <Esc> to return to the Provisioning Menu and select EC-1 #2
Provisioning.
9.) From the EC-1 #2 Provisioning Menu, set Transmission Sync Message to
Derive From Source.
10.) Press <Esc> to return to the Provisioning Menu and select MUX
Provisioning.
11.) Verify that Linked Provisioning is Enabled when using redundant MUX.
12.) Set Clock Source to Receive OC-3 A & B.
13.) Select DCC Options.
14.) From the DCC Options Menu, select OC-3 DCC.
15.) From the OC-3 DCC Menu, set DCC Mode to User.
16.) Press <Esc> to return to the DCC Options Menu and select EC-1 #1 DCC.
17.) From the EC-1 #1 DCC Menu, set DCC Mode to Disabled.
18.) Press <Esc> to return to the DCC Options Menu and select EC-1 #2 DCC.
19.) From the EC-1 #2 DCC Menu, set DCC Mode to Disabled.
20.) Press <Esc> to return to the DCC Options Menu and select System ID.
21.) Enter the System ID provided by the Network Administrator.
22.) Select NSAP Area Address and enter the NSAP Area Address provided by
the Network Administrator.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 8 of 12
NOTE
In redundant applications, the System ID and the NSAP Area Address must
be entered in both the A and B OC-3 L2 MUX individually. These entries are
not automatically updated through Linked Provisioning.
23.) Verify that the Target ID (TID) has been automatically updated and is
the same as the Target ID (TID) that was entered at the Intelligent NE (Host)
Shelf SCU.
24.) Press <Esc> to return to the OC-3 Main Menu and select STS-1 Mapping.
25.) From the STS-1 Mapping screen, map STS-1 #1 to DS1 Drops, map STS-1
#2 to EC-1 #1, and map STS-1 #3 to EC-1 #2. The MUX Service State must
be either Out-of-service, Maintenance or Out-of-service, Unassigned to map
the STS-1s. This mapping is required for TIRKS OSS.
26.) Press <Esc> to return to the OC-3 Main Menu and select VT1.5 Mapping.
27.) From the VT1.5 Mapping screen, select M13 1-to-1 Mapping. This is
required for TIRKS OSS.
9. Provision STS-1 List 2 MUX in the Expansion Shelves (Client)
1.) Access the menus for the Expansion Shelf (Client) by either connecting
2.) From the Main Menu, select the STS-1 MUX.
3.) From the STS-1 Main Menu, select Provisioning.
4.) Verify Linked Provisioning is Enabled.
5.) Verify Clock Source is set to Receive STS-1 Loop.
6.) Select DCC Mode and set to Disabled.
7.) Press <Esc> to return to the STS-1 Main Menu and select VT1.5 Mapping.
8.) From the VT1.5 Mapping screen, select M13 1-to-1 Mapping. This is
required for TIRKS OSS.
10.) Repeat section 1.2.9 above for each of the Expansion Shelves.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 9 of 12
10. Place Equipment In Service

2.)
From the Main Menu, select OC-3 MUX.
3.)
From the OC-3 MUX Main Menu, select Provisioning.
4.)
From the Provisioning Menu, select MUX Provisioning.
5.)
From the MUX Provisioning Menu, set MUX Service State to In Service.
6.)
Press <Esc> to return to the Provisioning Menu and select EC-1 #1

Provisioning.
7.)
From the EC-1 #1 Provisioning Menu, set Service State to In Service.
8.)
Press <Esc> to return to the Provisioning Menu and select EC-1 #2

Provisioning.
9.)
From the EC-1 #2 Provisioning Menu, set Service State to In Service.
NOTE
In redundant applications, the Service States for both A and B OC-3 L2 MUX
must be placed In Service individually.
10.) Exit the menus for the Intelligent NE (Host) shelf and access the menus for
the Expansion Shelf (Client) by either connecting through the front panel
craft port (see DLP-715) or by Telnet session if connected to the LAN.
11.) From the Main Menu, select STS-1 MUX.
12.) From the STS-1 Main Menu, select Provisioning.
13.) From the STS-1 Provisioning Main Menu, set Service State to In Service.
NOTE
In redundant applications, the Service State for both A and B STS-1 L2 MUX
must be placed In Service individually.
15.) Repeat steps 10-14; section 1.2.10 above for each of the Expansion Shelves.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 10 of 12
1.3
Completion Checklist
Obtain NSAP Area Address and System ID for OC-3 L2 MUX (Network
Administrator)
Obtain Target ID for Host SCU (Network Administrator)
Mount and power 1 Host Total Access 3000 and 2 Client Total Access 3000
shelves. Each shelf should have:
Chassis (1181001L1)
SCU (1181018L1)
1 or 2 OC-3 L2 MUX (1181031L2)
Quad BNC adapter (1181007L1)
Appropriate line cards for intended service
Client shelf
Chassis (1181001L1)
SCU (1181018L1)
1 or 2 STS-1 L2 MUX (1181030L2)
Dual BNC adapter (1181004L1)
Appropriate line cards for intended service
Connect High Speed (i.e. coax) cable from Host to Client shelves
Port 1 on Quad BNC connects to Dual BNC on Expansion Shelf #1, Tx to Rx,
Rx to Tx
Port 2 on Quad BNC connects to Dual BNC on Expansion Shelf #2, Tx to Rx,
Rx to Tx
Verify RS-485 connected

Host shelf
P2 OUT on Client shelf to P2 IN on Expansion Shelf 1. P2 OUT on

Expansion Shelf 1 to P2 IN on Expansion shelf 2. A to A, B to B,
Drain/Ground to Drain/Ground.
Provision SCU on Intelligent NE (Host) shelf

SCU/Provisioning/General/Management Ports/Interbank Comm. Mode Host
SCU/Provisioning/TL1/Target ID As appropriate designated by Network

Administrator
SCU/Provisioning/TL1/Legacy AID Compatibility Enable
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 11 of 12
Provision SCU on Expansion (Client) shelf

SCU/Provisioning/General/Management Ports/Interbank Comm.

Mode Client
SCU/Provisioning/TL1/Client Shelf Management Expansion Shelf
Automatic connection to Unit Number 2 (for Expansion Shelf #1) or 3 (for

Expansion Shelf #2)
Verify Target ID is same as what was entered in the Host SCU
Repeat procedure for Expansion Shelf #1 and #2
Provision OC-3 L2 MUX

OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/OC-3 Provisioning/OC-3 Transmission Sync

Message Derive From Source
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/EC1 #1 Provisioning/ Transmission Sync Message

Derive From Source
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/EC1 #2 Provisioning/ Transmission Sync Message

Derive From Source
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/Linked Provisioning Enabled

(for redundant MUX operation)
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/Clock Source Receive OC-3

from both A and B Fibers
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/OC-3 DCC/DCC

Mode User
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/EC1 #1 DCC/

DCC Mode Disabled
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/EC1 #2 DCC/

DCC Mode Disabled
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/System ID per

Network Administrator
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/NSAP Area

Address per Network Administrator
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/DCC Options/Terminal ID

verify that it matches the Target ID on the SCU
OC-3 MUX/STS-1 Mapping

STS-1 #1 DS1 Drops
STS-1 #2 EC-1 #1
STS-1 #3 EC-1 #2
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TADLP744-1E

DLP-744
Page 12 of 12

OC-3 MUX/VT1.5 Mapping M13 1-to-1 Mapping
Provision STS-1 L2 MUX

STS-1 MUX/Provisioning/Linked Provisioning Enabled (for redundant

operation)
STS-1 MUX/Provisioning/Clock Source Receive STS-1 Loop
STS-1 MUX/Provisioning/DCC Mode Disabled
STS-1 MUX/VT1.5 Mapping M13 1-to-1 Mapping
Repeat for second Expansion Shelf
Place Equipment In Service

Intelligent NE (Client) Shelf

OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/MUX Provisioning/MUX Service State In

Service
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/EC-1 #1 Provisioning/Service State In Service
OC-3 MUX/Provisioning/EC-1 #2 Provisioning/Service State In Service
Repeat for OC-3 MUX B (if redundant configuration)
Expansion Shelf #1
STS-1 MUX A/Provisioning/Service State In Service
Repeat for STS-1 MUX B (if redundant configuration)
Expansion Shelf #2
STS-1 MUX A/Provisioning/Service State In Service
Repeat for STS-1 MUX B (if redundant configuration)
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG800-1E

SECTION 8
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Trouble Shooting Guide

Find the Table in the List Below
Then Go To:
Table 1.
SCU Alarm Summary 1181018L1
Page 3
Table 2.
DS3 MUX Alarm Summary 1181020L1
Page 4
Table 3.
STS-1 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181030L1
Page 7
Table 4.
STS-1 L2 MUX Alarm Summary 1181030L2
Page 17
Table 5.
OC-3 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181031L1
Page 26
Table 6.
OC-3 L2 MUX Alarm Summary 1181031L2
Page 36
Table 7.
DS3 CSM Alarm Summary 1181041L1
Page 56
Table 8.
DSX-1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181050L1
Page 63
Table 9.
HDSL Access Module Alarm Summary 1181101L1
Page 67
Table 10. HDSL Access Module Alarm Summary 1181106L1
Page 68
Table 11. HDSL2 L2 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181111L2
Page 69
Table 12. Quad DSX-1/E1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181402L1
Page 70
Table 13. Octal DS1 IMA Access Module Alarm Summary 1181409L1
Page 72
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG800-1E

SECTION 8
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 1 of 74
Total Access 3000/3010 Trouble Shooting Guide

This section of ADTRANs Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual is designed for use
by Network Operation Centers, technicians, and network engineers who are involved in
the every day use of this equipment. This document contains alarm information that is
sent to the System Controller Unit for processing. Each table included in this section
represents a specific module.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 2 of 74
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 3 of 74
Table 1. SCU Alarm Summary 1181018L1
Alarm
Level
LED*
Line card plugged in and communicating/Line card

removed
User Defined
ALM
Module Fuse
Line card fuse blown
User Defined
ALM
Critical Alarm
Major alarms in 6 or more slots
User Defined
ALM
Remote Input
Remote input on rear of shelf has been activated
User Defined
ALM
Extn Input #1
External #1 input on rear of shelf has been activated
User Defined
ALM
Extn Input #2
External #2 input on rear of shelf has been activated
User Defined
ALM
-48V Bus A Fail
Loss of power on A bus
User Defined
ALM
-48V Bus B Fail
Loss of power on B bus
User Defined
ALM
Link Down
Description
*Highest level alarm present should be shown. I.e. if there is a major and minor alarm, the status LED
should be red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 4 of 74
Table 2. DS3 MUX Alarm Summary 1181020L1

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Card is out of service. It has either never

been provisioned or it has been put in
maintenance mode.
Info
Power = Yellow
Qtr, CV-L
Code Violations - Line
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L
Errored Seconds - Line
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVP-P
Code Violations - Path; M23
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVCP-P
Code Violations - Path: C bit
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVCP-PFE
Code Violations - Path; far end
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESP-P
Errored Seconds - Parity
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESCP-P
Errored Seconds - CP bit parity errors
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESCP-PFE
Errored Seconds - M-frames; far end
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESP-P
Severely Errored Seconds - P bit Parity
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESCP-P
Severely Errored Seconds - CP bit parity

errors
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESCP-PFE
Severely Errored Seconds - M-frames; far end
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UASP-P
Unavailable Seconds - Path; P bit parity
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SAS-P
Errored seconds - AIS or effored frames
Alert
N/C
Qtr, PSC
Protection Switching Events
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L
Code Violations - Line
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L
Errored Seconds - Line
Alert
N/C
Day, CVP-P
Code Violations - Path; M23
Alert
N/C
Day, CVCP-P
Code Violations - Path: C bit
Alert
N/C
Day, CVCP-PFE
Code Violations - Path; far end
Alert
N/C
TL1
Out of Service
Threshold Quarter Hour
Threshold Daily
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 5 of 74
Table 2. DS3 MUX Alarm Summary 1181020L1 (continued)

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, ESP-P
Errored Seconds - Parity
Alert
N/C
Day, ESCP-P
Errored Seconds - CP bit parity errors
Alert
N/C
Day, ESCP-PFE
Errored Seconds - M-frames; far end
Alert
N/C
Day, SESP-P
Severely Errored Seconds - P bit Parity
Alert
N/C
Day, SESCP-P
Severely Errored Seconds - CP bit parity errors
Alert
N/C
Day, SESCP-PFE
Severely Errored Seconds - M-frames; far end
Alert
N/C
Day, UASP-P
Unavailable Seconds - Path; P bit parity
Alert
N/C
Day, UASCP-PFE
Unavailable Seconds - Path; CP bit parity
Alert
N/C
Day, SAS-P
Errored seconds - AIS or effored frames
Alert
N/C
Day, PSC
Protection Switching Events
Alert
N/C
DS3 Eq, SA
Far End, Equipment, Service Affecting
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 LOS
Far End, Loss Of Signal
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 OOF
Far End, Out Of Frame
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 OOF
Far End, Out Of Frame
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 AIS
Far End, Alarm Indication Signal
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 IDLE
Far End, Receiving Idle Code
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 Eq, NSA
Far End, Equipment, Non Service Affecting
Minor
Status Yellow
COM Eq, NSA
Far End, Com Equipment, Non Service

Affecting
Minor
Status Yellow
Mul DS1 LOS
Far End, Multiple DS1, Loss Of Signal
Minor
Status Yellow
DS1 Eq, SA
Far End, DS1 Equipment, Service Affecting
Minor
Status Yellow
Sgl DS1 LOS
Far End, Single DS1, Loss Of Signal
Minor
Status Yellow
DS1 Eq, NSA
Far End, DS1 Equipment, Non Service

Affecting
Minor
Status Yellow
FEAC
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 6 of 74
Table 2. DS3 MUX Alarm Summary 1181020L1 (continued)

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
DS3 LOS
DS3, Loss of Signal
Critical
Status Red
DS3 OOF
DS3, Out of Frame
Critical
Status Red
DS3 AIS
DS3, Alarm Indication Signal
Alert
Status Red
DS3 Idle
DS3, Receiving Idle Code
Minor
Status Red
DS3 RAI
DS3, Remote Alarm Indication
Major
Status Red
DS3 Red
DS3, Red Alarm
Critical
Status Red
DS3 Line Lpbk
DS3, Line loopback
Alert
N/C
DS3 Local Lpbk
DS3, Local Looptback
Alert
N/C
DS3 TLOS
DS3, Tx Loss Of Signal
Critical
Status Red
Low DS3 Sig Lev
Low DS3 Rx Signal Level
Critical
Status Red
APS Switch
Auto Protection Switch
Alert
N/C
Equipment Fail
Equipment Failure, RAM test, SW

CRC,
Alert
N/C
Inhibit DS3 APS
Inhibit DS3 ASP Switches
Alert
N/C
DS2 Line Lpbk
DS2 Line Loopback
Alert
N/C
DS1 Line Lpbk
DS1 Line Loopback
Alert
N/C
Pair Mismatch
HDSL Line Card Version Mismatch
Major
N/C
PM8313
Near Loopback Alarms
Other Alarms
Table Alarms
*Highest level alarm present should be shown. I.e. if there is a major and minor alarm, the
status LED should be red.
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 7 of 74
Table 3. STS-1 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181030L1

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

maintenance mode.
Info
Power Yellow
***
Qtr, CV-S
Code Violation-Section. This is a count of

Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP) errors at the
Section layer (B1 bytes) over the
accumulation period.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-S
Errored Seconds-Section. This is a count of

the number of seconds during which at least
one Section layer BIP error was detected.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-S
Severely Errored Seconds-Section. This is a

count of the seconds during which 52 or
more Section layer BIP error were detected
or an SEF or LOS defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-L
Code Violation-Line, Near End. This is a

count of Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP) errors
at the Line layer (B2 bytes) over the
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L
Errored Second-Line, Near End. This

parameter is a count of the seconds during
which at least one line layer BIP error was
detected or an AIS-L was present.
Alert
N/ C
Qtr, SES-L
Severely Errored Second-Line, Near End.

This is a count of the seconds intervals
during which 51 or more Line layer BIP
errors were detected or AIS-L defect was
present.
Alert
N/ C
Qtr, UAS-L
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Near End. This

parameter is a count of seconds during
which the Line was unavailable. A Line
becomes unavailable at the onset of 10
consecutive seconds of SES-Ls.
Alert
N/ C
Qtr, FC-L
Line Failure Counts, Near End. This is a

count of 1-second intervals containing one
or more AIS-L defects.
Alert
N/ C
Required
Out of Service
STS-1 Quarter Hour

Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 8 of 74
Table 3. STS-1 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181030L1 (continued)
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, CV-LFE
Code Violation-Line, Far End. This is a

accumulation period and reported back to
the near end REI-L indication in the Line
overhead.
Alert
N/ C
Qtr, ES-LFE
Errored Second-Line, Far End. This

reported by the far end by using the REI-L
indication or an RDI-L defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE
Severely Errored Second-Line, Far End.

errors were reported by the far end or an
RDI-L defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Far End. This

which the Line was unavailable at the far
end. A Line becomes unavailable at the
onset of 10 consecutive seconds of SESLFEs.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE
Line Failure Counts, Far End. This is a

count of the number of far end failure
events. A failure event begins when the RFIL failure is declared, and ends when the
RFI-L failure is cleared.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P
Code Violation-Path, Near End. This is a

at the STS Path layer (B3 bytes) over the
Alert
N/ C
Qtr, ES-P
Errored Second-Path, Near End. This

which at least one STS Path layer BIP error
was detected or one of AIS-P, LOP-P or
UNEQ-P defects was present.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 9 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, SES-P
Severely Errored Second-Path, Near End.

during which 2400 or more STS Path layer
BIP errors were detected or one of AIS-P,
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-P
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Near End. This

which the STS Path was unavailable. An
STS Path becomes unavailable at the onset
of 10 consecutive seconds of SES-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-P
Failure Counts-Path, Near End. This is a

or more AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-PFE
Code Violation-Path, Far End. This is a

detected at the far end and reported back to
the near end using the REi-P indication.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE
Errored Second-Path, Far End. This

indication or a one-bit RDI-P defect was
present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE
Severely Errored Second-Path, Far End.

BIP errors were reported by the far end or
an RDI-P defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-PFE
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Far End. This

which the STS Path was unavailable at the
far end. A Line becomes unavailable at the
onset of 10 consecutive seconds of SESPFEs.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-PFE
Failure Counts-Path, Far End. This is a

events. A failure event begins when the RFIP failure is declared, and ends when the
RFI-P failure is cleared.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 10 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-S

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-S

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-L

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
STS-1 Daily Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 11 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, ES-LFE

Alert
N/ C
Day, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/ C
Day, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-P

Alert
N/ C
Day, SES-P

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-P

Alert
N/ C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 12 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, FC-P

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-PFE

Alert
N/C
STS-1 LOS
STS-1 Loss Of Signal. This occurs when an

all-zeros pattern on the incoming SONET
signal lasts for 100 micro seconds or longer.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 LOF
STS-1 Loss Of Frame. This occurs when a

SEF defect (a minimum of 4 sonsecutive
errored framing patterns) on the incoming
SONET signal lasts for 3ms.
Critical
Status Red
Facility Alarms
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 13 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 AIS
STS-1 Alarm Indication Signal. The STS-1

AIS alarm is detected when bits 6,7 and 8 of
the incoming K2 byte contain the '111'
pattern in five consecutive patterns and
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. It is cleared
if the defect is absent for 10 seconds.
Alert
Status Yellow
STS-1 RFI
STS-1 Remote Failure Indication. The bits 5, Minor

6 and 7 in k2 byte indicate if the far-end has
has detected a defect on the signal. The RFI
alarm is declared if the defect persists for
2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared if the
defect is absent for 10 consecutive seconds.
STS-1 SF
STS-1 Signal Fail. The SF alarm is declared

if a Line BER exceeding a userprovisionable threshold is detected.The
clearing threshold for the SF condition is
based on the BER one-tenth the threshold
for declaring the SF.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 SD
STS-1 Signal Degrade. The SD alarm is

declared if a Line BER exceeding a userprovisionable threshold is detected.The
clearing threshold for the SD condition is
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 LOP
STS-1 Loss Of Pointer. A STS-1 LOP is

declared if a valid pointer is not found in 10
consecutive frames and the defect persists
for 2.5 seconds. The STS-1 LOP alarm is
cleared if the defect is absent for a period of
10 consecutive seconds.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 AIS

AIS alarm is declared when the H1 & H2
bytes of the STS-1 Path contain an all-ones
pattern in three consecutive frames for a
period of 2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared
Alert
Status Yellow
Status Yellow
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 14 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
STS-1 SLM
STS-1 Signal Label Mismatch. The alarm is

declared if a STS-1 Signal Label (C2 byte)
mismatch occurs in at least five consecutive
samples and persists for 2.5 seconds. The
alarm is cleared if the defect is absent for 10
seconds.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 UEQ
STS-1 Path Unequipped. The alarm is

shows unequipped status in at least five
consecutive samples and persists for 2.5
seconds. The alarm is cleared if the defect is
absent for 10 consecutive seconds.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 RFI
STS-1 Remote Failure Indication. The bits 5, Minor

6 and 7 in G1 byte indicate if the far-end
has has detected a defect on the signal. The
RFI alarm is declared if the defect persists
for 2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared if the
DS-1 AIS
DS-1 Alarm Indication Signal. The line

cards generate AIS towards the STS-1 MUX
card upon detecting defects on the signal
coming in from the access side . The AIS
alert is declared if the defect persists for 2.5
seconds. The alert is cleared if the defect is
Alert
N/C
DS-1 LOC
DS-1 Loss Of Clock. The line card is not

generating a DS-1 clock signal to the MUX
card. The LOC alarm is declared if the
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The alarm is
cleared if the defect is absent for 10
consecutive seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 AIS
VT1.5 Alarm Indication Signal. The VT1.5

AIS alarm is declared when an all-ones
pattern in the V1 & V2 bytes in three
consecutive superframes for a period of 2.5
absent for 10 seconds.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
LED*
Status Yellow
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 15 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
VT1.5 SLM
VT1.5 Signal Label Mismatch. The alarm is

declared if a VT1.5 Signal Label (V5 byte)
seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 RFI
VT1.5 Remote Failure Indication. The

VT1.5 RFI is declared when a '1' is detected
in in bit 8 of V5 byte for ten consecutive
frames. The VT1.5 RFI alarm is declared if
the defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 LOP
VT1.5 Loss Of Pointer. A VT1.5 LOP is

for 2.5 seconds. The VT1.5 LOP alarm is
Minor
N/C
Clock HO
Clock In Holdover. This occurs when a

defect is detected on the selected SONET
clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
PRI CLOCK FAIL
Primary Clock Failed. This occurs when a

defect is detected on the selected primary
SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
SEC CLOCK FAIL
Secondary Clock Failed. This occurs when a

defect is detected on the selected Seconday
SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
Inhibit APS
Automatic Procection Switching is inhibited.
Alert
Lockout Yellow
STS-1 EQPT SA
STS-1 equipment fault detected. The card

should be replaced.
Critical
Power Red
STS-1 EQP LPBK
STS-1 fiber is in loopback towards the card
Alert
Test Yellow
Clock Alarms
Equipment Alarms
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 16 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 FAC LPBK
STS-1 fiber is in loopback towards the

network
Alert
Test Yellow
DS1 FAC LPBK
DS1 is in a loopback towards the line card
Alert
Test Yellow
should be red.
*** The power LED flashes in out of service unassigned state and is on solid for out of service
maintenece state.
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 17 of 74
Table 4. STS-1 L2 MUX Alarm Summary 1181030L2

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

maintenance mode.
Info
Power Yellow ***
Qtr, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-L

count of 1-second intervals containing one or
more AIS-L defects.
Alert
N/C
Required
Out of Service
STS-1 Quarter Hour

Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 18 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, CV-LFE

accumulation period and reported back to the
near end REI-L indication in the Line
overhead.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-P

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 19 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-P

more AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE

BIP errors were reported by the far end or an
RDI-P defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-PFE

Alert
N/C

Alert
N/C
STS-1 Daily
Thresholds
Day, CV-S
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 20 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, ES-S

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-S

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-L

more AIS-L defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-LFE

accumulation period and reported back to the
near end REI-L indication in the Line
overhead.
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 21 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-P

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-P

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-P

more AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P defects.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 22 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, CV-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

BIP errors were reported by the far end or an
RDI-P defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-PFE

Alert
N/C
STS-1 LOS
STS-1 Loss Of Signal. This occurs when an

Critical
Status Red
STS-1 LOF
STS-1 Loss Of Frame. This occurs when a

Critical
Status Red
STS-1 AIS

Alert
Status Yellow
Facility Alarms
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 23 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 RFI
STS-1 Remote Failure Indication. The bits 5,

Minor
Status Yellow
STS-1 SF
STS-1 Signal Fail. The SF alarm is declared

Critical
Status Red
STS-1 SD
STS-1 Signal Degrade. The SD alarm is

Critical
Status Red
STS-1 LOP

Critical
Status Red
STS-1 AIS

period of 2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared
Alert
Status Yellow
STS-1 SLM

seconds.
Critical
Status Red
STS-1 UEQ

Critical
Status Red
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 24 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 RFI

6 and 7 in G1 byte indicate if the far-end has
Minor
Status Yellow
DS-1 AIS

cards generate AIS towards the STS-1 MUX
Alert
N/C
DS-1 LOC

Minor
N/C
VT1.5 AIS

Alert
N/C
VT1.5 SLM

seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 RFI

Minor
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 25 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
VT1.5 LOP

Minor
N/C
Clock HO

clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
PRI CLOCK FAIL

SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
SEC CLOCK FAIL

SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
Inhibit APS
Alert
Lockout Yellow
STS-1 EQPT SA
STS-1 equipment fault detected. The card

should be replaced.
Critical
Power Red
STS-1 EQP LPBK
STS-1 fiber is in loopback towards the card
Alert
Test Yellow
STS-1 FAC LPBK
STS-1 fiber is in loopback towards the

network
Alert
Test Yellow
DS1 FAC LPBK
Alert
Test Yellow
Clock Alarms
Equipment Alarms
should be red.
maintenece state.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 26 of 74
Table 5. OC-3 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181031L1

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

maintenance mode.
Info
Power Yellow
***
Qtr, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Required
Out of Service
OC-3 Quarter Hour

Threshold
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 27 of 74
Table 5. OC-3 L1 MUX Alarm Summary 1181031L1 (continued)
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, FC-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 28 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, ES-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-P

Alert
N/ C
Qtr, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 29 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, FC-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-S

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-S

Alert
N/ C
Day, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-L

Alert
N/C
OC-3 Daily Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 30 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-P

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-P

Alert
N/ C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 31 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-P

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-PFE

Alert
N/C
OC-3 Loss Of Signal. This occurs when an

Critical**
Status Red
Facility Alarms
OC-3 LOS
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 32 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
OC-3 LOF
OC-3 Loss Of Frame. This occurs when a

Critical****
Status Red
OC-3 AIS
OC-3 Alarm Indication Signal. The OC-3

defect persists for 2.5 seconds. It is cleared if
the defect is absent for 10 seconds.
Alert
Status Yellow
OC-3 RFI
OC-3 Remote Failure Indication. The bits 5,

alarm is declared if the defect persists for 2.5
Minor
Status Yellow
OC-3 SF
OC-3 Signal Fail. The SF alarm is declared

based on the BER one-tenth the threshold for
declaring the SF.
Critical****
Status Red
OC-3 SD
OC-3 Signal Degrade. The SD alarm is

based on the BER one-tenth the threshold for
declaring the SF.
Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 LOP

Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 AIS

period of 2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared if
Alert
Status Yellow
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 33 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 SLM

seconds.
Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 UEQ

Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 RFI

6 and 7 in G1 byte indicate if the far-end has
alarm is declared if the defect persists for 2.5
Minor
Status Yellow
DS-1 AIS

cards generate AIS towards the OC-3 MUX
Alert
N/C
DS-1 LOC

Minor
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 34 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
VT1.5 AIS

Alert
N/C
VT1.5 SLM

seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 RFI

the defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The alarm
is cleared if the defect is absent for 10
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 LOP

Minor
N/C
Clock HO

clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
PRI CLOCK FAIL

SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
SEC CLOCK FAIL

SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
Clock Alarms
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 35 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Inhibit APS
Alert
Lockout Yellow
OC-3 EQP LPBK
OC-3 fiber is in loopback towards the card
Alert
Test Yellow
OC-3 FAC LPBK
OC-3 fiber is in loopback towards the

network
Alert
Test Yellow
OC-3 EQPT SA
OC-3 equipment fault detected. The card

should be replaced.
Critical**
Power Red
DS1 FAC LPBK
Alert
Test Yellow
Equipment Alarms
should be red.
**The severity changes to Major in a redundant system providing traffic can be restored by a switch to
protection.
maintenece state.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 36 of 74
Table 6. OC-3 L2 MUX Alarm Summary 1181031L2

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

maintenance mode.
Info
Power Yellow ***
Qtr, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-S
Errored Seconds-Section. This is a count

of the number of seconds during which at
least one Section layer BIP error was
detected.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-S
Severely Errored Seconds-Section. This is

a count of the seconds during which 155
or more Section layer BIP error were
detected or an SEF or LOS defect was
present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-L

count of Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP)
errors at the Line layer (B2 bytes) over the
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Required
Out of Service
OC-3 Quarter
Hour Threshold
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 37 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, FC-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE

events. A failure event begins when the
RFI-L failure is declared, and ends when
the RFI-L failure is cleared.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P

errors at the STS Path layer (B3 bytes)
over the accumulation period.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-P

which at least one STS Path layer BIP
error was detected or one of AIS-P, LOPP or UNEQ-P defects was present.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 38 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, FC-L

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-P

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 39 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, SES-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-P

or more AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P
defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-PFE

errors detected at the far end and reported
back to the near end using the REi-P
indication.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-PFE

RFI-P failure is declared, and ends when
the RFI-P failure is cleared.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 40 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, CV-S

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-S
Errored Seconds-Section. This is a count

of the number of seconds during which at
least one Section layer BIP error was
detected.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-S
Severely Errored Seconds-Section. This is

a count of the seconds during which 155
or more Section layer BIP error were
detected or an SEF or LOS defect was
present.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-L

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-L

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-L

Alert
N/C
OC-3 Daily
Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 41 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, CV-LFE

overhead.
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-LFE

Alert
N/C
Day, CV-P

Alert
N/C
Day, ES-P

Alert
N/C
Day, SES-P

Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 42 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, UAS-P

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-P

or more AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P
defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-PFE

errors detected at the far end and reported
back to the near end using the REi-P
indication.
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-PFE

present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE

Alert
N/C
Day, FC-PFE

RFI-P failure is declared, and ends when
the RFI-P failure is cleared.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 43 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
OC-3 Facility
Alarms
OC-3 LOS
OC-3 Loss Of Signal. This occurs when

an all-zeros pattern on the incoming
SONET signal lasts for 100 micro seconds
or longer.
Critical**
Status Red
OC-3 LOF
OC-3 Loss Of Frame. This occurs when a

Critical****
Status Red
OC-3 AIS
OC-3 Alarm Indication Signal. The OC-3

AIS alarm is detected when bits 6,7 and 8
of the incoming K2 byte contain the '111'
Alert
Status Yellow
OC-3 RFI
OC-3 Remote Failure Indication. The bits

5, 6 and 7 in k2 byte indicate if the farend has has detected a defect on the
signal. The RFI alarm is declared if the
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The alarm
Minor
Status Yellow
OC-3 SF
OC-3 Signal Fail. The SF alarm is

Critical****
Status Red
OC-3 SD
OC-3 Signal Degrade. The SD alarm is

Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 LOP

declared if a valid pointer is not found in
10 consecutive frames and the defect
persists for 2.5 seconds. The STS-1 LOP
alarm is cleared if the defect is absent for
a period of 10 consecutive seconds.
Critical**
Status Red
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 44 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
STS-1 AIS
STS-1 Alarm Indication Signal. The STS1 AIS alarm is declared when the H1 &
H2 bytes of the STS-1 Path contain an allones pattern in three consecutive frames
for a period of 2.5 seconds. The alarm is
seconds.
Alert
Status Yellow
STS-1 SLM
STS-1 Signal Label Mismatch. The alarm

is declared if a STS-1 Signal Label (C2
byte) mismatch occurs in at least five
seconds. The alarm is cleared if the defect
is absent for 10 seconds.
Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 UEQ

seconds. The alarm is cleared if the defect
is absent for 10 consecutive seconds.
Critical**
Status Red
STS-1 RFI
STS-1 Remote Failure Indication. The bits

5, 6 and 7 in G1 byte indicate if the farend has has detected a defect on the
signal. The RFI alarm is declared if the
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The alarm
Minor
Status Yellow
DS-1 AIS

cards generate AIS towards the OC-3
MUX card upon detecting defects on the
signal coming in from the access side .
The AIS alert is declared if the defect
persists for 2.5 seconds. The alert is
Alert
N/C
DS-1 LOC

generating a DS-1 clock signal to the
MUX card. The LOC alarm is declared if
alarm is cleared if the defect is absent for
Minor
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 45 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
VT1.5 AIS
VT1.5 Alarm Indication Signal. The

VT1.5 AIS alarm is declared when an
all-ones pattern in the V1 & V2 bytes
in three consecutive superframes for a
period of 2.5 seconds. The alarm is
seconds.
Alert
N/C
VT1.5 SLM
VT1.5 Signal Label Mismatch. The

alarm is declared if a VT1.5 Signal
Label (V5 byte) mismatch occurs in at
least five consecutive samples and
persists for 2.5 seconds. The alarm is
seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 RFI

VT1.5 RFI is declared when a '1' is
detected in in bit 8 of V5 byte for ten
consecutive frames. The VT1.5 RFI
alarm is declared if the defect persists
for 2.5 seconds. The alarm is cleared if
the defect is absent for 10 consecutive
seconds.
Minor
N/C
VT1.5 LOP
VT1.5 Loss Of Pointer. A VT1.5 LOP

is declared if a valid pointer is not
found in 10 consecutive frames and
VT1.5 LOP alarm is cleared if the
defect is absent for a period of 10
Minor
N/C
EC-1 Quarter
Hour
Threshold
Note: There are two EC-1 drops per

OC-3 L2 Mux card
Qtr, CV-S
Code Violation-Section. This is a

errors at the Section layer (B1 bytes)
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 46 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, ES-S
Errored Seconds-Section. This is a

count of the number of seconds during
which at least one Section layer BIP
error was detected.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-S
Severely Errored Seconds-Section.

This is a count of the seconds during
which 52 or more Section layer BIP
error were detected or an SEF or LOS
defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-L
Code Violation-Line, Near End. This

is a count of Bit Interleaved Parity
(BIP) errors at the Line layer (B2
bytes) over the accumulation period.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L

parameter is a count of the seconds
during which at least one line layer
BIP error was detected or an AIS-L
was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-L
Severely Errored Second-Line, Near

End. This is a count of the seconds
intervals during which 51 or more
Line layer BIP errors were detected or
AIS-L defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-L
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Near End.

This parameter is a count of seconds
during which the Line was
unavailable. A Line becomes
unavailable at the onset of 10
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-L
Line Failure Counts, Near End. This

is a count of 1-second intervals
containing one or more AIS-L defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-LFE
Code Violation-Line, Far End. This is

a count of Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP)
errors at the Line layer (B2 bytes) over
the accumulation period and reported
back to the near end REI-L indication
in the Line overhead.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 47 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, ES-LFE

BIP error was reported by the far end
by using the REI-L indication or an
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-LFE
Severely Errored Second-Line, Far

Line layer BIP errors were reported by
the far end or an RDI-L defect was
present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-LFE
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Far End.

during which the Line was unavailable
at the far end. A Line becomes
consecutive seconds of SES-LFEs.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-LFE
Line Failure Counts, Far End. This is

a count of the number of far end
failure events. A failure event begins
when the RFI-L failure is declared,
and ends when the RFI-L failure is
cleared.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-P
Code Violation-Path, Near End. This

(BIP) errors at the STS Path layer (B3
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-P

during which at least one STS Path
layer BIP error was detected or one of
AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P defects was
present.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 48 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, SES-P
Severely Errored Second-Path, Near

STS Path layer BIP errors were
detected or one of AIS-P, UNEQ-P
defects was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-P
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Near End.

during which the STS Path was
unavailable. An STS Path becomes
consecutive seconds of SES-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-P
Failure Counts-Path, Near End. This

containing one or more AIS-P, LOP-P
or UNEQ-P defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CV-PFE
Code Violation-Path, Far End. This is

errors detected at the far end and
reported back to the near end using the
REi-P indication.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE

by using the REI-L indication or a
one-bit RDI-P defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE
Severely Errored Second-Path, Far

reported by the far end or an RDI-P
defect was present.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 49 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, UAS-PFE
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Far End.

unavailable at the far end. A Line
consecutive seconds of SES-PFEs.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, FC-PFE
Failure Counts-Path, Far End. This is

when the RFI-P failure is declared,
and ends when the RFI-P failure is
cleared.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-S
Code Violation-Section. This is a

errors at the Section layer (B1 bytes)
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-S
Errored Seconds-Section. This is a

count of the number of seconds during
which at least one Section layer BIP
error was detected.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-S
Severely Errored Seconds-Section.

This is a count of the seconds during
which 52 or more Section layer BIP
error were detected or an SEF or LOS
defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L
Code Violation-Line, Near End. This

(BIP) errors at the Line layer (B2
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L

BIP error was detected or an AIS-L
was present.
Alert
N/C
EC-1 Daily
Thresholds
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 50 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, SES-L

Line layer BIP errors were detected or
AIS-L defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-L
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Near End.

during which the Line was
unavailable. A Line becomes
Alert
N/C
Day, FC-L
Line Failure Counts, Near End. This

containing one or more AIS-L defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-LFE
Code Violation-Line, Far End. This is

errors at the Line layer (B2 bytes) over
the accumulation period and reported
back to the near end REI-L indication
in the Line overhead.
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-LFE

by using the REI-L indication or an
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-LFE
Severely Errored Second-Line, Far

Line layer BIP errors were reported by
the far end or an RDI-L defect was
present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-LFE
Unavailable Seconds-Line, Far End.

during which the Line was unavailable
at the far end. A Line becomes
consecutive seconds of SES-LFEs.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 51 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, FC-LFE
Line Failure Counts, Far End. This is

when the RFI-L failure is declared,
and ends when the RFI-L failure is
cleared.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-P
Code Violation-Path, Near End. This

(BIP) errors at the STS Path layer (B3
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-P

during which at least one STS Path
layer BIP error was detected or one of
AIS-P, LOP-P or UNEQ-P defects was
present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-P

detected or one of AIS-P, UNEQ-P
defects was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-P
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Near End.

unavailable. An STS Path becomes
consecutive seconds of SES-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Day, FC-P
Failure Counts-Path, Near End. This

containing one or more AIS-P, LOP-P
or UNEQ-P defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-PFE
Code Violation-Path, Far End. This is

errors detected at the far end and
reported back to the near end using the
REi-P indication.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 52 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, ES-PFE

by using the REI-L indication or a
one-bit RDI-P defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

reported by the far end or an RDI-P
defect was present.
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE
Unavailable Seconds-Path, Far End.

unavailable at the far end. A Line
consecutive seconds of SES-PFEs.
Alert
N/C
Day, FC-PFE
Failure Counts-Path, Far End. This is

when the RFI-P failure is declared,
and ends when the RFI-P failure is
cleared.
Alert
N/C
EC-1 LOS
EC-1 Loss Of Signal. This occurs

when an all-zeros pattern on the
incoming SONET signal lasts for 100
micro seconds or longer.
Major
Status Red
EC-1 LOF
EC-1 Loss Of Frame. This occurs

when a SEF defect (a minimum of 4
sonsecutive errored framing patterns)
on the incoming SONET signal lasts
for 3ms.
Major
Status Red
EC-1 Facility
Alarms
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 53 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
EC-1 AIS
EC-1 Alarm Indication Signal. The

EC-1 AIS alarm is detected when bits
6,7 and 8 of the incoming K2 byte
contain the '111' pattern in five
consecutive patterns and defect
persists for 2.5 seconds. It is cleared if
Alert
Status Yellow
EC-1 RFI
EC-1 Remote Failure Indication. The

bits 5, 6 and 7 in k2 byte indicate if
the far-end has has detected a defect
on the signal. The RFI alarm is
declared if the defect persists for 2.5
seconds. The alarm is cleared if the
defect is absent for 10 consecutive
seconds.
Minor
Status Yellow
EC-1 SF
EC-1 Signal Fail. The SF alarm is

declared if a Line BER exceeding a
user-provisionable threshold is
detected.The clearing threshold for the
SF condition is based on the BER onetenth the threshold for declaring the
SF.
Major
Status Red
EC-1 SD
EC-1 Signal Degrade. The SD alarm is

declared if a Line BER exceeding a
user-provisionable threshold is
detected.The clearing threshold for the
SD condition is based on the BER
one-tenth the threshold for declaring
the SF.
Major
Status Red
EC-1 LOP
EC-1 Loss Of Pointer. A EC-1 LOP is

declared if a valid pointer is not found
in 10 consecutive frames and the
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The
EC-1 LOP alarm is cleared if the
defect is absent for a period of 10
Major
Status Red
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 54 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
EC-1 AIS
EC-1 Alarm Indication Signal. The

EC-1 AIS alarm is declared when the
H1 & H2 bytes of the EC-1 Path
contain an all-ones pattern in three
consecutive frames for a period of 2.5
defect is absent for 10 seconds.
Alert
Status Yellow
EC-1 SLM
EC-1 Signal Label Mismatch. The

alarm is declared if a EC-1 Signal
Label (C2 byte) mismatch occurs in at
seconds.
Major
Status Red
EC-1 UEQ
EC-1 Path Unequipped. The alarm is

declared if a EC-1 Signal Label (C2
byte) shows unequipped status in at
Major
Status Red
EC-1 RFI
EC-1 Remote Failure Indication. The

bits 5, 6 and 7 in G1 byte indicate if
the far-end has has detected a defect
on the signal. The RFI alarm is
declared if the defect persists for 2.5
defect is absent for 10 consecutive
seconds.
Minor
Status Yellow
Clock HO
Clock In Holdover. This occurs when

a defect is detected on the selected
SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
PRI CLOCK
FAIL
Primary Clock Failed. This occurs

when a defect is detected on the
selected primary SONET clock source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
Clock Alarms
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 55 of 74
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
SEC CLOCK
FAIL
Secondary Clock Failed. This occurs

when a defect is detected on the
selected Seconday SONET clock
source.
Minor
CLOCK Yellow
Inhibit APS
Automatic Procection Switching is

inhibited.
Alert
Lockout Yellow
OC-3 EQPT
SA
OC-3 equipment fault detected. The

card should be replaced.
Critical**
Power Red
OC-3 EQP
LPBK
OC-3 fiber is in a loopback towards

the card
Alert
Test Yellow
OC-3 FAC
LPBK
OC-3 fiber is in a loopback towards

the network
Alert
Test Yellow
DS1 FAC
LPBK
DS1 is in a loopback towards the line

card
Alert
Test Yellow
Equipment
Alarms
**The severity changes to Major in a redundant system providing traffic can be restored by a
switch to protection.
*** The power LED flashes in out of service unassigned state and is on solid for out of
service maintenance state.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 56 of 74
Table 7. DS3 CSM Alarm Summary 1181041L1

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Card is out of service. It has either

never been provisioned or it has been
put in maintenance mode.
Info
Power Yellow
Qtr, CV-L
Code Violation-Line. This is a count

of both bipolar violation and
excessive zeros occurring over the
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-L
Errored Second-Line. This parameter

containing one or more bipolar
violations, excessive zeros, or loss of
signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-L
Severely Errored Second-Line. This is

a count of 1-second intervals
containing X or more bipolar
violations plus excessive zeros, or one
or more loss of signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, LOSS-L
Loss Of Signal Second-Line. This is a

count of 1-second intervals containing
one or more loss of signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVP-P
Code Violation P-bit Parity. This is

the count of P-bit parity errors.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVCP-P
Code Violations CP-bit Parity. This is

the count of CP-bit parity errors.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVCPPFE
Code Violations CP-bit Parity, Far

End. This is counted when the three
FEBE bits in a M-frame are not all set
to 1.
Alert
N/C
Required
Out of Service
DS3 Quarter
Hour Threshold
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 57 of 74
Table 7. DS3 CSM Alarm Summary 1181041L1 (continued)

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, ESP-P
Errored Second P-bit Parity. This is

the count of 1-second intervals
containing the occurrence of one or
more P-bit parity error, one or more
severely errored frame defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESCP-P
Errored Second CP-bit Parity. This is

more CP-bit parity error, one or more
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESCP-PFE
Errored Second CP-bit Parity, Far

End. This is the count of 1-second
intervals when the three FEBE bits in
a M-frame are not all set to 1.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESP-P
Severely Errored Second P-bit Parity.

This is the count of 1-second intervals
containing X or more P-bit parity
errors, severely errored frame defects,
or one or more alarm indication signal
defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESCP-P
Severely Errored Second CP-bit

Parity. This is the count of 1-second
intervals containing X or more CP-bit
parity errors, severely errored frame
defects, or one or more alarm
indication signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESCPPFE

Parity, Far End. This is the count of
1-second intervals containing X or
more times when the three FEBE bits
in a M-frame are not all set to 1.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UASP-P
Unavailable Second P-bit Parity. This

is the count of 1-second intervals for
which the DS3 path is unavailable.
The path becomes unavailable after 10
contiguous SESP-Ps and becomes
available after 10 contiguous seconds
without any SESP-Ps.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 58 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, UASCP-P
Unavailable Second CP-bit Parity.

for which the DS3 path is unavailable.
contiguous SESCP-Ps and becomes
without any SESCP-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UASCPPFE
Unavailable Second CP-bit Parity, Far

intervals for which the DS3 path is
unavailable.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SAS-P
SEF/AIS Second. This is the count of

1-second intervals containing one or
more severely errored frame defects or
alarm indication signals defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SASCPPFE
SEF/AIS Second, Far End. This is the

one or more far end severely errored
frame defects or alarm indication
signals defects.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, PSC
Protection Switching Count. This is

the count of the number of protection
switching events.
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-L
Code Violation-Line. This is a count

of both bipolar violation and
excessive zeros occurring over the
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-L
Errored Second-Line. This parameter

containing one or more bipolar
violations, excessive zeros, or loss of
signal defects.
Alert
N/C
DS3 Day
Threshold
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 59 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, SES-L
Severely Errored Second-Line. This is

a count of 1-second intervals
containing X or more bipolar
violations plus excessive zeros, or one
or more loss of signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, LOSS-L
Loss Of Signal Second-Line. This is a

one or more loss of signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, CVP-P
Code Violation P-bit Parity. This is

the count of P-bit parity errors.
Alert
N/C
Day, CVCP-P
Code Violations CP-bit Parity. This is

the count of CP-bit parity errors.
Alert
N/C
Day, CVCPPFE
Code Violations CP-bit Parity, Far

End. This is counted when the three
FEBE bits in a M-frame are not all set
to 1.
Alert
N/C
Day, ESP-P
Errored Second P-bit Parity. This is

more P-bit parity error, one or more
Alert
N/C
Day, ESCP-P
Errored Second CP-bit Parity. This is

more CP-bit parity error, one or more
Alert
N/C
Day, ESCPPFE
Errored Second CP-bit Parity, Far

intervals when the three FEBE bits in
a M-frame are not all set to 1.
Alert
N/C
Day, SESP-P
Severely Errored Second P-bit Parity.

containing X or more P-bit parity
errors, severely errored frame defects,
or one or more alarm indication signal
defects.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 60 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, SESCP-P

Parity. This is the count of 1-second
intervals containing X or more CP-bit
parity errors, severely errored frame
defects, or one or more alarm
indication signal defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, SESCPPFE

Parity, Far End. This is the count of
1-second intervals containing X or
more times when the three FEBE bits
in a M-frame are not all set to 1.
Alert
N/C
Day, UASP-P
Unavailable Second P-bit Parity. This

is the count of 1-second intervals for
which the DS3 path is unavailable.
contiguous SESP-Ps and becomes
without any SESP-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Day, UASCP-P
Unavailable Second CP-bit Parity.

for which the DS3 path is unavailable.
contiguous SESCP-Ps and becomes
without any SESCP-Ps.
Alert
N/C
Day, UASCPPFE
Unavailable Second CP-bit Parity, Far

intervals for which the DS3 path is
unavailable.
Alert
N/C
Day, SAS-P
SEF/AIS Second. This is the count of

1-second intervals containing one or
more severely errored frame defects or
alarm indication signals defects.
Alert
N/C
Day, SASCPPFE
SEF/AIS Second, Far End. This is the

one or more far end severely errored
frame defects or alarm indication
signals defects.
Alert
N/C
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 61 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, PSC
Protection Switching Count. This is

the count of the number of protection
switching events.
Alert
N/C
DS3 Framer
DS3 LOS
DS3 Loss Of Signal. This occurs

when no pulse of either positive or
negative polarity in the DS3 line are
detected.
Critical
Status Red
DS3 OOF
DS3 Out Of Frame. This occurs when

a particular density of F-bit or M-bit
errors are in the DS3 signal.
Critical
Status Red
DS3 RED
DS3 Red Alarm - Persistant OOF.

This is declared when the OOF defect
persists for 2.5s and is cleared when
the OOF is absent for 10s.
Critical
Status Red
DS3 AIS
DS3 Alarm Indication Signal. This

occurs upon detection of an alarm
indication signal in contiguous Mframes.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 Idle
DS3 Idle. This occurs when an idle

signal is detected.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 RAI
DS3 Remote Alarm Indication. This

occurs when any one of four alarm
signals are detected on the far-end
alarm channel (FEAC). These include
equipment failure, LOS failure, LOF
failure, and AIS failure.
Major
Status Red
DS3 Eq, SA
Far End Alarm & Control Signal DS3

Equipment Failure, Service Affecting.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 LOS

Loss Of Signal received.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 OOF

Out Of Frame received.
Minor
Status Yellow
FEAC
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 62 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
DS3 AIS

AIS received.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 IDLE

Idle received.
Minor
Status Yellow
DS3 Eq, NSA

Equipment Failure, Not Service
Affecting.
Minor
Status Yellow
APS Switch

Switch. This event occurs when the
system is switched to or from a
backup system.
Alert
N/C
Inhibit APS
Automatic Procection Switching is

inhibited.
Alert
Lockout Red
Equipment Fail
Equipment Failure
Alert
N/C
ATM Loss of Cell Delineation. This

occurs when the MUX is no longer
able to detect ATM cells on a specific
interface.
Alert
ATM Orange
Misc.
ATM
Lost Cell
Delineation
N/C = No Change
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 63 of 74
Table 8. DSX-1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181050L1
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, ESP
Errored Second-Path, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESP

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SEFS
Severely Errored Framing Second,

Near End. Per T1.231 SAS-P
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UASP
Unavailable Second-Path, Near End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CSS
Controlled Slip Second-Path, Near

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVP
Code Violation-Path, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESL
Errored Second-Line, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESL

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESBP
Errored Second Type B-Path, Near

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, DGRML
Degraded Minute-Line, Near End. Per

RFC-1406
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVL
Code Violation-Line, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, ESP
Errored Second-Path, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, SESP

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Threshold
Quarter Hour,
Near
Threshold
Daily, Near
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 64 of 74
Table 8. DSX-1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181050L1 (continued)
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Day, SEFS
Severely Errored Framing Second,

Near End. Per T1.231 SAS-P
Alert
N/C
Day, UASP
Unavailable Second-Path, Near End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, CSS
Controlled Slip Second-Path, Near

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, CVP
Code Violation-Path, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, ESL
Errored Second-Line, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, SESL

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, ESBP
Errored Second Type B-Path, Near

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, DGRML
Degraded Minute-Line, Near End. Per

RFC-1406
Alert
N/C
Day, CVL
Code Violation-Line, Near End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-PFE
Errored Second-Path, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SES-PFE

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SEFS-PFE
Severely Errored Framing Second, Far

End. Per T1.231 SAS-P
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UAS-PFE
Unavailable Second-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CSS-PFE
Controlled Slip Second-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Threshold
Quarter Hour,
Far
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 65 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, CV-PFE
Code Violation-Path, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ES-LFE
Errored Second-Line, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESB-PFE
Errored Second Type B-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Qtr, DGRML
Degraded Minute-Line, Far End. Per

RFC-1406
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-PFE
Errored Second-Path, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, SES-PFE

End. Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, SEFSPFE
Severely Errored Framing Second, Far

End. Per T1.231 SAS-P
Alert
N/C
Day, UAS-PFE
Unavailable Second-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, CSS-PFE
Controlled Slip Second-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, CV-PFE
Code Violation-Path, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, ES-LFE
Errored Second-Line, Far End. Per

T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, ESB-PFE
Errored Second Type B-Path, Far End.

Per T1.231
Alert
N/C
Day, DGRML
Degraded Minute-Line, Far End. Per

RFC-1406
Alert
N/C
DSX1 LOS
Loss of Signal, Per T1.231
Major
Alarm LED Red
DSX1 LOF
Loss of Frame, Per T1.231
Major
Alarm LED Red
Threshold
Daily, Far
DS2152
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 66 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
DSX1 AIS
Alarm Indication Signal, Per T1.231
Alert
Alarm LED Red
DSX1 RAI
Remote Alarm Indication, Per T1.231
Major
Alarm LED Yellow
DSX1 Red
Loss of Sync
Major
Alarm LED Red
DSX1
LPBKPAYLOAD
DSX-1 Payload Loopback to customer
Alert
Test LED Yellow
DSX1
LPBKLOCAL
DSX-1 Local Loopback to network
Alert
Test LED Yellow
DSX1
LPBKLINE
DSX-1 Remote Lopback to customer
Alert
Test LED Yellow
Hardware failure
Major
N/C
Major
N/C
Loopbacks
Equipment /
other
DSX1 EQPT
Fail
DSX1 SFT Fail Software failure
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 67 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

Info
Power Green
Yellow Red
Required
Out of Service
DSX-1
CGA Red
DSX-1 Loss Of Signal.
Major
ALM Red
CGA AIS Blue
DSX-1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Red
CGA Red
DS1 Loss Of Signal.
Major
ALM Yellow
CGA AIS Blue
DS1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Yellow
Loss of Signal on HDSL loop(s).

HTUC, HTUR, HRE(s)
Major
ALM Red

Switch.
Alert
ACT Green
Yellow
DS1
LOOP
Loss of Signal
Misc.
APS Switch
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 68 of 74

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

Info
Power Green
Yellow Red
Required
Out of Service
DSX-1
CGA Red
Major
ALM Red
CGA AIS Blue
DSX-1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Red
CGA Red
DS1 Loss Of Signal.
Major
ALM Yellow
CGA AIS Blue
DS1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Yellow

HTUC, HTUR, HRE(s)
Major
ALM Red

Switch.
Alert
ACT Green
Yellow
DS1
LOOP
Loss of Signal
Misc.
APS Switch
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 69 of 74
Table 11. HDSL2 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181111L2

Alarm
Description
Level
LED*

Info
Power Green
Yellow Red
Required
Out of Service
DSX-1
CGA Red
Major
ALM Red
CGA AIS Blue
DSX-1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Red
CGA Red
DS1 Loss Of Signal.
Major
ALM Yellow
CGA AIS Blue
DS1 AIS received.
Major
ALM Yellow

HTUC, HTUR, HRE(s)
Major
ALM Red

Switch.
Alert
ACT Green
Yellow
DS1
LOOP
Loss of Signal
Misc.
APS Switch
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 70 of 74
Table 12. Quad DSX-1/E1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181402L1
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Card Out of
Service

put in maintenance mode. All ports are
placed out of service when the card
state is changed to out of service.
Info
N/C
Port Out of
Service
Port is out of service. It has either

Info
OFF (UAS);
Flash (MA)
Required
DSX-1/E1
Framer
LOS
Loss of Signal.
Major
Red
LOF
Loss of Frame Alignment.
Major
Red
RAI
Remote Alarm Indication.
Major
Red
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal.
Alert
Red
Payload
Loopback
Remote Payload Loopback Active.
Alert
Yellow
Line Loopback
Remote Line Loopback Active.
Alert
Yellow
Local
Loopback
Local Network Loopback Active
Alert
Yellow
Qtr, ESP
Errored Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SESP
Severely Errored Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, SEFS
Severely Errored Framing Seconds
Alert
N/C
Qtr, UASP
Unavailable Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CSS
Controlled Slip Seconds.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVP
Code Violations-Path.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESL
Errored Seconds-Line.
Alert
N/C
Testing
Quarter Hour
Threshold
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 71 of 74
Table 12. Quad DSX-1/E1 Access Module Alarm Summary 1181402L1 (continued)
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Qtr, SESL
Severely Errored Seconds-Line.
Alert
N/C
Qtr, ESBP
Bursty Errored Seconds
Alert
N/C
Qtr, DGRML
Degraded Minutes
Alert
N/C
Qtr, CVL
Code Violations-Line.
Alert
N/C
Day, ESP
Errored Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Day, SESP
Severely Errored Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Day, SEFS
Severely Errored Framing Seconds
Alert
N/C
Day, UASP
Unavailable Seconds-Path.
Alert
N/C
Day, CSS
Controlled Slip Seconds.
Alert
N/C
Day, CVP
Code Violations-Path.
Alert
N/C
Day, ESL
Errored Seconds-Line.
Alert
N/C
Day, SESL
Severely Errored Seconds-Line.
Alert
N/C
Day, ESBP
Bursty Errored Seconds
Alert
N/C
Day, DGRML
Degraded Minutes
Alert
N/C
Day, CVL
Code Violations-Line.
Alert
N/C
Daily
Threshold
N/C = No Change
UAS = Unassigned
MA = Maintenance
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 72 of 74
Table 13. Octal DS1 IMA Access Module Alarm Summary 1181409L1
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Port Alarms
AIS ALM
Blue Alarm (AIS) is set when over a 3ms

window, 5 or less zeros are received. It is
cleared when over a 3 ms window, 6 or
more zeros are received
ALERT
RED
RED ALM
Red Alarm is set when 192 consecutive

zeros are received and is cleared when 14
or more ones out of 112 possible bit
positions are received starting with the
first one received
MAJOR
RED
YLW ALM
Yellow Alarm is set in D4 mode when bit

2 of 256 consecutive channels is set to
zero for at leat 254 occurences and cleared
when bit 2 of 256 consecutive channels is
set to zero for less than 254 occurences.
In ESF, it is set when 16 consecutive
patterns of 00FFh appear in the FDL and
is cleared when 14 or less patterns of
00FFh out of 16 possible appear in the
FDL
MAJOR
RED
LOS ALM
Loss of Signal is set when there is no

signal present and is cleared when a signal
is present
MAJOR
RED
T1 LBK
T1 Loopback is set when the T1 port is in

a loopback away from the port interface.
INFO
YELLOW
HOST LB
Host Loopback is set when the T1 port is

in a loopback toward the port interface
INFO
YELLOW
Metal Test
Metallic Test Access is set when the T1

port is requesting or is accessing the
metallic test bus.
INFO
YELLOW
2002, ADTRAN,
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 73 of 74
Table 13. Octal DS1 IMA Access Module Alarm Summary 1181409L1 (continued)
Alarm
Description
Level
LED*
Link Alarms
LIF FAIL
Loss IMA Frame is set when the IMA link

has lost its IMA frame and is cleared once
the LINK has restablished the IMA frame.
MAJOR
RED
LODS FAIL
Loss of Delay Synchronization is set when

the maximum differential delay between
the IMA links is exceeded and is cleared
when the delay is less than the maximum
MAJOR
RED
INFO
RED
MAJOR
RED
INFO
YELLOW
Group Alarms
GROUP ALM
Group alarm is set when the group state

machine reaches an error state and is
cleared if the group state machine is in a
normal state
GROUP OOS
Group Out-of-Service is set when the

group is taken out-of-service and is
cleared when the group is in service
GROUP TEST
Group Test is set when the group is in a

loop back and is cleared when the group is
taken out of the loopback
should be red.
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TATSG801-1E

SECTION 8
Page 74 of 74
2002, ADTRAN,
6TAAPX000-1E

SECTION 9
Page 1 of 2
Total Access 3000/3010 Appendices

Find Your Topic in the List Below
Then Go To:
Warranty Information and Customer Service
APX-901
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPX000-1E

SECTION 9
Page 2 of 2
2002, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPX901-1E

APX-901
Page 1 of 2
WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE

ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its
published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at
www.adtran.com/warranty.
U.S. and Canada customers can also receive a copy of the warranty via ADTRANs toll-free
faxback server at 877-457-5007.
Request Document 414 for the U.S. and Canada Carrier Networks Equipment Warranty.
Request Document 901 for the U.S. and Canada Enterprise Networks Equipment Warranty.
Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, CAPS requests, or further information.
ADTRAN Sales
Pricing/Availability
800-827-0807
ADTRAN Technical Support
Pre-sales Applications/Post-sales Technical Assistance
800-726-8663
Standard hours: Monday-Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST
Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day
ADTRAN Repair/CAPS
Return for Repair/Upgrade
(256) 963-8722
Repair and Return Address
ADTRAN, Inc.
CAPS Department
901 Explorer Boulevard
Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807
Please include the part number with your request.
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
6TAAPX901-1E

APX-901
Page 2 of 2
2003, ADTRAN, Inc.
ADTRAN, Inc.
Search:
Home
Products
Solutions
Service/Support
Training
Where to Buy
Login
Advanced
Search
Partners
Contact Us
Service/Support > Warranty and Repair Information

Warranty and Repair Information
Inside North America Product Warranty (USA, CANADA , MEXICO AND THE
CARIBBEAN)
Carrier Products Warranty
Enterprise Products Warranty
Outside North America Product Warranty

Outside North America Warranty
Repair and Return Policies

Battery Replacement/Recycling Procedures
Feedback
Trademarks
Privacy Policy
http://www.adtran.com/adtranpx/Rooms/DisplayP...BOID%5BED6D2F8DCE50744FAEBB1DCDD4AC23EA%5D%5D [5/3/2003 8:07:50 PM]

Total Access 3000 System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Total Access 3000 System Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Total Access 3000 System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Total Access 3000/3010

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

To the Holder of this manual

901 Explorer Boulevard

About this Manual

Provides users with an overview of the Total Access 3000/3010 system.

Provides information to assist network designers incorporating a Total

Application Guides (APP)

Provides information on specific Total Access 3000/3010 wiring and

Site Preparation (PREP)

Installation and Turn-up Pocedures (NTP)

Provides step-by-step instructions for installers on how to install a

Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP)

Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)

Provides the detailed level procedures called out in top-level

Troubleshooting Guide (TSG)

Provides alarm codes, determinations, and LED status information.

Provides warranty and ADTRAN contact information.

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

Federal Communications Commission Statement

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

Total Access 3000/3010 System Description

Then Turn To:

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

Total Access 3000/3010 System Description

System Overview .................................................................................................................................... 3

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

4.3.3 T1-OR ............................................................................................................................... 24

Front View of Shelf ..................................................................................................................... 5

Access Module Installation and Maintenance Practices ........................................................... 20

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

1.1 General Overview

1.2 Features and Benefits

Total Access 3000/3010 will easily integrate future technologies

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

Total Access 3000/3010 Shelf and Backplane

Figure 1. Front View of Shelf

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010

Total Access 3000/3010

Figure 2. Total Access 3000/3010

2003, ADTRAN, Inc.

Total Access 3000/3010 System Manual

TOTAL ACCESS 3000/3010